Complete Spec Guide (Low Res) PDF

Fire systems
Specifiers
Guide
Fire and voice alarm systems
1. Introduction
Fire and voice alarm systems
Specifier's Guide
Specifiers
Guide
Introduction
Protecting your business,
ensuring continuity.
Eatons knowledge, expertise and products help you protect your people, reputation
and property. From power distribution and critical power management, to fire detection,
access control, mains and emergency lighting, we can help you comply with relevant
regulations and create an environment to keep your business running safe and strong.
Design excellence
Ensuring for energy efficiency,
business comfort, aesthetics
continuity & productivity
Increase Reliable systems

operational for safety of
efficiencies people & assets
Flexible, scalable
solutions for
peace of mind
End to end solutions for: Eatons capabilities include:

Commercial offices Lighting & controls Backup power & circuit
Hospitality & leisure Life safety & mass notification protection
Education Monitoring & communications Power distribution
Retail Structural solutions Transformers
Industrial & warehousing Motor control Services
Healthcare
Introduction
Distinctive capabilities
Ankara Esenboa International Airport

Ankara, Turkey
St Pancras Station
London, UK
Doncaster Cultural and Civic Quarter

Doncaster, UK
Introduction
Excellence and innovation in

fire safety solutions.
When it comes to protecting life and property theres no room to compromise.
You need a partner that can support you with tried and tested products, global
capabilities and local delivery.
Operating out of Doncaster, UK, Eaton's fire business is a leading
manufacturer and global supplier of high quality fire systems. With our ability to
provide complete systems, not just components, you can be confident in the
knowledge that all of our products have been specifically designed and tested
to ensure that they are all fully compatible to form a reliable and compliant fire
detection and alarm system.
Our large multi-disciplined research and development team is responsible for
the integration of the latest technology into the full range of fire products,
ensuring that our products are designed to the latest fire industry standards
and manufactured to the highest levels of quality. The many innovative, new
and improved products we provide demonstrate our commitment to staying
at the leading edge of technological development for fire detection and alarm
equipment.
Our core values and aims are:

Investment in people
To partner with our customers to develop open, long term relationships
To have an unpretentious, straightforward and honest approach to
business
The continued investment in research and development
Investment in manufacturing facilities to ensure they remain world class
To produce products which are in full compliance with standards
To operate in an environmentally friendly way - in the products we design
and the facilities in which we make them
To have high ethical standards
Our products and services are recognised by a wide range of accreditation

bodies, so you can count on products that comply with national and industry
standards, while receiving full support, from initial system design to monitoring
and service.
ERTI
N C F
IO I
C
T
AT
PREVEN
LPCB
ION BO
S
A
S
R
LO D
SIGNALING
4AC5
FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
Introduction
An introduction to fire systems
Introduction
Manufacturing fire solutions is just

one small element of what we do.
Services
We believe that ownership of fire detection systems extends beyond the
initial purchase of the products themselves. We therefore offer customers a
wide range of services to ensure that their installations not only meet basic
operational and safety requirements on day one, but will continue to do so
throughout their lifetime.
From training and support on how to select products for a specific application
through to the provision of routine on-site testing and maintenance. You can be
sure that Eatons fire business is ready to support you, whatever your needs.
Major projects
Design and installation of a fire detection system can often be a complex
process, with each project often bringing its own challenges in making sure the
system is compliant, reliable and easy to operate. Our team of engineers will
partner with your project management team using our expertise to meet the
specific requirements of your project.
Eaton have a great deal of experience handling major projects, including;
Doncaster Civic and Cultural Quarter, London St Pancras and the Hyatt
Resort and Spa, Vietnam. We can help not just with the product and technical
support but also by providing guidance and advice to specifiers and project
management teams on topics such as standards and regulations.
We are BAFE SP203 certified for design, commissioning and maintenance of
fire detection systems, giving our customers the peace of mind they need that
our systems conform with all necessary safety requirements.
Technical support
Our dedicated technical support team are able to offer customers around the
world advice and guidance on a wide variety of technical matters via telephone
or email. In the vast majority of cases, a process of systematic questioning
enables the team to diagnose the challenge and advise the customer on the
appropriate solution.
Sometimes more detailed troubleshooting and analysis methods may be
used to determine the actual requirements and the best way of resolving it.
If necessary, the technical support team will also call on the knowledge and
expertise of Eatons fire business product management, R&D and design
departments to help resolve the customers issue.
In addition, the technical support team can provide customers with assistance
on product information, installation and operating instructions, and the
legislative requirements of your fire detection systems.
Introduction

Eaton manufacture and supply a range of different
types of fire systems, meaning we can provide a
high quality fire solution whatever your need is.
There are a vast array of fire detection systems
and devices on the market today, ranging from
the relatively simple to the most technically
sophisticated. Modern automatic fire detection
systems are available in two types, conventional
and addressable - which, broadly speaking, tend
to be used in smaller and larger installations
respectively. For more detail you can read our fire
systems guide over the next few pages.
The basics of fire detection

A control panel is the hub of the detection system.
All the devices which are part of the fire detection
system are connected to this central panel which
processes the signals received from the input
devices and gives out signals to the output devices.
Input devices such as detectors measure signals of
combustion and communicate with panels, which
in turn trigger output devices such as an audible or
visual alarm device. Fire alarm panels can be further
sub segmented into addressable or conventional
panels.
There are various types of fire detection systems
each suited to different applications or building
types. A fire detection system can vary significantly
in both complexity and price, from a single panel
with a detector and sounder in a small commercial
property to a complex intelligent addressable
system in a multi-occupancy building.
A fire detection system can comprise of detection
devices, notification devices and manual callpoints.
The size of the building determines the number
of detectors that would be required. The system
works via the control panel receiving signals from
the detection devices and then sending transmitting
signals to the notification devices.
Introduction
Conventional fire systems
Conventional systems
The philosophy of a conventional system revolves around
dividing the building into a number of areas called zones. The
detectors and call points within each zone are then wired on a
dedicated separate circuit.
In the event of a detector or call point being triggered, the

panel is able to identify which circuit contains the triggered
device and thereby indicate which zone the fire alarm has come
from. The indicated zone can then be manually searched to
locate the triggered device.
With this type of functionality a conventional system is best

used in smaller builds where it wouldnt be difficult to locate
the triggered device in a given zone.
Typical conventional system architecture
Example conventional system layout

Introduction
Addressable fire systems
Addressable systems
Intelligent addressable systems overcome the limitations of
conventional systems as each fire detecting sensor or call point
is electronically coded with a unique identification or 'address'
which is programmed into the device during installation.
By using each devices' unique address, the control panel

is able to conduct two way communication with any of the
addressable devices connected to the system.
Under normal conditions the control panel continuously

interrogates each device in sequence and analyses the reply
to determine the status of each sensor or call point. The panel
checks whether each device is functioning correctly and also
the amount of smoke or heat that the device is currently
sensing.
With the functionality of being able to pinpoint exactly which

device is being triggered in an alarm or for a fault, addressable
systems are perfect for mid to large size builds with multiple
rooms and floors.
Zone 1 Zone 2
15 16 1 2
14 3
13 4
12 5
11 6
10 9 8 7
Zone 3 Zone 4
Typical addressable system architecture
Example addressable system layout

Introduction
Emergency voice communication systems
Emergency voice communication systems (EVCS)

What is disabled refuge? wardens to call the control point during fire drills
and primary evacuation phases before the fire
A disabled refuge is a relatively safe area within services arrive and assume control.
a building or exit staircase for mobility impaired
occupants, allowing building management and What is a disabled refuge EVC system?
emergency services to safely assist these people
from the building. An EVC System (Emergency Voice Communication
System) is a fixed, monitored and maintained,
Mobility impairment is defined as not being able to bi-directional, full duplex voice communication
walk 200m continuously without aid, and includes system. These systems are designed to assist the
arthritis sufferers, people with leg and back injuries orderly evacuation of disabled or mobility impaired
and women over 6 months term pregnancy. people and enhance fire fighters' communication
during emergencies.
What is a fire telephone?
A disabled refuge system is not just for use during
Fire telephones are hardwired full duplex a fire and must be available at all times. Building
communications systems with monitoring and Regulations insist all new non-domestic buildings
battery backup and are required in buildings over with more than one storey provide refuge areas
4 storeys in many countries in the world (in the relatively safe places where people who cannot
UK this is governed by BS9999, 2008). These are easily use fire escapes and evacuation lifts, can call
provided as a backup to traditional firemans radio for assistance and wait until help arrives. Simple,
systems, which can fail to operate in many high rise effective two-way communication (refuge system)
environments due to the large amount of steel in in these areas is essential, firstly to assist rescue
the building, and the corona effect of fire on radio teams in determining where assistance is required
broadcasts. and secondly to reassure people help is on the way.
Fire telephones are also required in fire fighting
lift lobbies when these lifts are provided within a
building. Fire telephones can also be used for fire
Introduction
UL listed fire systems and voice alarm systems
UL listed fire systems

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) is an in South East Asia and several major projects in
independent product safety certification the Middle East including the prestigious Riyadh
organisation, established in 1894, to develop Financial District in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
standards and test procedures for products,
The Eaton UL range is designed to provide a
materials, components, assemblies, tools and
solution for all sizes of project, from the simple
equipment. Chiefly dealing with product safety
small stand alone system to the large multi
it also evaluates and certifies the efficiency of
panel networked system with PA/VA and BMS
a companys business processes through its
integration.
magnificent system registration programs.
Since the launch of our UL Listed fire product SIGNALING
range, several prestigious projects worldwide have
been supplied including Hyatt Resort and Spa,
Shangri-la at the Fort and Times Square projects
4AC5
FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
Public address/voice alarm systems

Under BS5839 Pt.8 2013, Voice Alarm (VA) systems are recommended for all public buildings and multi-
storey buildings over four floors. VA systems are the quickest way to evacuate the public and staff from a
building.
Following fire detection, automated messages control the flow of people in stair wells and corridors
allowing an orderly evacuation without panic. These messages are supplemented by spoken messages
from the fire service or management suite confirming the validity and need to leave the building. This
positive confirmation speeds evacuation and avoids the false alarm mentality reducing the risk of death
from fire.
2. Intelligent adressable systems
Specifiers guide
Intelligent addressable systems
Sophisticated functionality,
simple operation
2.0 Intelligent addressable systems
CF3000 and compatible devices 2.0 Intelligent addressable 2.0

Introduction............................................................................................................................... 2.1
Control panels............................................................................................................................ 2.2
Repeater panels......................................................................................................................... 2.3
Accessories............................................................................................................................... 2.4
Standard interfaces.................................................................................................................... 2.5
Micro interfaces......................................................................................................................... 2.6
BMS and networking interfaces................................................................................................ 2.7
Ancillaries.................................................................................................................................. 2.8
System software tools............................................................................................................... 2.9
Test equipment........................................................................................................................ 2.10
EATON - SPECIFIERS GUIDE - FIRE AND VOICE ALARM SYSTEMS SGTEXT February 2015
Specifiers guide
2.1 Introduction
An introduction to
intelligent addressable fire systems...
Standard conventional systems utilise simple two state If whilst continually interrogating the smoke and heat
detectors, which simply provide a switch type signal to sensors, the panel determines that the data gathered
the conventional control panel. from a specific device is appropriate to instigate either
a fire, fault or pre alarm condition, it uses the unique
To enable the source of the alarm to be identified, each
identifying number or address to determine which device
zone must be wired using a separate circuit, furthermore
is involved. Consequently the panel can pinpoint and
in the event of a fire alarm being triggered, the panel can
identify precisely which device has triggered the fire,
only identify which zone contains the triggered device, it
fault or pre alarm condition.
is then necessary to manually search the affected zone
to discover the actual cause of the alarm. This level of sophistication removes the need for
each zone of the building to be wired as a separate
Intelligent Addressable systems overcome these
circuit. For this reason intelligent addressable system
limitations, each fire detecting sensor or callpoint is
components are typically connected to the panel using a
electronically coded with a unique identification or
small number of large loops thus greatly simplifying the
address which is programmed into the device during
installation of the system and reducing the installation
installation.
cost.
The control panel is then able to conduct two way
Detectors instead of being simple two state devices
communication with any of the addressable devices
now function as sensors continually communicating with
connected to the system by using the unique
the control panel and providing information regarding
address number to define which device it wishes to
the temperature or concentration of smoke in their local
communicate with. This operates in a similar manner
environment.
to that of a telephone number enabling communication
between specific telephones.
Under normal conditions the control panel continuously Zone 1 Zone 2
interrogates each device in sequence using a low

power digitally pulsed signal, and analyses the reply to
determine the status of the sensor or callpoint. 15 16 1 2
In this manner, the panel can ascertain whether each 14 3

device is functioning correctly and also discover the
amount of smoke or heat that the device is currently
sensing. This technology allows the panel to make 13 4
intelligent decisions as to the appropriate action to take
based on the information it receives from the individual
sensors.
12 5
This has many advantages, for example very slow build
up of apparent smoke density seen by a sensor can
cause a warning or pre alarm condition to be triggered by 11 6
the alarm panel prior to the situation becoming serious
enough to warrant a full alarm. 10 9 8 7
A typical practical benefit of this technology is the

situation whereby airborne dust particles enter smoke
detectors and mimic the appearance of smoke, over time Zone 3 Zone 4
the concentration of dust can increase to a point where
Typical addressable system architecture
it can cause the detector to falsely trigger an alarm
condition. With an intelligent addressable system, a pre
alarm condition will normally be triggered rather than a
full alarm giving the building operator the opportunity
to clean or replace the sensor rather than suffer the
disruption of an unwanted false alarm.
Specifiers guide 2.2 Control panels
CF2000GCPD range -
Intelligent addressable control panel
The Eaton CF2000GCPD is an entry level intelligent Features and benefits

addressable control panel which can be configured for
either 1 or 2 loop operation, and is certified to EN54 Configurable as a 1 or 2 loop panel
parts 2 & 4. Up to 200 addresses per loop (up to 60 sounders/
beacons and up to 20 I/Os, subject to loop loading
The panel has a graphic display, providing a simple menu
calculations)
driven end user interface. With the CF2000GCPDs
ability to support Eaton cause and effect programming Soft addressing
and a range of user controllable functions it makes the Menu-driven graphic screen
panel suitable for a varied range of projects from small Multi-language selection capability
warehouses to small/medium office developments as
Integral battery and power supply
well as many small industrial applications.
2x7Ah batteries included
As with all Eaton intelligent addressable panels, the
Easy to operate end user controls
CF2000GCPD uses spur tolerant soft addressing to
minimise installation time and remove the potential Full system integrity with Eaton developed protocol
for errors often associated with many forms of manual Core range of compatible devices
addressing. 4 sounder circuits
Monitored for open and short circuit (max 3.0A
combined)
KERHETS
SA ERTI
& C N C F
IO I
ER
D
SK BRAN
C
T
TIF
AT
PREVEN
LPCB
IERING
ION BO
EN
AB
SV
SBSC
S
A
S
R
LO D
INTYGAD
PRODUKT
Specifiers guide
2.2 Control panels
Technical specification Installation

Code CF2000GCPD The CF2000GCPD has been designed with ease of installation as a
major objective.
Description 2 loop control panel
Standards EN54 Pt2 1997, A1: 2006 EN54 Pt4 1997, A1: The panel back box can be surface mounted with cable entry points to
2002 & A2: 2006 both the top and rear. The mother board and integrated power supply
are mounted on a sub chassis which is easily removed to aid panel
Specification
fitting.
Number of loops 2
Back box mounting is further assisted with the provision of a drill
Addresses per loop 200
template allowing the mounting screw holes to be pre-drilled and the
Panel sounder circuits 4 outputs, 1A total (programmed in pairs -
top two mounting screws fitted prior to final positioning of the back
outputs 1 & 2, 3 & 4)
box.
Class change facility Operated by external, normally open, volt
free contacts Ample room is provided within the back box for the termination of
Auxiliary relay One set of change over contacts, operated external cables and bonding of cable screen wires.
in the event of fire activation
Auxiliary fire System configuration
Routing equipment output Monitored 24V dc, 30mA (max) auxiliary fire The CF2000GCPD can be configured to operate as a 1 or 2 loop panel.
Protection equipment output Monitored 24V dc, 30mA (max) auxiliary Using Eaton system protocol the panel auto learns the equipment
fault mounted on the loop(s) and soft addresses each item, ensuring a
Routing equipment output Monitored 12V dc, 30mA (max) simple setup procedure and reducing the time required for system
Mains input voltage 230V ac +10% / -15% setup.
Operating voltage 24V dc All loop mounted equipment has integral short circuit isolators,
Batteries 2 x 12V 7Ah ensuring loop integrity is maintained should a short circuit fault occur
Standby duration 24 hours (dependant on loop loading) on the loop.
Environmental A comprehensive range of interface units are available and compatible
Operating temperature -5C to +40C with the CF2000GCPD.
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 75% RH
Physical Standard panel connections
Construction Back box - mild steel, door - PC/ABS
COOPER CONVENTIONAL SOUNDERS

Colour Graphite 6K8 EOL RESISTOR*
Dimensions (H x W x D) 400mm x 320mm x 170mm15kg

LOOP 1 CONNECTIONS
LOOP 2 CONNECTIONS
Weight 15kg
Ingress protection IP30 (IF REQUIRED) }
Cable entry Top: 20 entry cable knockouts (20mm) Rear:
7 entry cable knockouts (20mm)
NO C NC - + - + - + - + S+ S- F- F+ S+ S- F- F+ - + + 1- + 2 - + 1- + 2 - TX+ TX-
AUX FAULT 24V FIRE FIRE

Dimensions
LOOP 1 LOOP 2 SOUNDER SOUNDER MIMIC
RELAY RELAY O/P R/E P/E CLASS CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2 REPEATER
0V 26V 26V CHANGE
W * required to be fitted to terminal if circuits not used
H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)

400 320 170
Catalogue numbers
Code Description
CF2000GCPD Intelligent addressable 2 loop control panel
MFALOG Fire alarm system log book
CF1000VDS range -
The CF1000VDS range is available as a high specification Features and benefits

1 or 2 loop intelligent addressable control panel,
offering sophisticated functionality with simple end user Available in 1 and 2 loop versions
operation. Up to 200 addresses per loop
The simplicity of operation, powerful cause and effect Full network capability up to 126 panels
programming capability and competitive pricing make Soft addressing
the system suitable for a wide range of small to medium Large versatile touch-screen user interface
sized projects.
Multi-language selection capability
CF1000VDS uses soft addressing to minimise installation Integral battery and power supply
time and remove the potential for error associated with
Flexible cause and effect programming
manual addressing.
Simple to operate end user touch-screen interface
These panels can operate as a stand alone panel or as
Flexible distributed network capability
part of a network withthe Eaton range of CF3000 panels
or other CF1000VDS panels (additional network card Full range of compatible accessories
required). Easy to design system cause and effect using site
installer software
The CF1000VDS range of panels have an integral power
supply and are supplied with batteries as standard. Full system integrity with Eaton developed protocol
An extensive range of compatible intelligent addressable

system ancillaries are available to work with the
CF1000VDS range all of which incorporate an integral
short circuit isolator to provide maximum protection
against short circuit faults on the loop.
Specifiers guide
2.2 Control panels
Technical specification
Code CF1100VDS CF1200VDS
Description 1 loop control panel 2 loop control panel
Standards EN54 Pt2,1997, A1:2006, EN54 Pt4,1997 A1:2002, EN54 Pt2,1997, A1:2006, EN54 Pt4,1997 A1:2002,
A2:2006, EN54 Pt13: 2005 A2:2006, EN54 Pt13: 2005
Specification
Number of loops 1 2
Addresses per loop 200 200
Number of conventional sounder circuits 2 monitored for open and short circuit (max 1.5A 2 monitored for open and short circuit (max 1.5A
combined) combined)
Auxiliary fire routing equipment output 24V dc 30mA (max) 24V dc 30mA (max)
(monitored)
Auxiliary fire protection equipment output 24V dc 30mA (max) 24V dc 30mA (max)
(monitored)
Auxiliary fault routing equipment output 12V dc 30mA (max) 12V dc 30mA (max)
(monitored)
System operating voltage 24V dc (nom) 24V dc (nom)
Mains input supply 230V ac +10% / -15% 230V ac +10% / -15%
Class change facility Terminals for connection of external contacts, can also Terminals for connection of external contacts, can also
be instigated via input interface be instigated via input interface
Auxiliary relay 1 set of changeover contacts operate in event of fire 1 set of changeover contacts operate in event of fire
condition condition
Output ports RS485, RS232 for connection of repeaters etc RS485, RS232 for connection of repeaters etc
Standby duration Dependant on loop loading and battery configuration Dependant on loop loading and battery configuration
Battery 2 x 12V 7Ah 2 x 12V 7Ah
Environmental
Operating temperature -5C to +40C -5C to +40C
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 75% RH 0 to 75% RH
Physical
Construction Back box - steel Back box - steel
Dimensions (H x W x D) 375mm x 357mm x 95mm 375mm x 357mm x 95mm
Weight 8kg 8kg
Ingress protection IP30 IP30
Cable entries Top: cable knockouts (20mm) Top: cable knockouts (20mm)
Back: cable aperture Back: cable aperture
System networking Fully networkable up to 126 panels (requires additional Fully networkable up to 126 panels (requires additional
network card, per panel) network card, per panel)
Dimensions
D W

Panel 375 357 95
Cutout 345 325 50
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
1 loop control panel CF1100VDS
2 loop control panel CF1200VDS
Add to end of product code if network card required NC
Network kit (for retro fit) DF61NETKIT
Passive repeater panel CF3000PRG
Touch-screen repeater panel CTPR3000
Fire alarm system log book MFALOG
CF3000 range -
Eatons CF3000 is a high specification intelligent Features and benefits

addressable control panel which is available in various
loop configurations. These panels combine sophisticated Available in 1, 2 and 4 loop versions
functionality with simple operation and an aesthetically Up to 200 addresses per loop
pleasing design. Full network capability up to 126 panels
The large capacity, ability to support complex cause and Soft addressing
effect programming and wide range of user controllable Large versatile touch screen user interface
functions make the system suitable for a diverse range
Multi-language selection capability
of projects from sheltered housing to large office
developments. Integral printer (optional)
Integral battery and power supply
The CF3000 uses soft addressing to minimise installation
time and remove the potential for error associated with Flexible cause and effect programming
manual addressing. It can operate as a stand alone panel Simple to operate end user touch-screen interface
or as part of a networked system. They have powerful Flexible distributed network capability
programming options that allow configurable control over Full range of compatible accessories
whether messages from specific panels are transmitted
around the network or remain local. Easy to design system cause and effect using site
installer software
An extensive range of compatible intelligent addressable Full system integrity with Eatons managed protocol
systems ancillaries are available to work with the CF3000
all of which incorporate an integral short circuit isolator to
provide maximum protection against short circuits on the
external loop.
Specifiers guide
2.2 Control panels
Code CF30001G CF30002G CF30004G
Description 1 loop control panel 2 loop control panel 4 loop control panel
Standards EN54 Pt2,1997, A1:2006, EN54 Pt4,1997, EN54 Pt2,1997, A1:2006, EN54 Pt4,1997, EN54 Pt2,1997, A1:2006, EN54 Pt4,1997,
A1:2002, A2:2006 EN54 Pt13: 2005 A1:2002, A2:2006 EN54 Pt13: 2005 A1:2002, A2:2006 EN54 Pt13: 2005
Specification
Number of loops 1 2 4
Addresses per loop 200 200 200
Number of conventional 4 monitored for open and short circuit 4 monitored for open and shortcircuit 4 monitored for open and short circuit
sounder circuits
Auxiliary fire routing 24V 30mA (max) 24V 30mA (max) 24V 30mA (max)
equipment output
(monitored)
Auxiliary fire protection 24V 30mA (max) 24V 30mA (max) 24V 30mA (max)
equipment output
(monitored)
Auxiliary fault routing 12V 30mA (max) 12V 30mA (max) 12V 30mA (max)
equipment output
(monitored)
System operating voltage 24V dc (nom) 24V dc (nom) 24V dc (nom)
Mains input supply 230V ac +10% / -15% 230V ac +10% / -15% 230V ac +10% / -15%
Class change facility Terminals for connection of external Terminals for connection of external Terminals for connection of external
contacts, can also be instigated via input contacts, can also be instigated via input contacts, can also be instigated via input
interface interface interface
Auxiliary relay 1 set of changeover contacts operate in 1 set of changeover contacts operate in 1 set of changeover contacts operate in
event of fire condition event of fire condition event of fire condition
Output ports RS485, RS232 for connection of repeaters RS485, RS232 for connection of repeaters RS485, RS232 for connection of repeaters
etc etc etc
Standby duration Dependant on loop loading and battery Dependant on loop loading and battery Dependant on loop loading and battery
configuration configuration configuration
Battery 2 x 12Ah (standard versions) 2 x 12Ah (standard versions) 4 x 12Ah (EB 2 x 12Ah (standard versions) 4 x 12Ah (EB
versions) versions)
Environmental
Operating temperature -5C to +40C -5C to +40C -5C to +40C
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 75% RH 0 to 75% RH 0 to 75% RH
Physical
Construction Back box - mild steel, front door - PC/ABS Back box - mild steel, front door - PC/ABS Back box - mild steel, front door - PC/ABS
Dimensions (H x W x D) Standard versions: 397mm x 497mm x Standard versions: 397mm x 497mm x Standard versions: 397mm x 497mm x
180mm 180mm EB Versions: 397mm x 497mm 180mm EB Versions: 397mm x 497mm
x 280mm x 280mm
Weight 18kg 18kg 18kg
Ingress protection IP30 IP30 IP30
Cable entries Top: 31 cable knockouts (20mm) Back: 12 Top: 31 cable knockouts (20mm) Back: 12 Top: 31 cable knockouts (20mm) Back: 12
cable knockouts (20mm) cable knockouts (20mm) cable knockouts (20mm)
System networking Fully networkable up to 126 panels Fully networkable up to 126 panels Fully networkable up to 126 panels
(requires additional network card - 1 per (requires additional network card - 1 per (requires additional network card - 1 per
panel) panel) panel)
Dimensions Catalogue numbers

D2 Description Code
W 1 Loop control panel CF30001G
1 Loop control panel, integral printer CF30001GP
2 Loop control panel CF30002G
H 2 Loop control panel, extended battery CF30002GEB
2 Loop control panel, integral printer, extended battery CF30002GPEB
4 Loop control panel CF30004G
4 Loop control panel, extended battery CF30004GEB
D1 4 Loop control panel, integral printer, extended battery CF30004GPEB
Add to end of product code if network card required NC
H W D1 D2 Touch-screen repeater panel CTPR3000
Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Passive repeater panel CF3000PRG
Standard 397 497 55 125 Hinged protective cover kit CF3000COV
EB 397 497 55 225 Network kit (for retro fit) DF6000NETKIT
Specifiers guide 2.3 Repeater panels
CF3000PRG - Intelligent addressable

passive repeater panel
The CF3000PRG is a cost effective passive repeater Features and benefits

panel which can be programmed via its informative
display to be either fully passive (display only) or semi 2 x 40 Backlit LCD display
passive (restricted system control). 6 Supervisory LEDs
When loop connected the repeater panel will display the Loop and network connected versions available
system information text of the connected control panel Maximum of 20 repeaters can be connected to a
and will provide a fire indication, with panel number, loop
of any connected network control panel that has fire Integral battery and power supply
activation.
Can be surface or semi-recessed mounted
The CF3000PRG repeater panel only requires Limited system control in supervisor mode:
programming with local text information. - Silence
In addition to the repeater panels main menu driven 2 - Evacuate
x 40 backlit LCD display, which provides system status - Reset
information, it also has 6 supervisory LEDs (power on, Compact economy panel
alarm, fault, supervisory, test in progress, and scroll). Menu driven LCD display
Requires no programming (netowrk version only)
and is easily set up without a laptop
Reduced wiring and installation costs
Numeric access code (no lost keys)
Specifiers guide
2.3 Repeater panels
Technical specification Dimensions

D1
W
Code CF3000PRG
Description Passive repeater panel
Standards EN54 Pt4
Specification
Mains input voltage 230V ac +10% / -15% H
MUTE
BUZZER
SCROLL
1 2 3 4 5
Operating voltage 24V dc

System indicators Power on, fire, fault, test, disable and scroll
System controls Silence alarms, evacuate and reset
Input ports RS232 (for connection of programmer)
Battery 1 x 12V 3.2Ah
D2
Standby duration 24 hours
H (mm) W (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm)
Environmental 270 332 45 47
Operating temperature 0C to +25C
Physical Installation
Construction PC/ABS
Wall mounted by means of 4 fixing screws.
Colour Light Grey
Dimensions (H x W x D) 332mm x 270mm x 92mm Cable entry at top or back.
Weight 3.6kg 12 top entry gland holes with push out blanking plugs.
Ingress protection IP30 4 separate rear access cable entry facilities.
Compatibility
Local mains supply required.
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems
System functionality Device overview

Panel operates in either normal, supervisor or engineer mode. Panel can be connected to either the detection loop of a single
Supervisor and engineer modes are accessed via 4 digit pass panel or to a network as part of a networked system.
codes. Supplied with integral power supply and standby battery
Supervisor mode allows silence, evacuate and reset commands
to be sent to host panel (loop connected) or to network (network
connected).
Engineer mode enables password to be changed if required and
allows access to text download menu.
When connected to network, all text is transmitted via network,
changes to other network panels update automatically.
When connected to a detector loop, text for host is downloaded
to repeater.
Zonal fire and fault indication is by means of 2 x 40 character LCD
display.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Passive repeater panel (loop connected) CF3000PRG
Passive repeater panel (network conntected) CF3000PRGNC
CTPR3000 - Intelligent addressable

touch-screen repeater panel
The CTPR3000 touch-screen repeater panel provides Features and benefits

sophisticated touch-screen functionality yet achieves
a simple end-user interface operation within a compact Large versatile touch-screen user interface
panel design. Multi-language selection capability
The CTPR3000 is designed to work with all Eatons Full network capability up to 126 panels
intelligent addressable control panels as well as other Programmable as an active or passive repeater
network repeaters. Plug and play (all system information is uploaded
Eatons touch-screen repeater panel is easy to install and through the network)
commission. All text is transmitted via the network and Integral battery and power supply
is automatically updated. Aesthtically pleasing, compact panel
Simple to operate end user touch-screen interface
Requires no programming (plug and play) and is
easily set up without a laptop
Full system visibility and control
Specifiers guide
2.3 Repeater panels

D W
Code CTPR3000
Description Touch-screen repeater panel
Standards EN54 Pt4
Specification
Mains input voltage 230V ac +10% / -15%
Operating voltage 24V dc H
System indicators Power on, fire, fault, test, disable and scroll
System controls Silence alarms, evacuate and reset (full
system control if set as active)
Input ports RS232 (for connection of programmer)
Battery 2 x 12V 3.2Ah
Standby duration 24 hours H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Environmental Panel 375 357 95
Operating temperature -5C to +40C Cutout 345 325 50
Physical
Construction PC/ABS
Colour Graphite System functionality
Dimensions (H x W x D) 375mm x 357mm x 95mm Panel operates in either normal, supervisor or engineer mode.
Weight 8kg Supervisor and engineer modes are accessed via 4 digit pass
Ingress protection IP30 codes.
Compatibility Supervisor mode allows full system operation
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems Engineer mode enables password to be changed if required and
When connected to network, all text is transmitted via network,
Installation changes to other network panels update automatically.
Wall mounted by means of 4 fixing screws.
Cable entry at top or back.
11 top entry gland holes.
Separate rear access cable entry facilities.
Local mains supply required
Device overview
Panel is connect to the network as part of a networked system.
Supplied with integral power supply and standby battery
Touch-screen end user interface. Panel is connected to the
network as part of a networked system.
Supplied with integral power supply and standby battery
Touch-scren end user interface
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Intelligent addressable touch-screen repeater panel CTPR3000
Eaton product datasheet CAP320, CAPT340, CAH330
Specifiers guide fire products
Intelligent addressable 2.4 Accessories Intelligent addressable sensors
CAP320, CAPT340, CAH330 -

Intelligent addressable sensors
Our addressable range has multiple options for Features and benefits
intelligent addressable sensors. All sensors are designed
for optimum functionality in mid-large sized builds. They Soft addressed
are all soft addressed and have integral short circuit Integral short circuit isolator
isolators. Single address
This range of intelligent addressable sensors have been Wide range of sensor types
specifically designed to operate with Eaton intelligent 360 visibility LED using lightpipe technology
addressable fire systems. All sensors are third party
Drift compensation
approved to the relevant section of EN54 (part 7 for
smoke detectors & part 5 for heat detectors). Aesthetically pleasing
Quick and simple to install
Single multi-mode heat sensor
Wide viewing angle for increased LED visibility
Common mounting base
Positive lock indication
Discreet design for incorporation into any decor
Easy to maintain/service
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories
Optical smoke sensor (CAP320) Photo thermal sensor (CAPT340)

The optical sensor is suitable for most applications giving the fastest The photo-thermal sensor will respond quickly to fast clean burning
response to slow burning or smouldering fires which give rise to large fires yet maintain the advantage of optical sensors when detecting
visible smoke particles. smouldering fires. The thermal enhancement of this sensor allows
a higher alarm threshold which provides a greater rejection of false
alarms. The sensor will also raise an alarm at temperatures exceeding
Multi-mode heat sensor (CAH330)
60C.
The heat sensor can be set to one of 3 modes 77C / 92C and rate of The CAPT340 has day/night modes available, programmable from
rise. These sensors are designed to be used in environments where the site installer software. The day mode uses the heat aspect of the
the ambient conditions might cause false alarms if smoke detection sensor for areas which may have smoky environments during, for
were to be used, for example where there is a high level of dust, example working hours. The night mode uses a combination of A2S
fumes, steam or smoke under normal conditions. and smoke detection. If not programmed, the sensor defaults to dual
mode.
Code CAP320 CAPT340 CAH330
Description Optical smoke sensor Photo-thermal sensor Multi-mode heat sensor
Standards EN54 Pt7 2000 + A1:2002, EN54 Pt17 EN54 Pt7 2000 + A1:2002, EN54 Pt17 EN54 Pt7 2000 + A1:2002, EN54 Pt17
Operating volatage 18V dc to 30V dc 18V dc to 30V dc 18V dc to 30V dc
Standby current 220A (max) 220A (max) 220A (max)
Alarm current 5mA (max) 5mA (max) 5mA (max)
Addressing mode Auto address Auto address Auto address
Specification
Mounting position Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas
Mounting options Surface mount with CAB300 base Surface mount with CAB300 base Surface mount with CAB300 base
Area coverage 100m (subject to local standard) 100m (subject to local standard) 100m (subject to local standard)
System wiring Min. 1.5mm, 2 core loop or spur Min. 1.5mm, 2 core loop or spur Min. 1.5mm, 2 core loop or spur
Heat class
Rate of rise N/A A1S A1R
Fixed heat 77C N/A N/A BS
Fixed heat 90C N/A N/A CS
Alarm temperature (static)
AIR N/A 60C 60C
BS N/A N/A 77C
CS N/A N/A 90C
Indication 360 visibility light pipe 360 visibility light pipe 360 visibility light pipe
Environmental
Humidity (non 0 to 95% RH 0 to 95% RH 0 to 95% RH
condensing)
Physical
Construction PC/ABS PC/ABS PC/ABS
Colour - RAL no. White - 9003 White - 9003 White - 9003
Dimensions excel base 101mm x 33mm 101mm x 43mm 101mm x 43mm
(Dia x D)
Dimensions incl base 104mm x 45mm 104mm x 55m 104mm x 55mm
(Dia x D)
Weight (without base) 76g 76g 76g
IP rating IP30 IP30 IP30
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems
Dimensions Catalogue numbers

D (mm) D1 (mm) Description Code
Description Dia (mm) (excl base) (incl base) Optical smoke sensor CAP320
Optical 101 33 45 Photo/thermal sensor CAPT340
Photo-thermal 101 43 55 Multi-mode heat sensor CAH330
Multi-mode heat 101 43 55 Standard base CAB300
Conventional remote indicator CIR301
Duct probe (requires detector & base) MDP201
Loop connected remote indicator MRIAD
Specifiers guide 2.4 Accessories
MRIAD - Intelligent addressable loop

connected remote indicator
The intelligent addressable loop connected remote Features and benefits

indicator (MRIAD) is designed to provide discreet
remote indication, which is controlled by the intelligent Loop powered
addressable control panel, whilst providing the ability Soft addressed
to monitor multiple sensors within an area thereby Integral short circuit Isolator
minimising wiring requirements.
Single address
The MRIAD is compatible with Eatons range of High visibility LED
intelligent addressable fire systems.
Can be programmed to monitor multiple remote
The device is connected directly on to the loop, and is sensors
soft addressed by the panel on system start up and is Fits on to a standard single gang back box
fitted with integral short circuit isolators.
Aesthetically pleasing
When using site installer the intelligent addressable Quick and simple to install
loop connected remote indicator should be programmed
Wide viewing angle for increased visibility
as an address output (sounder) and can be programmed
using the comprehensive cause and effect tables to Discreet design for incorporation in to any decor
operate continuous, pulsing, by global, panel, zone, Can be activated by cause and effect programming
address or on double knock input etc. Reduced cost
The device is supplied complete with back box and is Minimises cabling
surface mounted. Easy to maintain/service
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories
D
Code MRIAD
Description Loop connected remote indicator
Specification
Quiescent current 220A H
Alarm current 6mA

Cable size 0.5 mm to 2.5 mm
Environmental 87 87 49
Operating temperature -10C to +55C W

Physical Standard connections
Construction ABS
Colour White screen connected using suitable terminal in backbox
Lens colour Red
Dimensions (H x W x D) 87mm x 87mm x 49mm
Weight 0.28kg
OUT
IN
Ingress protection IP30
Compatibility - + - +
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems Compatible
LOOP
LOOP
OUT
Intelligent Addressable
IN
Control Panel
Installation
1. Mounting plate fixes to single gang back box or can be direct fixed
WARNING:
to wall or ceiling. Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is
2. Cable entry is normally from rear but breakouts are provided in
connected to the system.
side of base plate
3. Cables connect to terminals on PCB within base plate.
Screen (Earth) must be continuous along entire length of loop.
4. Front cover is pushed onto base plate and locks in place.
System functionality
Terminal block unplugs
1. MRIAD is addressable and is programmed to activate when for ease of connection
selected detectors are triggered.
2. LED cancels when detector is reset.
3. Low current consumption.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Intelligent addressable remote indicator MRIAD
Conventional remote indicator CIR301
CAB300 - Intelligent addressable

standard sensor base
The intelligent addressable sensor standard base Features and benefits

(CAB300) has been designed for flexibility, simplicity and
speed of installation. Integral sensor shorting link
Separate loop in and loop out terminals
The CAB300 is compatible with Eatons range of
intelligent addressable sensors and fire systems. Stand off fixing feature
Accepts side entry cables
This intelligent addressable standard base incorporates
a purpose designed shorting link to ensure wiring Selectable sensor locking feature
continuity if a sensor is removed. Quick and simple to install
This device also has a retaining clip to provide positive Common mounting base for Eatons intelligent
feedback when the sensor is correctly fitted and a addressable sensors
retaining clip that can be replaced with locking device Positive lock indication
(supplied with base) to prevent unauthorised sensor Multiple cable entry points
removal.
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories
Code CAB300
Description Standard base
Physical
Construction PC/ABS D
Colour White
Dimensions (Dia x D) 104mm x 22mm
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable sensors
Dia
Installation
1. Separate terminals are provided for loop in and loop out Dia (mm) D (mm)
connections. 104 22
2. Each terminal can accept up to 2 x 2.5mm cables.
3. Base incorporates a substantial cable entry aperture in the rear of
the base.
Standard connections
4. Breakouts are provided to enable the sensor base to sit neatly
over surface cables and then enter via the rear entry aperture.
+
5. Base mounting incorporates a stand off feature to help prevent remote indicator (optional)
+V
distortion when mounted on an uneven surface.
S+ 4 4
E E
6. Fixings are suitable for standard BESA box or direct fixing to
Loop start
S-
3 3
Control Panel
suitable surface.
LED
LED
Compatible
F-
Loop finish
1 1
F+
2 2
User interface - VE OUT
1. Heavy duty terminals are provided for each connection, each - VE IN
terminal can accept 2 x 2.5mm cables earth screen of cable must be continuous
2. Seperate loop in and loop out terminals are provided for each WARNING:
connection. If using the outer connection on terminal 2, ensure the operation of the switch is not impeded
and that there are no shorts between terminal 2 and the switch contact.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Standard base CAB300
Optical smoke sensor CAP320
Photo/thermal sensor CAPT340
Multi-mode heat sensor CAH330
CAS380 - Intelligent addressable

sounder base
The intelligent addressable sounder base (CAS380) can Features and benefits
be used both with a sensor or as a stand alone device.
Integral short circuit isolator
The CAS380 is compatible with Eatons range of
Integral sensor mounting base
intelligent addressable sensors and fire systems.
Can be used with a sensor as a sounder base or
This device incorporates a sensor mounting base, a stand alone as a sounder
sensor can be fitted to the sounder base or alternatively
Cover plate (optional)
an optional cover plate (CASC) can be used to enable the
sounder to operate as a dedicated discreet stand alone Quick and simple to install
sounder. First fix base
Selectable tones controlled by the panel
Adjustable volume controlled by the panel
Single point connection for sensor and sounder
(saving on both time and installation costs)
Can be used with a sensor or stand alone
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories
Code CAS380
Description Sounder base
Standards EN54 Pt3
Specification
Operating voltage 17V dc to 32V dc D
Standby current < 320A
Tones (set by panel) Continuous: 910Hz
Pulsed: 910Hz / 0Hz pulse 1Hz
Two tone: 610 / 910Hz at 1Hz cycle
Slow whoop
Sound output at +/-3dB Low volume : 84dB at < 4mA
at 1 meter (set by panel) Medium volume : 92dB at < 8mA
Dia
High volume : 95dB at < 12mA
Environmental
Dia (mm) D (mm)
Operating temperature -10 to +55C
102 40
Physical
Construction PC/ABS
Colour White Standard connections
Weight 0.2kg
3 3
Loop start
- -
+ - + + - +
S+ E 2 E 2
Compatibility
Control Panel
Compatible
S-
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems 4 4
Loop finish
F-
LED 1 LED 1
F+
Installation
1. Installation is simple using first fix base. WARNING:
Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is connected to the system.
2. First fix base is fixed to mounting surface via 2 fixings holes. Earth screen must be continuous along entire length of loop.
3. Cables enter through aperture in base (rear entry only) NOTE:

Base terminal 1, 2, 3 and 4 not used. All wiring terminates as shown above.
4. Main body is then clipped into place on base, main body locks into
place when pressed into position.
5. Cables pass through aperture in sounder body and terminate at
the front.
6. Connections are to connector block on front of main sounder
body.
7. Sensor or cover plate is then fixed to sounder.
8. Sensor or cover plate can be locked in place if required.
1. Volume and tone are set by control panel, no need to
access sounder to alter setting.
2. Soft addressed.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Sounder base CAS380
Cover plates (pack of 5) CASC
CASBB394 - Intelligent addressable

VAD sounder beacon base
The intelligent addressable VAD sounder beacon base Features and benefits
(CASBB394) can be used both with a sensor or as a
stand alone device. Integral short circuit isolator
Integral sensor mounting base
The CASBB394 is compatible with the Eaton range of
intelligent addressable sensors and fire systems. Can be used with a sensor as a sounder beacon
base or stand alone as a sounder beacon
This device includes all the features of the intelligent
addressable sounder base (CAS380) whilst also
incorporating a powerful LED beacon. Quick and simple to install
First fix base
The intelligent addressable beacon base incorporates a
sensor mounting base, a sensor can be fitted directly to Selectable tones controlled by the panel
the base, or alternatively an optional cover plate (CASC) Adjustable volume controlled by the panel
can be used to provide a dedicated discreet stand alone Single point connection for sensor, sounder and LED
device. beacon (saving on both time and installation costs)
Can be used with a sensor or stand alone
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories

Dia
Code CASBB394
Supply Voltage 19 30vdc
Cable Size / type 0.5 - 2.5mm/ FIRETUF, FP200 or MICC
Standby current < 450 uA D
Operating temperature -10 to +55 degrees C (95%RH)
Material ABS/PC FR Plastic
Environment Category Type A / IP21C
Sound output @ +/-3d8 (set Low volume : 83dB @ <8.6mA
by panel) Medium volume : 90dB @ <10mA
High volume : 93dB @ <11mA Dia (mm) D (mm)
Compliance EN54-3 Fire Alarm Device Sounder 115 44
EN54-17:2005
EN54-23:2010
Tones (set by panel) Continuous 910Hz Standard connections
Pulsed 910 / 0Hz pulse 1Hz
Two Tone 610 / 910Hz @ 1Hz cycle
Slow whoop 500-1200Hz in 3.5 seconds / 3 3
0.5secs gap Intelligent Addressable
Loop start
- -
Compatible Cooper
+ - + + - +
Control Panel S+ E 2 E 2
Beacon 0.5Hz Flash S-
4 4
Total Loop Resistance for 50 (max)
Loop finish
LED 1 LED 1
correct operation of short F-
F+
circuit isolator
Parallel Fault Resistance to be 200 (typ)
seen at the Control Panel for
isolators to open WARNING:
Continuous Current allowable 700mA (max) Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is connected to the system.
Earth screen must be continuous along entire length of loop.
through isolator
Isolator Resistance in closed 0.26 (max) NOTE:
Base terminal 1, 2, 3 and 4 not used. All wiring terminates as shown above.
state
Leakage Current into direct 14mA (max)
short circuit with isolator open
Voltage at which isolator 3.8V to 11V
changes from open to closed
or closed to open state
Maximum switching current 1.5A
of isolator
Installation
1. Installation is simple using first fix base.
2. First fix base is fixed to mounting surface via 2 fixings holes.
3. Cables enter through aperture in base (rear entry only)
the front.
6. Connections are to connector block on front of main sounder
body.
1. Volume and tone are set by control panel, no need to
access sounder to alter setting.
2. Soft addressed.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Sounder beacon base CASBB394
Cover plates (pack of 5) CASC
CBG370S, CBG370WP - Intelligent

addressable callpoints
Two versions of intelligent addressable callpoints are Features and benefits

available in this range, the CBG370S which can be either
surface or flush mounted and the CBG370WP which is a Soft addressed
weatherproof version. Integral short circuit isolator
Both the CBG370S and the CBG370WP are compatible Single address
with the Eaton range of intelligent addressable fire Fast fit clip on front cover
systems. High visibility status LED
These intelligent addressable callpoints are attractively Wide range of accessories
designed, simple to install and are supplied as standard Heavy duty terminals
with a frangible glass element and a test key for ease of
Two models available:
maintenance.
- Internal
A comprehensive range of accessories are available to - Weatherproof
maximise the functionality of the callpoint for particular Quick and simple to install
applications. Single tool for test and access
Robust construction
IP65 version available
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories
Code CBG370S CBG370WP
Description Surface / flush mounting callpoint Weatherproof callpoint
Standards EN54 Pt11 EN54 Pt11
Specification
Operating voltage 17V dc to 32V dc 17V dc to 32V dc
Quiescent current < 250A < 250A
Environmental
Physical
Construction PC/ABS PC/ABS
Colour Red Red
Dimensions (H x W x D) 87mm x 87mm x 57mm (36mm flush) 87mm x 87mm x 59mm
Weight 0.2kg 0.2kg
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems
Installation Dimensions
1. Surface callpoint has standard rear BESA fixing facilities. In W
addition, back box can accept top or bottom surface entry cables.
Surface callpoint can also be flush mounted.
2. Callpoint has test facility via special test key to prevent
unauthorised operation.
3. Insertion of test key for test purposes and for cover removal is H
at bottom of callpoint to facilitate ease of access when mounted
next to door architrave.
4. Test key is dual function, used to test callpoint operation by
simulating activation and also to allow removal of clip on cover to
gain access to element. D
5. Element is held in place by clip on self locking cover which can

only be removed by use of a special tool (callpoint test key). Description H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Flush Mounted 87 87 36
6. Separate loop in and loop out terminals are provided for all
connections including screen continuity on intelligent addressable Surface Mounted 87 87 57
callpoints. Weatherproof 87 87 59
7. Surface/flush callpoints are IP42, weatherproof is IP65.
User interface
1. To enable quick and simple installation, callpoints use a fast fit self
locking clip on front cover which is very simple to fit, but once in
place, can only be removed by use of a special key (supplied).
2. Callpoint is triggered by pressing against the element.
Screen
Screen
OUT
IN
E - + E - + Catalogue numbers
Compatible
LOOP
LOOP
Description Code
OUT
IN
Control Panel Surface/flush callpoint CBG370S

Waterproof callpoint CBG370WP
WARNING: Protective hinged cover (pack of 10) CXPC
Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is Spacer plates (pack of 10) MBGSP
connected to the system. Recessing bezels (pack of 10) MBGBEZ
Resettable element kit (pack of 10) MBGREKIT
Screen (Earth) must be continuous along entire length of loop. Spare break glasses (pack of 5) UBSG
Callpoint keys (pack of 10) MFBGKEY3
CAS381, CAS381WP - Intelligent

addressable wall sounders
Two versions of the intelligent addressable wall sounder Features and benefits
are available in this range, the internal CAS381 and the
weatherproof CAS381WP. Loop powered
Soft addressed
Both the CAS381 and the CAS381WP are compatible
with Eatons range of intelligent addressable fire Integral short circuit Isolator
systems. High efficiency design
The high efficiency design of these intelligent Simple clip fixing assembly
addressable wall sounders offer excellent sound output Two models available
levels despite the low current consumption. - Internal
- Weatherproof
CAS381
This device is designed for wall mounting, has a
Low current consumption
choice of different tones and volume levels, a built in
short circuit isolator and is soft addressed for ease of Selectable tone controlled by the panel
installation. Adjustable volume controlled by the panel
CAS381WP First fix back box
IP65 version available
This device is IP66 rated and therefore suitable for
external and wash down areas, it is designed for Easy to maintain/service
wall mounting, has a choice of different tones and
volume levels, a built in short circuit isolator and is soft
addressed for ease of installation.
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories
Code CAS381 CAS381WP

Description Internal wall sounder Weatherproof wall sounder
Specification
Standby current < 320A < 320A
Tones (set by panel) Continuous: 984Hz Continuous: 984Hz
Pulsed: 984Hz / 0Hz pulse 1Hz Pulsed: 984Hz / 0Hz pulse 1Hz
Two tone: 644 / 984Hz at 1Hz cycle Two tone: 644 / 984Hz at 1Hz cycle
Slow whoop: 500-1200Hz in 3.5 seconds/0.5secs gap Slow whoop: 500-1200Hz in 3.5 seconds/0.5secs gap
Sound output at +/-3db Low volume : 87dB at < 2mA Low volume : 87dB at < 2mA
(Set by panel) Medium volume : 93dB at < 3mA Medium volume : 93dB at < 3mA
High volume: 100dB at < 6mA High volume: 100dB at < 6mA
Environmental
Physical
Colour Red Red
Weight 0.25kg 0.57kg
Cable entry Rear/side Rear/side
Compatibility
w
CAS381
1. Installation is simple using first fix base. D
2. First fix base is fixed to mounting surface using 2 fixing holes.

3. Cable entry can be rear or side.
H
4. Connections are to connector block on main sounder body.
5. Main body is then clipped into position on mounting base, body
locks into position when pressed home.
CAS381WP
Description H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
1. Installation is simple using first fix base.
Internal 105 105 95
2. First fix base is fixed to mounting surface using 2 fixing holes.
Weatherproof 108 108 103
3. Cable entry can be rear or side.
5. Main body is then fastened onto base, using 4 allen head screws Standard connections
(supplied).
Screen
Screen
OUT
IN
E - + E - +
CAS381/CAS381WP Compatible
LOOP
LOOP
OUT
IN
1. Volume is set by fire control panel, no need to access sounder to Control Panel
alter setting.
2. Tone is set by fire control panel, no need to access sounder to
alter setting. WARNING:
Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is
Screen (Earth) must be continuous along entire length of loop.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Internal wall sounder CAS381
Weatherproof wall sounder CAS381WP
CASB393, CASB393WP - Intelligent

addressable open class visual alarm
device (VAD)
The intelligent addressable open class visual alarm Features and benefits
device (CASB393) offers low current consumption,
multiple sound output levels and LED visual notification. Integral short circuit isolator
Loop powered
The open class VAD comes in two variants, the standard
CASB393 and the weatherproof CASB393WP, which is Soft addressed
IP66 rated meaning it is ideal for outdoor locations. Quick and simple to install
Both variants of the open class VAD are suitable for Selectable tones controlled by the panel
markets where EN54-23 VADs are a requirement. Adjustable volume controlled by the panel
IP66 version available as both an internal and
weatherproof variant available
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories
Code CASB393, CASB393WP

Supply Voltage 19 30vdc
Cable Size / type 0.5 - 2.5mm/ FIRETUF, FP200 or MICC
Standby current < 450 uA
Operating temperature -10 to +55 degrees C (95%RH)
Sound output @ +/-3d8 (set by Low volume : 87dB @ <8.6mA
panel) Medium volume : 93dB @ <10mA
High volume : 100dB @ <11mA
Environment Category Type A
CASB393
Environment Category Type B
CASB393WP
Compliance EN54-3 Fire Alarm Device Sounder
EN54-17:2005
EN54-23:2010 Fire Alarm Device - VAD
Tones (set by panel) Continuous 984Hz
Pulsed 984 / 0Hz pulse 1Hz*
Two Tone 644 / 984Hz @ 1Hz cycle
Slow whoop 500-1200Hz in 3.5 seconds /
0.5secs gap
Beacon 0.5Hz Flash
Total Loop Resistance for 50 (max)
correct operation of short
circuit isolator CASB393 (Top) 108 108 96
Parallel Fault Resistance to be 200 (typ) CASB393WP (Bottom) 110 110 105
seen at the Control Panel for
isolators to open
Continuous Current allowable 700mA (max)
through isolator Standard connections
Isolator Resistance in closed 0.26 (max)
state
Leakage Current into direct 14mA (max)
short circuit with isolator open
Voltage at which isolator 3.8V to 11V
changes from open to closed
or closed to open state
Maximum switching current of 1.5A
isolator
Installation Warning
Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is connected to the
1. Installation is simple using first fix base. system.
2. First fix base is fixed to mounting surface via 2 fixings holes. Earth screen must be continous along entire length of the loop.
3. Cables entry can be rear or side
the front.
1. Volume and tone are set by control panel, no need to access
sounder to alter setting.
2. Soft addressed.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Open class VAD CASB393
Weatherproof open class VAD CASB393WP
MAB50R, MAB100R - Intelligent

addressable reflective beam
detectors
Two versions of the intelligent addressable loop powered Features and benefits
reflective beam detectors are available in this range,
the MAB50R with a range of up to 50 metres and the Loop powered
MAB100R with a range of 50 to 100 meters. Soft addressed
Both the MAB50R and the MAB100R are compatible Integral short circuit Isolator
with Eatons range of intelligent addressable fire Single address
systems. Reflective beam detection
These intelligent addressable loop powered reflective Two models available
beam detectors are extremely simple to install, they - up to 50m
require no separate power supply, operate on a reflective - 50m to 100m
principle and have a simple set up mode to enable easy Quick and simple to setup
and quick alignment during installation.
Saves on both time and installation costs
These units are designed to replace individual point No power supply required
detectors in large open areas such as warehouses.
Single device to install instead of numerous point
Fire and fault conditions are signalled to the control detectors
panel using standard loop wiring so no additional Single point of maintenance
interconnection required.
Wall mounted for ease of maintenance, especially in
warehouses with racking
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories
Code MAB50R MAB100R
Description Reflective beam detector Reflective beam detector
Standards EN54 Pt12 2002 & Pt17 2005 EN54 Pt12 2002 & Pt17 2005
Specification
Quiescent current < 5mA (no LEDs illuminated) < 5mA (no LEDs illuminated)
Alarm current < 9mA < 9mA
Alignment current < 18mA < 18mA
Power up time 10 seconds (approx) 10 seconds (approx)
Operating range 5 to 50 metres 50 to 100 metres
Operating width 15 meters 15 meters
Tolerance to beam misalignment at 35% Detector 0.8, Prism 5.0 Detector 0.8, Prism 5.0
Fire alarm thresholds 2.50dB (25%) 3.74dB (35%) 6.02dB (50%) 2.50dB (25%) 3.74dB (35%) 6.02dB (50%)
Optical wavelength 880nm 880nm
Environmental
Physical
Colour White & black White & black
Dimensions (H x W x D) 210mm 130mm x 120mm 210mm 130mm x 120mm
Weight 0.8kg 0.8kg
Compatibility
1. Must be fixed to solid structure.
2. Recommended mounting height is 0.3 to 0.6 metres below the
ceiling.
3. Cables can be terminated into separate termination box (not
supplied) or use purpose designed mounting bracket (MRBFP) H D
ordered separately.
4. Mounting bracket has facilities for glanding of incoming cables
plus simple fixing of beam detector. H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
5. Test filter is supplied with detector to simulate required smoke 210 130 120
obscuration level and confirm correct operation. W
User interface Standard connections

to beam detector socket
Beam detectors status LEDs
Red LED constantly illuminated indicates fire condition.
OUT
IN
Flashing amber LED indicates fault condition

+ - + -
Compatible
LOOP
LOOP
OUT
IN
Control Panel
Beam detectors have 3 modes:
1. Prism targeting mode - designed to provide simple initial screen connected using suitable terminal in backbox
alignment of beam and reflector assembly WARNING:

2. Alignment mode - enables accurate fine tuning of beam alignment Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is
without the need for additional calibration equipment or a second connected to the system.
operator Screen (Earth) must be continuous along entire length of loop.
3. Normal running mode
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Reflective beam detector (50m range) MAB50R
Reflective beam detector (100m range) MAB100R
Mounting bracket MRBFP
MDP201 - Intelligent addressable

duct mounting probe
The duct mounting probe unit is designed for use with Features
Eatons range of addressable and conventional optical
MDP201
smoke sensors / detectors.
Duct width range 300mm to 1500mm
5 to 50 metres
The presence of smoke in a ventilation duct is detected
Duct air speed range 1m/s to 20m/s
by sampling the airflow through the duct via two Detector 0.8
sampling tubes. A detector and base are mounted within Prism 5.0
the sampling chamber, which is located on the external Temperature range -20C or +60C
skin of the duct, with sample and exhaust probes
passing into the duct in an area of low turbulence. The
unit requires an analogue optical sensor or conventional
optical detector and corresponding base and is supplied Duct probe unit shown with
with full fixing instructions. optical detector - detector
and base must be ordered
separately.
Specifiers guide
2.4 Accessories
Selecting location
To avoid excessive turbulence, the duct probe should be placed in a
straight section of duct at a distance from any bends of least three
duct widths. If the duct has several extraction points that combine into
one duct the duct probe sensitivity will be reduced, it is recommended
therefore, that each duct is fitted with its own duct probe.
Testing
A small hole fitted with a plug is on the exhaust side of the duct probe
so that smoke can be used to check the detector is operational without
removing the lid. ENSURE THE PLUG IS REFITTED AFTER TESTING.
Servicing
The duct probe should be checked regularly to ensure there is no
build-up of dirt. If dirt etc has accumulated in the sampling unit then
the detector should be removed from the duct probe and the tubes,
elbows etc, cleaned.
Installation diagrams
264.00mm 188.00mm
80mm
CABLE ENTRY
90 ELBOWS 20mm (3/4)
132.00mm
28mm
AIR FLOW
DIRECTION BLUE DOT

233mm DIRECTION INDICATOR
WHITE TUBE BLACK TUBE

(EXHAUST) (INLET)
20mm
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Duct mounting probe MDP201
Addressable optical smoke sensor CAP320
Addressable standard base CAB300
Conventional multimode detector FXN922
Conventional optical smoke sensor CPD321
Conventional standard base CDBB300
Specifiers guide 2.5 Standard interfaces
CZMU352 - Intelligent addressable

zone monitor unit
An extensive range of interfaces are available to support Features and benefits

the Eaton range of control panels, providing solutions for
most design requirements. Soft addressed
The zone monitor unit (CZMU352) connects a zone of
suitable Eaton conventional detectors and a separate Single address
zone of Eaton conventional callpoints (if required). Accepts a zone of Eaton conventional detectors
Input monitored for open, short circuit and earth
contact faults
Easy to expand a system using existing wiring
Specifiers guide
2.5 Standard interfaces

1. Zone monitor unit is fixed to a deep double gang back box
Code CZMU352 (supplied).
Description Zone monitor unit 2. All connections are via heavy duty terminals.
Standards EN54 Pt17 & Pt18 2005
3. Cable entry can be top, bottom, side or rear.
Specification
4. Can be surface or semi recessed mounted.
Operating voltage 18V dc to 30 V dc
Quiescent current 2.8mA
Alarm current 8mA Standard connections
Current with 20 detectors 3.4mA
Detector load 20 detectors per zone (max) EOLM-1
Callpoint load Unlimited
6K
Environmental
Operating temperature -10C to +60C - OUT +
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 95% RH - IN +
Physical intelligent addressable loop
- OUT+
Construction PC/ABS - IN +
Weight 0.23kg
Ingress protection IP40 E - + E - + E - + E - +
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable fire OUT IN CALLPOINT DETECTOR
systems LOOP ZONE ZONE
Callpoints can be connected with detectors on detector zone if preferred
NOTES:
1. Earth (Screen) cable must be connected to its adjacent earth terminal.
2. The end of line resistor must always be fitted, even if input is not used.
NOTES:
3. Maximum spur length - see BS5839 Pt:1 2002 for zone coverage.
1. 4. There
Earth
is no (Screen) cable
maximum number must be callpoints
of conventional connected allowedtoperitszone
adjacent
output. earth
5. Unit can only be used with its respective Cooper fire systems and compatible sensor and base.
terminal.
2. The end of line resistor must always be fitted, even if input is not
used.
4. There is no maximum number of conventional callpoints allowed
per zone output.
5. Unit can only be used with its respective Eaton fire systems
compatible sensors and bases.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Zone monitor unit CZMU352
CSI350 - Intelligent addressable spur

isolator unit

the Eaton range of control panels, providing solutions for
most design requirements. Integral short circuit isolator
Allows a spur of intelligent addressable devices to
The spur isolator unit (CSI350) enables a spur of
be connected to the main loop
intelligent addressable devices to be connected to a
main analogue loop, the device is designed to simplify Automatically controls addressing sequence
installation of remote parts of buildings or for simple Quick and simple to install
system extensions. No hard addressing required (Plug and play)
Reduced installation cost
Takes no address
Specifiers guide
Code CSI350
Description Spur isolator unit
Standards EN54 Pt17 2005 H
Specification
Quiescent current 170A
Environmental
Operating temperature -10C to +60C
W
Physical D
Construction PC/ABS
88 147 60
Weight 0.23kg
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable fire systems Standard connections
Installation
E
1. Please refer to local installation standards for details of the
maximum allowable area to be covered by a single zone. OUT
2. Spur isolator unit is fixed to a deep double gang back box +

intelligent
(supplied). addressable loop no end of line
E resistor required
3. All connections are via heavy duty terminals. E
IN
4. Cable entry can be top, bottom, side or rear. SPUR
+
5. Can be surface or semi recessed mounted. +
NOTES:
NOTES:
1. EarthEarth
1. (Screen) cable cable
(Screen) must be connected
must to its adjacent
be connected earth terminal.
to its adjacent earth terminal.
2. For maximum spur length/load see BS5839 Pt1:2002.
3. Unit can only be used with its respective Cooper fire systems and compatible sensor and base.
3. Unit can only be used with its respective Eaton fire systems compatible sensors and
bases.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Spur isolator unit CSI350
CSUM355 - Intelligent addressable

shop monitor unit

Eatons range of control panels, providing solutions for
The shop monitor unit (CSUM355) is designed to enable
small units with conventional fire detection to be fully Single address
integrated with a main intelligent addressable fire Provides 2 conventional sounder circuits
system. Accepts a zone of Eatons conventional detectors
This unit is ideal for applications such as connecting and a zone of conventional callpoints
individual shop units into a main shopping centre Inputs monitored for open, short circuits and earth
system. contact faults
An external power supply is required to drive the 2 Quick and simple to install
conventional sounder circuits. This power supply must be No hard addressing required (plug and play)
regulated for fire equipment and current limited. Easy to expand a system using existing wiring
Reduced installation cost by using the 2 sounder
circuits
Specifiers guide
Code CSUM355 D
Description Shop monitor unit
Specification
Operating voltage 15V dc to 30V dc
H
Quiescent current 3.4mA (max)
Quiescent load current 2.8mA (max)
Alarm current 8mA (max)
Zone circuits
Number of input circuits 2 W
Zone circuit 1 Callpoints only
Zone circuit 2 Detectors and callpoints H W D
Number of callpoints Unlimited (mm) (mm) (mm)
Callpoint resistance 470 to 680 129 180 60
Zone circuit 1 eol 6K8
Zone circuit 2 eol Active EOL
Number of detectors 20 (max)
Short circuit fault threshold 150
24V dc output
Open circuit fault threshold N/A active EOL EOLM-1 power supply unit
FAULT CONTACT 24V
Sounder circuits 6K8 12K 12K
N/O O/P
Number of sounder circuits 2 - Out +

- In +
Load per output 300mA (max) 12K
- +
intelligent addressable loop
Sounder circuit 1 and 2 eol 12K - Out +
- In +
Environmental
Operating temperature -10C to +60C E - + E - + E - + E - + N/O C N/C + - + - E - +

OUT IN + - E + - 24V
CALLPOINT DETECTOR EXTERNAL
LOOP
Physical ZONE ZONE 1 2 PSU EXTERNAL
SOUNDER MONITOR PSU
Construction PC/ABS INPUT
FIRE RELAY
callpoints can be connected with detectors on detector zone if preferred
Weight 1kg
Compatibility
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Shop monitor unit CSUM355
CIO351 - Intelligent addressable

3 channel I/O unit

The 3 channel I/O unit (CIO351) enables simple Integral short circuit isolator
interfacing between the fire system and other 3 separate inputs and 3 separate outputs
equipment such as nurse call systems or access control Inputs monitored for open and short circuits
systems. The inputs are fully monitored for open and Quick and simple to install
short circuits.
No hard addressing required (plug and play)
Three models of the 3 channel I/O unit are available: Unit takes 3 inputs, and 3 outputs
CIO351 - resets on reset - Only 1 address required to monitor and control,
saving on equipment and installation (CIO351 and
CIO351S - resets on silence alarms CIO351S only)
CIO351T - resets on reset (recognised as 3 addresses) Can independently program each ouput contact
using Site Installer
Specifiers guide

D
Code CIO351, CIO351S, CIO351T
Description 3 channel I/O unit
Specification H
Operating voltage 18V dc to 30V dc H W D

Quiescent current 310A (mm) (mm) (mm)
Maximum switching voltage 50V ac or 30V dc 129 180 60
W
Output relay contact rating 1A at 30V resistive, 0.5A inductive
Firing resistor 5K6
End of line resistor 22k Standard connections
Environmental
Operating temperature -10C to +60C 5K6 5K6 5K6

Physical
22K 22K 22K
Construction PC/ABS
intelligent
Dimensions (h x w x d) 129mm x 180mm x 60mm addressable loop
Weight 0.23kg
OUTPUTS
Compatibility E - + E - + - + - + - + N/O C N/C N/O C N/C N/O C N/C

IN OUT INPUTS
LOOP
Installation
1. 3 channel input output unit is supplied within an enclosure
NOTES:
2. All connections are via heavy duty terminals. 1. Earth (Screen) cable must be connected to its adjacent earth terminal.
3. Cable entry can be top, bottom, side or rear. 3. Input circuit is monitored for wiring open and short circuit.
4. Output relay is a set of changeover volt free-contacts and is not monitored.
4. Can be surface or semi recessed mounted.
5. Relay contacts are rated at 30V dc 1A.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
3 channel I/O unit (resets on reset) CIO351
3 channel I/O unit (resets on silence alarms) CIO351S
3 channel I/O unit (resets on reset - CIO351T
recognised as 3 addresses)
CMIO353 - Intelligent addressable

230V ac relay unit

the eaton range of control panels, providing solutions for
The 230v ac relay unit (CMIO353) enables simple
interfacing between the fire system and other equipment Single address
such as nurse call systems or access control systems. Mains rated relay unit
The ability of the output unit to switch mains also makes Input monitored for open and short circuits
the unit ideal for plant control or mains powered door Quick and simple to install
holders. The input is monitored for open and short No hard addressing required (plug and play)
circuits therefore can be used for fire input applications
Achieves simplified interpanel interfacing
such as monitoring sprinkler flow switches.
Specifiers guide

D
Code CMIO353
Description 230V ac relay unit
Specification H
Operating voltage 18.5V dc to 30V dc H W D

Quiescent current 310A (mm) (mm) (mm)
Maximum switching voltage 230V ac to 250V ac (nominal) 129 180 60
W
Maximum switching current 8A
Firing resistor 5K6
End of line resistor 22k
Environmental
5K6
Physical
Construction PC/ABS
Weight 0.5kg
intelligent addressable loop 22K
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable fire
systems
Recommended loop/cable type Fire Tuff, FP200, MICC volt-free output 230V rated
E - + E - + - + E C N/C N/O
Installation
1. Mains rated input relay is designed for surface fixing.
2. All connections are via heavy duty terminals. IN OUT
SPUR INPUT
3. Cable entry can be top, bottom or side.
NOTES:
4. Output relay contacts are rated at 230V ac. 1. Earth (Screen) cable must be connected to its adjacent earth terminal.
NOTES:
1. Earth
3. Input circuit (Screen)
is monitored cable must
for wiring beshort
open and connected
circuit. to its adjacent earth
terminal.
2. The end of line resistor must always be fitted, even if input is not
used.
3. Input circuit is monitored for wiring open and short circuit.
4. Output relay is a set of changeover volt free-contacts and is not
monitored.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
230V ac relay unit CMIO353
CGI420, CGI420R - Intelligent

addressable 4 to 20mA interface
The CGI420 and CGI420R are 4 to 20mA intelligent Features and benefits
addressable modules designed to interface with gas
detection modules and are compatible with Eaton Soft addressed
intelligent addressable control panels. Integral short circuit isolator
These interfaces have a unique address on the loop and Single address
built in isolator for loop short circuit protection. Ideal interface for gas detection modules
Each of the DIL switches JP1, JP2 and JP3 can be 3 volt free outputs for each of the 3 alarm levels
programmable to set the threshold level for pre-alarm 1, (optional)
pre-alarm 2 and alarm respectively. 3 programmable volt free outputs rated at 24 Vdc at
9A
This can be expressed as a percentage of L.E.L. (lower
explosion limit) or P.P.M. (parts per million). Requires external power supply
The supply to the gas detector is taken directly from
the interface
Programmable levels of sensitivity
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
4 to 20mA interface CGI420
4 to 20mA interface (relay output) CGI420R
FC6, FC18 - Intelligent addressable

fan controller unit
The fan controller units, FC18 and FC6, are designed Features and benefits
to work with the Eaton range of intelligent addressable
control panels, providing the capability to control and Soft addressed
display the status of AHU fans. Integral short circuit isolator
The FC18 and FC6 are connected to an Eaton intelligent Single address
addressable control panel by means of the comms loop, Designed to operate in conjunction with Eatons
utilizing only one address (three addresses on the FC18) technical I/O unit (CFC301)
whilst providing the ability to monitor and control up to Comprehensive LED display
18/6 AHU fans.
Surface or rack mounting
Each FC18 and FC6 unit incorporates its own CPU Key operated auto/manual operation
specifically configured to control the relevant input and
Comprehensive cause and effect software
output logic making programming quick and easy via the
Eaton site installer software. Controls:
- FC6 up to 6 fans
Using Eaton site installer software, each individual - FC18 up to 18 fans
fan control channel is programmed to an output and
Automatic or manual operation
feedback input field device to control and monitor the
status of an AHU fan. Quick and simple to install
No hard addressing required (Plug and play)
Cost effective installation solution
Specifiers guide
Code FC18 FC6/FC6-AU

Description Fan controller unit, rack mount Fan controller unit, surface mount
Specification
External 24V supply 18V dc to 24V dc 18V dc to 24V dc
External current 150mA 150mA
Quiescent current 310A (nom) x 3 310A (nom)
Environmental
Physical
Compatibility
Typical system architecture Mounting details

The FC18 is designed to be rack mounted.
The FC6 is designed to be surface mounted.
The FC6-AU is supplied un-mounted.
FC6 - Fixing Centres
Dimensions
H
H
W
D
W D
H W D
Description (mm) (mm) (mm)
FC6 (Right) 125 155 42
Catalogue numbers
FC18 (Left) 133 482 30
Description Code
Fan controller unit (surface mount) FC6
Fan controller unit (rack mount) FC18
Fan controller unit (australia standard - supplied w/o FC6-AU
back box)
CFC301 - Intelligent addressable

technical I/O unit
This device has been designed to meet the requirements Features and benefits
of todays building management systems, switching
controls and dampers offering manual control, cause & Soft addressed
effect programming and monitoring capabilities when Integral short circuit isolator
integrated with the Cooper range of control modules. Requires two addresses
The technical I/O unit (CFC301) was designed to be Designed to operate in conjunction with Eatons fan
installed in any convenient position on the loop local to controller unit (FC6/18)
the various elements of building services and provides a Simplified BMS interface for system control
cost effective installation solution.
Meets the requirements of todays building
The device is associated to the relevant Eaton control management systems
& display device by utilising Eatons site installer 3 mode settings available
software and coupled with the Eatons devices makes
programming effortless and reliable. Data linking the two
devices is sent via the addressable loop. No hard addressing required (Plug and play)
Control and feedback in one unit
Further flexibility is offered to the installer & end user
with the ability to change the CFC301s relay output Cost effective installation solution
configuration with 3 mode settings available; this is
easily selected by terminating a 22K resistor across input
2 or 3.
Specifiers guide

D
Code CFC301
Description Technical I/O unit
Standards BS5839: Pt1 (installation) & AS1668
Specification H
Addressing mode Auto addressed
W
Output relay contact rating 1A at 30V resistive, 0.5A inductive
Maximum switching voltage 50V ac or 30V dc H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Cable size (min-max) 0.5 to 2.5mm 129 180 60
Recommended cable types (UK) Draka - FIRETUF, Pirelli - FP200
Number of input circuits 3 Mode settings
Number of output circuits 3
End of line resistance 22K Mode 1
(Input cct) 22k across all Relay 1 ON when a fire occurs (fan control in
Short circuit fault threshold 1K inputs automatic mode)
Resistance
Open circuit fault threshold 33K Relay 2 ON when the fan control start button is
Resistance pressed (fan control in manual mode)
Output relays 3 sets change over contacts Relay 3 ON relay 2 de-activated when the fan
Maximum relay contact 1A at 30V resistive, 0.5A inductive control stop button is pressed (fan
control in manual mode)
Switching voltage 50V ac / 30V dc
Switching power 30W Mode 2
22k across Relay 1 ON when system is in alarm or when
Environmental
input 1 & 2 the fan control start button is pressed
Operating temperature -10C to +60C OFF when system is healthy or when
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 95% RH the fan control stop button is pressed
Physical
Construction ABS Short Circuit Relay 2 & 3 N/A
Dimensions (H x W x D) 129mm x 180mm x 60mm Across Input 3
Weight 0.6kg Mode 3
Ingress protection IP65 22k across all Relay 1, 2 Same as Mode 1
Compatibility inputs &3
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable Input 2 alarm Relay 1 & 2 Turns off if the system is in alarm
Fire systems Relay 3 ON
Input 2 cleared Relay 1 ON after 60s provided system is still in
alarm
Standard connections Relay 2 & 3 OFF
5K6 5K6 5K6
22K 22K 22K

intelligent
addressable loop
OUTPUTS
E - + E - + - + - + - + N/O C N/C N/O C N/C N/O C N/C
IN OUT INPUTS
LOOP
NOTES:
3. Input circuit is monitored for wiring open and short circuit.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Technical I/O unit CFC301
CIOP4, CIOP8 - Intelligent

addressable mimic relay boards
These addressable mimic relay boards, CIOP4 and Features and benefits
CIOP8, are 4 and 8 way soft addressing output modules,
incorporating integral short circuit isolators. Loop powered
Units can be soft or hard addressed
Both the CIOP4 and the CIOP8 mimic relay boards
are fully compatible with the current range of Eaton Integral short circuit isolator
intelligent addressable control panels. The units are Single address
suitable for switching low voltage (24V dc at 1A 4 input, 4 output version
maximum), via a set of non latching relay contacts. 4 input, 8 output version
The flexibility of these modules is further enhanced PCB version incorporates 4 inputs:
by the fact that each output can be programmed for a - Reset
range of triggers such as disablement, fault, fire, test - Silence
panel, test zone pre-alarm, fire routing equipment, fire - Evacuate
protecting equipment and reset with up to 16 different - Test
trigger sources per output. 16 settings per output
The trigger source can be global, by panel, by loop, by Trigger types: fire, fault, disablement, test, pre-
zone or by address. The logic is available in both OR & alarm, FRE, FPE, reset
AND functions. Trigger source: global, by panel, by loop, by zone, by
These units have an additional 4 inputs which can initiate address
a reset, silence, evacuate and test function. Logic functions (OR and AND)
They can be programmed using the CF3000 Quick and simple to install
programmable site installer software and downloaded Pluggable terminals for ease of wiring
using the RS232 port. Programmable via site installer software
Cost effective installation solution
Specifiers guide
Code CIOP4 CIOP8

Description 4 Way mimic relay board 8 Way mimic relay board
Specification
Operating loop voltage 18.5V dc to 30V dc 18.5V dc to 30V dc
Current 1A (max) 1A (max)
Quiescent current 6mA (nom) 6mA (nom)
Environmental
Physical
Construction Boxed - ABS Boxed - ABS
Dimensions (H x W x D) Boxed - 180mm x 254mm x 90mm Boxed - 180mm x 254mm x 90mm
Weight 1.0kg 1.0kg
Ingress protection Boxed - IP65 Boxed - IP65
Compatibility
Recommended loop/cable Fire Tuff, FP200, MICC Fire Tuff, FP200, MICC
Standard connections Configuration instructions

1. At the mimic relay board:
Change the jumper on J10 from LOOP to RS232 SETUP and
place a jumper on J2.
Press the RESET button on the mimic relay board and connect
a serial cable.
2. In site installer:
The configuration is not stored in the control panel and must
be downloaded to the mimic hardware directly.
Right-click on the icon within site installer and select
upload rules to repeater.
The download from site installer will commence and a
confirmation message will be displayed if successful.
3. At the mimic relay board:
Remove the serial cable to the graphical relay board.
Change the jumper on J10 from RS232 SETUP back to LOOP
and remove the jumper on J2.
Dimensions
D

180 254 90
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
4 Way mimic relay board, 4 inputs, 4 ouputs CIOP4
8 Way mimic relay board, 4 inputs, 8 outputs CIOP8
Specifiers guide 2.6 Micro interfaces
MIU872 - Intelligent addressable

micro zone monitor units
An extensive range of micro interfaces are available to Features and benefits

support the Eaton range of control panels, providing
solutions for most design requirements. Soft addressed
The MIU872 is a single zone input, soft addressed, micro
interface, incorporating integral short circuit isolators. Single address
Accepts a zone of up to 20 Eaton conventional
It is fully compatible with the current range of Eaton
detectors
intelligent addressable control panels.
Input monitored for open, short circuit and earth
It is suitable for interfacing a zone of up to 20 Eaton contact faults
conventional detectors onto an Eaton intelligent
Active end of line monitoring
addressable control panel.
It will operate with any Eaton conventional detector
in configuration with a schottky diode type base
(CDBB300). Compact size
No external power supply required
Specifiers guide
2.6 Micro interfaces
Code MIU872
Description Micro zone monitor unit
Standards EN54 Pt17 & Pt18
Specification
Operating voltage 18.5V dc to 30V dc D
Quiescent current 2.6mA (nom)

Load with 20 detectors, and 3.2mA (nom)
unlimited callpoints
Alarm load with 20 8.0mA (nom) W H
Detectors, and unlimited callpoints
Detector zone
Detectors per zone 20 (max)
End of line monitor Active end of line unit - EOLM-1
63 35 18.5
Fire input trigger resistance 680 (nom)
Short circuit fault threshold 100 (max)
resistance Standard connections
Open circuit fault threshold 39K (min)
resistance
EOLM-1
IN+
Environmental IN-
Operating temperature -10C to +60C EARTH LOOP IN
maximum 20 Cooper conventional detectors

Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 95% RH INPUT
LOOP OUT
Physical
Construction PC/ABS
Dimensions (H x W x D) 63mm x 35mm x 18.5mm
Mounting details
Weight 0.28kg
Compatibility
systems
22mm
Recommended loop/cable Fire Tuff, FP200, MICC
Installation
1. Suitable for use with any Eaton conventional detector.
2. Connections suitable for single strand fireproof cable up to 37.5mm
2.5mm2.
3. Loop and input cable screen must be connected to interface earth
terminals.
Note: No addressing of the interface is required (see control panel
operation for details).
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Micro zone monitor unit MIU872
MCIM - Intelligent addressable micro

single channel input units
An extensive range of micro interfaces are available to Features and benefits

support the Eaton range of control panels, providing
solutions for most design requirements. Soft addressed
The MCIM is a single input, soft addressed micro
interface, incorporating integral short circuit isolators. Single address
It is extremely compact and therefore ideal for Suitable for monitoring:
incorporation into other equipment. - Flow switches
- Non fire inputs
The MCIM is fully compatible with the current range
- Auxillary panels
of Eaton intelligent addressable fire control panels. It
is suitable for monitoring a set of normally open, volt Up to 200 units per loop
free contacts such as sprinkler system flow switches, Quick and simple to install
auxiliary panel fire/fault signals as well as non fire input No hard addressing required (plug and play)
signals such as flow valve open contacts, generator start
Compact size
up, fire door closed etc.
Programmable by Eaton site installer software as
technical input/non fire input
Specifiers guide
Code MCIM
Description Micro single channel input unit
Specification D
Inputs
Trigger resistance 5K6 W H
End of line resistor 22K

Short circuit fault threshold resistance 1K
Open circuit fault threshold resistance 33K H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Environmental 63 35 18.5
Mounting details
Physical
Construction PC/ABS
Weight 0.078kg
22mm
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable
fire systems
Recommended loop/cable type Fire Tuff, FP200, MICC
Installation 37.5mm
1. Inputs monitored for open and short circuit fault conditions.
2. Suitable for monitoring normally open volt free contacts (flow
switches etc). Standard connections
3. Connections suitable for single strand fireproof cable up to
2.5mm2.
4. Loop and input cable screen must be connected to interface earth 5K6
IN+
terminals. 22K
IN-
LOOP IN
5. The end of line monitoring resistor, must always be fitted at the EARTH
end of the input wiring, if the input is unused the end of line INPUT
LOOP OUT
resistor must be fitted at the interface input terminals.

Note: No addressing of the interface is required (see control panel
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Micro single channel input unit MCIM
MCOM - Intelligent addressable

micro single channel output units
An extensive range of micro interfaces are available to Optional variants

support our range of control panels, providing solutions
for most design requirements. The MCOM-R gives a 5 second pulse on reset, and is
used for connecting/resetting beam detectors.
The MCOM is a single output, soft addressed, micro
interface, incorporating integral short circuit isolators. The MCOM-S is identified by the panel as a sounder and
It is extremely compact and therefore ideal for does not reset when put into silence mode, only resets
incorporation into other equipment. once panel has been reset.
The MCOM is fully compatible with the current range of Features and benefits
Eaton intelligent addressable fire control panels.
It is suitable for switching low voltage (24V dc at 1A
maximum), via a set of non latching relay contacts. Compact size
Soft Addressed
It is suitable for switching HVAC control circuits, plant
shutdown control circuits, fire door closure etc. Integral short circuit isolator
Plug and play, no hard addressing required
No external short circuit isolator required
Specifiers guide

Code MCOM
Description Micro single channel output unit
Specification
D
Operating voltage 18.5V dc to 30V dc
Output relay
Switching voltage 24V dc to 30V dc W H
Contact rating 1A
Switching power 30 Watts
Environmental
63 35 18.5
Mounting details
Physical
Construction PC/ABS
Weight 0.078kg
Compatibility
22mm
Suitable for use with Eaton intelligent addressable
fire systems
Recommended loop/cable type Fire Tuff, FP200, MICC
Installation
1. Suitable for switching 24V dc control circuits (fire door retainers 37.5mm
etc).
2. Connections suitable for single strand fireproof cable up to
2.5mm2. Standard connections
3. Loop and output cable screen must be connected to interface
earth terminals.
4. The relay output is a set of change over, non-latching, volt free N/O
contacts which are non-monitored. N/C

LOOP IN
Note: No addressing of the interface is required (see control panel C
operation for details). OUTPUT LOOP OUT
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Micro single channel output unit (recognised as output unit) MCOM
Micro single channel output unit (recognised as sounder) MCOM-S
Micro single channel output unit (5 second reset pulse) MCOM-R
Mini module box unit (empty box, can fit 3 modules) ULBU
Specifiers guide 2.7 BMS and networking interfaces
EC0232 - Intelligent addressable Lon

to RS232 adapter
The EC0232, Lon to RS232 adapter allows connection of Features and benefits
Eatons system network (LonWorks) devices to PC based
applications such as site monitor, site graphics. Allows connection of Eatons system network
devices to PC based applications
The EC0232PAVA offers a similar interfacing facility to
Can be connected at any point on peer to peer
the HMX PA/VA (public address voice alarm) system by
network
withholding the handshaking functionality, and if required
the EC0232PAVA3D offers an additional 3 minute time Allows Eatons system network to be connected to
delay before the voice alarm function is actuated. The PC or PA/VA
bi-directional link allows the status of the HMX PA/VA Integrates PC based applications
system to be displayed and monitored at the control Integrates PA/VA systems, site monitor and
panel. Different messages may be played depending on graphpack
the configuration of the cause and effect programming. Flexibility to use any PC application
The interface may be located anywhere on Eatons peer
to peer network allowing information from any intelligent
addressable control panel to be routed through the bi-
directional RS232 port to PC or PA/VA system.
Specifiers guide
2.7 BMS and networking interfaces
EC0232 / EC0232PAVA /
Code EC0232PAVA3D
Description Lon to RS232 adapter
Specification
H
Mains supply 230V ac +10% -15%
D
Communication protocol LonWorks
W
LonWorks connectors Screw terminal block
LonWorks rate 78 Kbps / 1.25 Mbps
H W D
Bit error rate 10e-9 (mm) (mm) (mm)
Serial baud rate 4800 bd 36 116 135
Network termination 102 ohm (if required)
Environmental
Operating temperature -10C to +70C Mechanical layout and standard connection
Physical
IN+ IN- OUT+ OUT-

Network Connections
Installation
1. Ensure that the power supply is switched off during installation.
2. Take care when inserting the RS232 connector to avoid damage.
3. Connect the LonWorks network cables. Cooper Fire LonWorks Network connections RS232 230V ac supply
connection to PC
4. Repower the system.
5. The EC0232 range of devices simply translate the LonWorks
RS232 Connection to PC or HMX PA/VA
protocol and will require no setup or configuration.
Network Connections to Eatons LonWorks Network
Power 230V ac mains supply
Typical system architecture
Intelligent Addressable Control Panels (with network card)
EC0232 LON-RS232 Adaptor
PC with site monitor or site graphics.
(Alternaitvely this could be the

hmx pava system if the EC0232PAVA
or EC0232PAVA3D is utilised)
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Lon to RS232 adapter EC0232
Lon to RS232 adapter EC0232PAVA
(For HMX pa/va system - no handshake)
Lon to RS232 adapter EC0232PAVA3D
(For HMX pa/va system - 3 min time delay)
EC200 - Intelligent addressable dual-

channel LonWorks BMS interface
The control panels on Eatons fire network communicate Features and benefits
using pre-configured network- variables and cannot
normally be used with a BMS where binding is required. Allows Eatons fire network to be controlled by a
LonWorks enabled BMS
The EC200 dual-channel LonWorks BMS interface is
Uses Echelon FT5000 smart transceivers for high
an add-on to the network which translates the pre-
noise immunity
configured network variables to a set of un-configured
network variables which can then be bound to a BMS, 32 message input buffer
giving full access to the fire network data. Compact DIN rail mounting enclosure
The gateway has 2 channels: Fully compatible with Eatons fire network (no need
for binding)
Channel 1 - connects to the Eaton fire network
Open protocol to 3rd party BMS system
Channel 2 - connects to the BMS
Specifiers guide
Code EC200
Description Dual-channel LonWorks BMS interface
Standards CE / UL compliant
H
Specification
Supply voltage 12V dc to 30V dc
Supply current < 30mA
Transceivers Echelon FT5000 / FT-X1
Baudrate 78kbs
W
Connectors 5mm screw terminals
D
Physical
Enclosure ABS DIN rail mounting.
86 105 58
Typical system architecture Standard connections
Cooper Network BMS Supply PIN Description

IN OUT IN OUT 24V dc 4 CHANNEL 1 A Channel 1 - must be connected to
PWR 5 CHANNEL 1 B Eatons fire network
A B A B A B A B + -
SRV1 4 5 6 7 SRV1 11 12 13 14 17 18
6 CHANNEL 1 A Channel 2 - must be connected to
7 CHANNEL 1 B the BMS
11 CHANNEL 2 A
12 CHANNEL 2 B
13 CHANNEL 2 A
Third Party 14 CHANNEL 2 B
BMS 17 SUPPLY +
Gateway
18 0V
Intelligent Addressable Control Panels
If the EC200 is located at the end of the system (spur)

a 102 termination resistor must be fitted 1A, 1B.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Dual-channel LonWorks BMS interface (non handshake) EC200
Dual-channel LonWorks BMS interface (handshaking) EC200H
Dual-channel LonWorks BMS interface EC200S
(self configuring for use with EC700)
EC400 - Intelligent addressable TCP/

IP interface
The EC400 is high performance, reliable and secure Features and benefits
network infrastructure device for accessing Eatons Lon
Network of intelligent addressable control panels over Uses existing infrastructure
intranet or ethernet. Ideal for remote mounting when used with Eaton
webserver software
The EC400s built in configuration server manages up
to 256 IP devices on 1 IP channel without a dedicated Easy to configure
management PC.
This unit supports DHCP even with changing IP
addresses in an intranet environment.
The easy to understand, diagnostic LEDs allow installers
to install and troubleshoot the device without expert
knowledge and dedicated troubleshooting tool.
To connect to Eatons Lon network via intranet will
require a minimum of 2 EC400s. The first EC400 must
be configured as a configuration server and the
second as a client.
The EC400 when configured as a server requires the
address list of all the EC400s IP addresses in the
network.
Specifiers guide
Code EC400
Description TCP/IP Interface H
Specification
Power consumption 3W (typical)
In rush current Up to 950mA at 24V ac
W
Environmental D
Operating temperature -0C to +50C H W D

Storage temperature -10C to 85C (mm) (mm) (mm)
Operating humidity 10 to 90% RH at 50C (non condensing) 60 105 86
Storage humidity 90% RH at 50C (non condensing)
Physical
Enclosure DIN43 880 DIP functions
The EC400 has 7 switches to select the operating mode.
Ingress protection IP40 (enclosure) IP20 (screw terminals)
The EC400 must be configured to operate in a repeater mode, where
Installation Dill rail mounting or wall mounting
all messages are forwarded regardless of the address format.
To put the EC400 into repeater mode, the following steps need to be
performed.
DIP Function
DIP 1 Must be ON
DIP 2 Must be OFF
DIP 3 Must be ON
Press status button for at least 20 seconds after config.

Intranet / Internet VPN
Ethernet/Internet
EC400 UNIT EC400 UNIT
OFF
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
EC400 requires only the IP address to be configured
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
TCP/IP interface EC400
EC540 - Intelligent addressable

Lon network booster
The Lon Network Booster (EC540) is the solution to Smart switch mode
interconnect multiple EIA-709 channels.
The plug and play installation capability of the (EC540)
This unit provides up to 5 ports and routes packets allows connecting it to the network without any further
between these ports. In spite of its small size the EC540 configuration. The smart switch technology automatically
provides best class performance and flexibility in use. detects the bit rates of the connected channels, learns
In order to provide the optimal router configuration the the configuration of the network (domains, subnet/node
EC540 supports 2 to 5 ports as well as the 2 operating addresses, group addresses) and forwards the packets
modes smart switch mode and configured router between the different ports of the (EC540).
mode.
Configured router mode
In this mode the (EC540) behaves like a standard router.

Network management tools must configure the router.
Features and benefits
Extends Cooper network

Plug and play
No configuration required
Simple to use
Specifiers guide
Code EC450
Description Lon Network Booster
H
Specification
Operating Voltage 9V dc to 35V dc / 9V ac to 24V ac
Physical
Dimensions (H x W x D) 60mm x 105mm x 86mm W
Ingress protection IP40 (enclosure) D
IP20 (screw terminals)
H W D
Installation Dill Rail mounting or wall mounting (mm) (mm) (mm)
60 105 86
DIP functions Typical system architecture
DIP1 DIP2 Function

ON ON Smart Switch Mode
= Screen
ON OFF Repeater Mode
= Termination 102
OFF ON Smart Switch Mode/Subnet Learning
OFF OFF Configued EIA-709 Router
DIP3 Function (RS-485 version only)

Supply
ON BIt-Rate Auto Detection On
OFF Bit-Rate Auto Detection Off
DIP4 Must be OFF

DIP5 Must be OFF
Cooper Cooper
DIP6 Must be OFF
Network 1 Network 2
DIP7 Must be OFF
OFF
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Lon network booster EC450
EC650B - Intelligent addressable

BACnet gateway
The BACnet gateway (EC650B) is a CEA-709/BACnet Features and benefits

gateway which maps CEA-709 network variables (NVs)
to standard BACnet server objects. When ordered with Fully compliant with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004 and
this part code EC650B, the LonWorks to BACnet address ISO 16484-5
mapping is pre-loaded and ready for use with the Eaton Maps network variables to BACnet server objects
intelligent addressable CF3000 system interface board. based on CEN/TS 15231:2005
NVs are mapped to binary or intelligent addressable Supports one BACnet MS/TP or BACnet/IP channel
objects (inputs and outputs) according to CEN/TS (configurable)
15231:2005. Scalar NVs are mapped to one BACnet Event-driven email notification
object. Structured NVs are mapped to several BACnet BACnet/IP and BACnet/MSTP activity LED
objects, one for each member (members can be
Easy to configure
selected individually).
DIN rail mount
BMS systems can subscribe and synchronise to a set
Permits several Eaton panels to connect to 3rd party
of BACnet server objects that are updated each time a
BACnet BMS system
status change occurs anywhere in the fire system.
Specifiers guide
BACnet addresses
Object name Type Description
System Events
RxPanelData_CmdStatus Binary input
RxPanelData_PanelNumber Analogue input System event data consists of 31 BACnet
server objects that update simultaneously
RxPanelData_CmdStatusNumber Analogue input
when a fire system event is generated by any
RxPanelData_Address Analogue input control panel in the system. BMS systems
RxPanelData_Analogue Analogue input should take care to subscribe to each update
RxPanelData_Zone Analogue input event synchronously and not poll these
objects.
RxPanelData_Loop Analogue input
RxPanelData_Always_1 Binary input
RxPanelData_TypeID Analogue input
RxPanelData_Location_Location_1...25 Analogue input
System command status
nviReset_state Binary input System reset status
nviEvacuate_state Binary input System evacuation status
nviSilence_state Binary input System silence status
System command action
nvoReset_state Binary output Send reset command
nvoEvacuate_state Binary output Send evacuate command
nvoSilence_state Binary output Send silence command
Additional info
Id_in Analogue input Panel id of last event
nviLoop Analogue input Loop id of last event
Dimensions Communication and automation functions

On the CEA-709 side, the EC650B supports either the ethernet/IP (IP-
852) channel or the TP/FT- 10 channel (configurable).
The BACnet server objects are accessible from the BACnet network
H
where BACnet/IP or BACnet MS/TP is supported (configurable).
Additionally:
H W D L-GATE supports basic automation functions such as alarming,
(mm) (mm) (mm) scheduling, and trending for a seamless integration of CEA-709
W 60 105 86 applications in a BACnet network.
D
L-GATE features event driven email notifications for pre-defined actions.
This way, the user is promptly informed about problems such as a
specific status or an exceeded high-limit.
Network
Network variables
BACnet Gateway
Easy and fast mapping of network variables to BACnet server objects
is guaranteed with the gateway configuration utility supplied with the
unit. The software can run as a stand alone tool, connecting to the
EC650B via FTP or as an LNS plug-in, compatible with LNS 3.0 and
LNS TE applications like NL220, ALEX and LonMaker.
BMS
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
BACnet gateway EC650B
EC700 - Intelligent addressable

modbus gateway
The modbus gateway is part of the InfraLINK range of Features and benefits
network infrastructure components from partners.
High speed host processor with LonWorks Neuron
All of the modbus gateways feature a robust hardware communications co-processor
platform with high performance CPU and UART for fast
Echelon Smart Transceiver for better immunity from
communications without loss of data. The LonWorks to
magnetic and high frequency common mode noise
modbus address mapping is pre-loaded and ready for
use with the CF3000 fire system interface board. Robust high speed UART for serial communications
Compact design for easy installation
The EC700 modbus gateway has 3 communications
ports for LonWorks, serial and programming 6 multi function LED indicators for instant status
connections. The serial port is capable of either RS232 or diagnostics
RS485 (2-wire) communications. Saves time by allowing simple integration with 3rd
party modbus BMS system
Easy to install
Din rail mounted
Specifiers guide
Standard connections Technical specification
EC200S Code EC700

Ch1 Ch2 Description Modbus Gateway - LonWorks Transceiver
FT-X1 (Smart Transceiver), TP/FT-10 (use on free
LON EC700 topology twisted pair channel)
Modbus Specification
Baudrate 78 kbit/s
Connections 1 x 2-pole wieland connector
Installation Supply voltage / 24V dc 10% 50Hz
Mains connector
Indicator LEDs Current consumption Max 280mA on 24V dc (typically 100mA)
Serial communications Modbus RTU slave
Transceiver RS232 / 422 (4-wire) / 485 (2-wire)
Service pin Baud rate Configurable up to 57.6 kbits/s
(under panel)
Connector DSUB-9 female connector
Environmental
Operating temperature 0C to + 55C non operating temperature -5C
to +85C Physical
Dimensions (L x H x W) 120mm x 27mm x 75mm
LonWorks connector
Weight 150g
EMC certification CE marked, UL & cUL conformance
Pin Description
1 +24V dc
2 GND
Pin Description RS232 RS422 RS485
Configuration
connector
1 +5V
RS232/422/485 Power connector 2 RS232 Rx
socket 3 RS232 Tx
4 Not connected
LED 5 Ground
No. Description Colour State Function
6 RS422Rx +
1 LON Service Green Flashing Unconfigured.
7 Rs422 Rx -
Green
8 RS485 + / RS422 Tx +
Off Configured
Solid Green Applicationless
9 RS485 - / RS422 Tx -
2 LON Wink Red Off Normal state
Pin Description
Flashes Red A Wink
command is 1 Shield
received 2 -
3 Not used - 3 -
4 Module Green/Red Solid Green The module is 4 Net B
Status working ok. 5 Net A
Flashes Red Software error,
try a reset.
Solid Red Hardware error
5 Module Green/Red Solid Red No Modbus
Activity activity for 5
secs.
Solid Green After receiving a
correct Modbus
message
6 Config Error Green/Red Solid Green Config good
Flashes Red No Config
Specifiers guide
Default serial parameters:

Transceiver: RS232, TX, RX, GND (Note NULL modem cable
plus gender changer required for PC connection).
Communications: 9600 bits per second, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,
no parity.
Note: A PC configuration tool is available to change serial parameters.
Length
Register name (bytes) Modbus type Modbus address
Control registers
Command * 2 Holding (16-bit) 1
Event timer 2 Holding (16-bit) 2
Event count ** 2 Input (16-bit) 26
Buffer overflow *** 2 Input (16-bit) 24
Fire event registers: the Eaton fire event has been split into a number of
indivudual Modbus registers
Command or Status 2 Input (16-bit) 1
Status Number 2 Input (16-bit) 2
Address 2 Input (16-bit) 3
Analogue 2 Input (16-bit) 4
Zone 2 Input (16-bit) 5
Loop 2 Input (16-bit) 6
Type Id 2 Input (16-bit) 7
Location 31 Input (16-bit) Aug-23
Panel 2 Input (16-bit) 25
* Command (holding reg. 1)Usage 0 = not used, 1 = evacuate, 2 =

silence, 3 = reset
** Event count (input reg. 26) Increments by one, each time a new fire
event is presented on the Modbus fire event registers. A BMS system
can look for a change of value (COV) on this register as a signal to read
the fire event registers.
*** Buffer overflow (Input Reg. 24) increments when the message
queue in the Eaton LonWorks BMS interface is full while a new event
arrives from a fire panel. This can happen when fire events occur at a
rate faster then the event timer for a prolonged time.
Note: The value of the event timer (Holding Reg. 2) is a 16-bit interger
of 0-65535, where 1 = 0.1 seconds.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Modbus gateway EC700
CFSFL01 - Intelligent addressable

single mode Lon to fibre optic
adapter
The CFSFL01 single mode Lon to fibre optic adapter Features and benefits
allows connection of an Eaton fire system network
(LonWorks) devices through optical fibre, and to allow Simple to install, plug and play
both point-to-point or multi drop topology. Easy to use
Using only single-mode fibre optic, the CFSFL01 adapter Extends an Eaton panel network
allows extension of an Eaton fire system network to a Fast response
maximum distance of 15km with a transmission speed
of up to 78kbit/s or 1.25Mbit/s.
Connection is made using SC type fibre optic
connectors. In comparison with conventional twisted
pair cable, the fibre optic usage in a LonWorks
network has many advantages: it is reliable and fast
in long-distance network transmission even in difficult
industrial environments (with transients, surges or
electromagnetic interference etc.) without requiring any
additional transient protection.
Specifiers guide
Code CFSFL01
Description Single mode Lon to fibre optic adaptor
Specification
Lonworks connectors Screw terminal block
Lonworks rate 78 Kbps / 1.25 Mbps
Bit error rate 10e-9
Wavelength 1310nm
Fibre type Single mode fibre
Fibre diameter 9/125 micron
Fibre connector SC type (optional ST type)
Link distance 15km H W D
Environmental (mm) (mm) (mm)
Operating temperature -30C to +70C 116 136 34
Physical
Dimensions (H x W x D) 116mm x 136 mm x 34mm Installation
2. Take care when inserting the fibre optic connector to avoid
Typical system architecture damage. Note that the FR1 connector in the local modules port
should connect to the FT1 connector in the far end modules port
Fiber Optic Point to Point Link and vice versa.
3. LonA connects to Net_A of the Lonworks Bus (network card),
LonWorks Lon-Fiber Lon-Fiber LonWorks
ADAPTOR ADAPTOR
LonB connects Net_B.
NODE Single-Mode NODE
LonWorks
LonWorks
Fiber
Control Panel CFSFL01 CFSFL01 Control Panel
& &
Network Card Network Card
Mechanical layout and connections
Fiber Optic Star Topology Link

Terminals
LonWorks
NODE 1. Lon Net A
LonWorks
2. Lon Net B
3. Unused
4. Unused
Single-Mode Fiber
Single-Mode Fiber
Single-Mode Fiber
Single-Mode Fiber
LED indication
Lon-Fiber Lon-Fiber Lon-Fiber
ADAPTOR ADAPTOR ADAPTOR POW Power on indication On means power on
CFSFL02 CFSFL02 CFSFL02 NA Not applicable
LonWorks
LonWorks
LonWorks
DT Fibre transmitting Flashing means working

FT1 Fibre port 1 Flashing means working
Transmitting data
LonWorks LonWorks LonWorks FR1 Fibre port 1 Flashing means working
NODE NODE NODE Receiving data
Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel
& & &
Network Card Network Card Network Card
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Single mode Lon to fibre optic adaptor CFSFL01
CFSFL02 - Intelligent addressable

dual channel Lon to fibre optic
adapter
The dual channel Lon to fiber optic adapter (CFSFL02) Features and benefits
allows connection of Eatons system network
(LonWorks) devices through optical fiber, and to allow Simple to install, plug and play
both point to point or multi drop topology. Easy to use
Using only single-mode fiber optic, the CFSFL02 adapter Extends Eatons panel network
allows extension of Eatons system network LonWorks Fast response
to a maximum distance of 15km with a transmission
speed of up to 78Kbit/s or 1.25Mbit/s.
Connection is made using SC type fibre optic
connectors. In comparison with conventional twisted
pair cable, the fibre optic usage in a LonWorks
network has many advantages; it is reliable and fast
in long-distance network transmission even in difficult
industrial environments (with transients, surges or
electromagnetic interference etc.) without requiring any
additional transient protection.
Specifiers guide

Code CFSFL02
Description Dual channel lon to fibre optic adaptor
Specification
Lonworks connectors Screw terminal block
Lonworks rate 78 Kbps / 1.25 Mbps
Bit error rate 10e-9
Wavelength 1310nm
Fibre type Single mode fibre
Fibre diameter 9/125 micron
Fibre connector SC type (optional ST type)
Link distance 15km
H W D
Environmental
(mm) (mm) (mm)
116 136 34
Physical
Dimensions (H x W x D) 116mm x 136 mm x 34mm
Installation
2. Take care when inserting the Fiber Optic connector to avoid
Typical system architecture damage.
Note:
Fiber Optic Point to Point Link
FR1 should connect to the previous modules FR2
LonWorks Lon-Fiber Lon-Fiber LonWorks FT1 should connect to the previous modules FT2
NODE ADAPTOR Fiber ADAPTOR NODE
LonWorks
LonWorks
FR2 should connect to the next modules FT1

Control Panel CFSFL02 CFSFL02 Control Panel
& & FT2 should connect to the next modules FR1
Network Card Network Card
3. LONA connects to Net_A of the Lonworks Bus (network card),
LONB connects Net_B.
Fiber Optic Multi-Drop Link
Fiber Fiber Fiber

Mechanical layout and connections
CFSFL02 CFSFL02 CFSFL02 CFSFL02

Lon-Fiber Lon-Fiber Lon-Fiber Lon-Fiber Terminals
ADAPTOR ADAPTOR ADAPTOR ADAPTOR
1. Lon Net A
LonWorks LonWorks LonWorks LonWorks 2. Lon Net B
NODE NODE NODE NODE 3. Unused
LonWorks Bus
LonWorks Bus
LonWorks Bus
LonWorks Bus
Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel

& & & &
4. Unused
Network Card Network Card Network Card Network Card
LonWorks LonWorks LonWorks LonWorks

NODE NODE NODE NODE
Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel
& & & &
Network Card Network Card Network Card Network Card
LED indication
POW Power on indication On means power on
NA Not applicable
DT Fibre transmitting Flashing means working
FT1 Fibre port 1 Flashing means working
Transmitting data
FR1 Fibre port 1 Flashing means working
Receiving data
FT2 Fiber port 2 Flashing means working
Transmitting data
FR2 Fiber port 2 Flashing means working
Receiving data
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Dual channel Lon to fibre optic adaptor CFSFL02
ZPCB2222 - Intelligent addressable

loop splitter unit (approved)
The loop splitter interface (ZPCB2222) allows the Features and benefits
expansion of the Eaton CF3000 from a 4 loop panel to a
16 loop panel. Loop connected
Splits each connected loop into 4 smaller loops
Each loop of the CF3000 is connected to 4 sub loops
totalling a maximum number of 200 addresses per main Allows greater system design flexibility
loop. This interface is mainly applicable in countries Permits callpoints to be wired on separate loop
where the mixing of detectors, sounders, callpoints and Supports greater number of smaller loops
interfaces are not permissible on the same loop or the
number of devices per loop is limited to a small number.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Loop splitter unit ZPCB2222
ZPCB2252-MML/MMR,
ZPCB2252-MSL/MSR - Intelligent
addressable mimic PCB
Up to 250 outputs can be connected to the mimic PCBs. Features and benefits
This offers more capability to the extensive options
already offered by the CF3000 control panel. Available as master or slave, each has 32 outputs
250 outputs (1 master and 7 slaves)
The ZPCB2252-MML or ZPCB2252-MMR is the master
PCB which can control up 32 outputs. If further outputs Ideal for mimic panel provision
are required ZPCB2252-MSL or ZPCB2252-MSR can Each output can be programmed as fire or fault
daisy chain onto the master PCB offering a total outputs Each output can be operated by address, zone or
of 250. panel activation
Each slave can control up to 32 outputs. 2 versions available:
The master board can be loop or network driven and - LED
does required an external 1A 24V dc power supply. - Relay output
The flexibility of these boards is further enhanced by the Soft addressed
fact that each output can be programmed for fire or fault Built in short circuit isolation
with up 5 different zones or addresses per output. Simple configuration using Eatons site installer
This can be programmed using the CF3000 Easy to install
programmable repeater software and downloaded using
the RS232 port.
These boards are typical used for geographical LED
mimic displays.
Specifiers guide
ZPCB2252-MML/ZPCB2252-MMR,
Code ZPCB2252-MSL/ZPCB2252-MSR
Description Mimic PCB
Specification
Quiescent current 310mA
Operating loop voltage 18V dc to 30V dc
Inputs 4mA to 20mA
External PSU 15V dc to 30V dc
Outputs
Voltage 24V dc to 30V dc
Current 10mA
Environmental
Physical
Dimensions (H x W) 10mm x 290mm
Weight 0.25Kg
Compatibility
Loop powered installation

1. Recommended loop cable: FIRETUF / FP200 / MICC
2. Boards have built in isolators
Notes
If loop powered no addressing of the interface is required
1. Only connect cable screen to its adjacent earth terminal
2. 24V dc external power supply is required
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Mimic LED PCB (master) ZPCB2252-MML
Mimic relay PCB (master) ZPCB2252-MMR
Mimic LED PCB (slave) ZPCB2252-MSL
Mimic relay PCB (slave) ZPCB2252-MSR
Specifiers guide 2.8 Ancillaries
FX range - Intelligent addressable

EN54 Pt.4 approved power supply
Switch mode power supply unit with 24V dc output Feature and benefits
voltage, available with a maximum output current of
1.5A, 2.5A and 5A. Switching technology
Fault relay
The unit is a high efficiency switching power supply;
protected from overloads, polarity reversals and short Tamper switch
circuits. 4 LEDs indicate power supply status: mains Integral battery
power (green), battery charging n(green), battery Fault indicator
discharged (yellow) & fault (yellow).
Small & large versions of metallic casing available
Specifically recommended as an auxiliary power supply EN54 Pt.4 Approved
unit for fire detection system components such as
Output currents available: 1.5A, 2.5A, 5A
electromagnets, notification devices, etc.
Simple to use
Using the unit in large systems eliminates the problem
Secure steel enclosure
of long power cable runs which simplifies installation.
The case comes provided with a mechanical lock and
tamper switch for opening and closing the front door.
Power supply unit series 82000B are certified in
accordance with the standard UNI EN54-4:1997 +
A1:2002 +A2:2006.
Specifiers guide
2.8 Ancillaries
Code FX1-5ABP FX1-5ABG FX2-5ABG FX5-0ABG
Description Power supply
Standards EN 60950 pt1, EN 50130 Pt 4, EN50081, EN54 Pt4, A1:2002, A2:2006
Specification
Output voltage (-) Min 20.2, Norm 27.6, Max 29.4
Load current (A) 1.3 1.3 2.2 4.4
Ripple (mV) 174 174 166 246
Input voltage (V~) 230 V~ -15+10%, 50/60 Hz 230 V~ -15+10%, 50/60 Hz 230 V~ -15+10%, 50/60 Hz 230 V~ -15+10%, 50/60 Hz
Current absorption (A max) 0.42 0.42 0.68 1.21
Battery (Pb) 2 x 12V 4.0 Ah 2 x 12V 4.0 Ah 2 x 12V 7.0 Ah 2 x 12V 17.0 Ah
Recharge current battery (A) 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.55
Fuses
Switching Fs1 F2 F2 F3.15 F4
Switching Fs2 F6.3 F6.3 F6.3 F6.3
Circuit of control F1 F2 F2 F3.15 F5
Physical
Operating temperature +5C to +40C
Housing material Epoxy varnished sheet
Standard equipment Two keys per lock
Packaging 1pc. / package
Insulation class Classe I
Electrical protection Fuses for mains and battery overload. Short circuit in output, battery inversion. Door opening tamper.
W
1. Enclosure is designed for wall mounting.

2. 2 x 20mm knockouts are provided for cable entry at the
rear of the enclosure.
D
3. A fused terminal block is provided for mains supply
connection.
4. Output is protected by internal fuse (displayed in table
below).
H
1. FX range power supplies provide outputs between 1.5A
and 5A.
2. Output is used to supply any connected load and also to H W D
recharge the integral batteries. (mm) (mm) (mm)
P Case 290 250 180
3. To enable batteries to be charged correctly maximum
G Case 450 260 205
continuous external load should not exceed the values
displayed in the table below.
4. LED indicators are provided to signify: Catalogue numbers
Mains healthy (Green) Description Code
System fault (Yellow) 24V 1.5A PSU P CASE FX1-5ABP
Battery charging (Green) 24V 1.5A PSU G CASE FX1-5ABG
Charger output fault (Yellow) 24V 2.5A PSU G CASE FX2-5ABG

5. Mains healthy and system fault LEDs are visible without 24V 5.0A PSU G CASE FX5-0ABG
removing front cover.
Specifiers guide 2.9 System software tools
GRAPHPACK - Intelligent addressable

Graph Pack software
Graph pack software is a powerful alarm management Graph Pack Lite software:
tool and graphical user interface designed to work with
Designed for small 1 to 2 panel systems, the graph pack
many of Eatons safety fire system products.
lite provides a comprehensive level of control at a very
Users can monitor, control and interrogate their systems competitive price.
to ensure alarms are detected and dealt with quickly
Graph Pack software:
and efficiently. Simple and easy to use, the graph pack
software includes a host of advanced features, offering Designed for a range of systems, the graph pack gives
users a system thats powerful and truly comprehensive. users the maximum level of control and accessibility over
All of the information required, all of the control needed, their alarm system.
is literally at the users fingertips.
The graph pack software not only delivers alarm
information, it also records other system events and Multiple users
faults, allowing the generation of detailed reports. Alarms
Secure system
can be displayed and controlled in a variety of ways to
best suit the users requirements. Multiple PC work stations
Simple navigation
In-depth history analysis
All system events displayed and record
Fully configurable
Simple and clear user interface
Programable to suit any application
Specifiers guide
2.9 System software tools
Technical specification System requirements
Programming parameters Quantity Hardware Intel Pentium or equivalent 2GHz or better 32 bit, 1GB
Requirements Memory, 80GB disc space, 1 RS232 Serial Port, 100 and/
Event types 32,000
or 1000 Mps LAN ports, 1 USB port
Graphics pages 32,000
Platform Windows XP-Pro Service Pack 2 or 3,
Symbols 32,000 Windows Vista, Windows 7
Text pages 2,000,000 Display High resolution 1024 x 768 hi-colour or true colour display
Sounds 2,000 with 32,768 or 16 million colours
Users 2,000
Manual controls 32,000 Features list
Time controls 2,000
Features list Graph Pack Lite Graph Pack
Automatic control actions per I/P 255
Maximum no panels 1-2 1-99
Text/reset text/graphic pages per input state 1 (dependent on
Loops/zones per node 255 version)
Inputs per zone 255 History storage 18 months Unlimited
Input types per input 16 Printing of history events Last 20 events Unlimited
Text page per input 1 Graphics page printing No Yes
Graphics page per input 1 Printing and exporting of lists No Yes
Reset page per input 1 History analysis No Yes
Control panel control dialogs Yes Yes
Control panel control from Yes Yes
Graphics parameters graphics pages
Fire device isolation from Yes Yes
graphics page
File Type Colours File size Loading speed
Fire devince isolation from dialog Yes Yes
BMP Bitmap 16 million Very Large Medium box
BMP Bitmap 256 Large Fast Manual and time control lists No Yes
BMP Bitmap 16 Medium Fast Alarm reminders No Yes
RLE Bitmap 256 Small Fast Multiple displays No Yes
WMF Metafile 16 million Small Slow (Additional option)
EMF Metafile 16 million Small Slow Line printer No Yes
GIF Bitmap 256 Small Fast (Additional option)
JPEG Bitmap 16 million Small Medium Pager notification No Yes
(Additional option)
Sms notification No Yes
(Additional option)
Symbol parameters
File Resizable Transparency Max size

BMP Poor No 128 x 128
RLE Poor No 128 x 128
GIF Poor Yes 128 x 128
WMF Good Yes Unlimited
JPG Poor No 64 x 64
ICO Poor Yes 16 x 16, 32 x 32 or 48 x 48
Sound parameters
Graph pack lite and graph pack premium lite can use any windows
.WAV (wave) file, but compressed file formats should be avoided.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Graph Pack software (lite) GRAPHPACK1-2LITE
Graph Pack software (1 panel) GRAPHPACK1
Graph Pack software (2-5 panels) GRAPHPACK2-5
Specifiers guide 2.9 System software tools
SITEMONITOR - Intelligent
addressable site monitor software
and web server
Site monitor / webserver software is designed to Additionally, the software also supports multiple users,
monitor Eaton fire systems and allow quick PC based of which each can be assigned a particular role. This
administration. means non-technical staff can use the software to
overview the system state, while technicians can log in
Using a simple interface, authorized users can view
and manage any issues.
control panel event history, event status, device
properties and other information depending on access
permissions defined by the system administrator.
The site monitor / webserver software continually Monitor multiple networks
monitors network activity and records every event Network event log and event reports
in detail. This information can then be processed View any networked panel, loop, zone or device
and generated into HTML reports or used to trigger
Up to date device status
automated email notifications.
Panel/device administration
To extend the benefits of PC based access, the site
Setup automated email notifications
monitor / webserver software is also designed to work
remotely and can be accessed through the desktop Full remote access via client software or a web
client software or a web browser. This ensures that browser
where ever you are, you can always quickly connect and License controlled client software to enforce
perform vital administration. security
Built in password security
Restrict user access to view only, technicians and
administrators
Supports up to 1000 users
Remote system interrogation
Improved maintenance efficency and planning
Specifiers guide
2.9 System software tools
Description Site Monitor / Webserver software System requirements

Panels per network 126 Hardware requirements Intel Pentium or equivalent 2 GHz or better
Networks 50 1GB memory, 100MB free disc space
1 RS232 serial port or USB port with serial
Loops per panel 250
adapter, 100/1000 Mps LAN port or wireless
Zones per network 250 LAN card.
Max events 9,999 Platform Windows 2000 SP 4
Max conditions per event 100 Windows 2003
Max actions per event 100 Windows XP SP2
Windows Vista
Max users 1000 Windows 7
User access levels 4 Display high resolution 1024x768 hi-colour or
Max connections 200 True-colour display with 32,768 or 16 million
Site installer 2.0 or Above colours
Database format version Software libraries Microsoft .Net 2.0 SP2
Max history log size 4 GB Microsoft SQL Server Compact 3.5 SP1
Supported network protocols DF6000NetworkV1 Remote access (server) 1 Open TCP/IP Port
Supported panels Eaton Intelligent Addressable Panels Web access (server) ASP.Net 2.0 Enabled Web Server
Report file format HTML Web access (client/browser) CSS 2.0, JavaScript.
Supported browsers include:
Email notification protocol SMTP
Internet Explorer 5.5+
Remote protocol TCP/IP Mozilla Firefox 3.5+
Web interface technologies / ASP.Net 2.0, XHTML, CSS 2.0, JavaScript Opera 10.0+
Protocols Safari 4.0+
Automated email events SMTP server
Typical system architecutre
ECO232
Panel Network PC Server
LAN / Internet
PC Client PC Client
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Site monitor software/webserver SITEMONITOR
Specifiers guide 2.10 Test Equipment
LP800KIT - Intelligent addressable

loop tester kit
The loop tester kit (LP800KIT) is a hardware /software Features and benefits
combination that can be used to test, commission and
fault find a loop of up to 200 intelligent addressable Pre-addressing: identifies all field devices and
devices (sensors, sounders, ancillary devices) without determines their address and device type.
having to connect the loop to Eatons intelligent Analogue values: Constantly displays in real time
addressable control panel. the analogue value of all loop devices in order to
determine their status.
The loop tester is connected between the loop and
PC. It allows the engineer to quickly identify and locate Test LED: this command operates the LED of any
any loop device that is operating outside its operating inputs (sensors/callpoints) as well as controls the
conditions by varying the alarm threshold of any loop outputs of sounders and output modules.
device (alarm, pre-alarm and fault). Device settings: analogue values of all devices can
be interpreted according to ranges which can be set
The Loop tester hardware requires a free serial port on
and altered by the user (OK, pre-alarm, fire).
the PC, either internet or via a USB extension, a mains
power supply and a direct connection to the deivce loop. Event log: a history of events can be stored from the
date the application was started.
Soft addressing: automatically assigns a new, and
potentially different, address to every device found
on the loop.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Loop Tester Kit LP800KIT
USBINT2 - Intelligent addressable

USB analogue systems panel
interface
The analogue systems panel interface (USBINT2) is a Features and benefits

universal serial bus converter that provides conversions
from RS232 to USB, TTL to USB or TTL to RS232. Intelligent addressable control panel to PC site
installer connection using the RS232 to USB
These options provide the connectivity required between configuration
a PC and intelligent addressable control panels, wireless
control panels, and wireless survey tools. Wireless control panel to PC site installer connection
using the RS232 to USB configuration
Wireless control panel to PC wireless live
monitor connection using the TTL to USB/RS232
configurations
Wireless survey tool to PC survey tool connection
using the TTL to USB/RS232 configurations
Simple PC driver installation
Simple DIP switch configuration
Specifiers guide
2.10 Test Equipment
Configuration settings
Switch positions
4 3 2 1 Mode Usage
OFF OFF OFF OFF TTL to USB Wireless panel to PC live monitor
Wireless survey tool to PC survey tool
ON ON OFF OFF TTL to RS232 Wireless panel to PC live monitor (no USB
available)
Wireless survey tool to PC survey tool (no USB
available)
OFF OFF ON ON RS232 TO USB Intelligent addressable panel to PC Site Installer
Wireless panel to PC Site Installer
Cable connections
TTL to USB - TTL to RS232 -

Wireless survey tool connection Wireless survey tool connection
(serial link)
RS232 to USB -
Wireless panel to PC
(site installer)
Kit contents
1 x USBINT2
1 x Driver CDROM
1 x USB Cable
1 x RS232 Cross-Over Cable
1 x TTL Cable
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Usb analogue systems panel interface USBINT2
CF800PROG - Intelligent
addressable device programmer
The CF800PROG programmer is a versatile tool to Features and benefits

aid the installation, commissioning, maintenance and
Reads addresses
servicing of current addressable devices and fire alarm
systems. Writes addresses
This unit is light, robust and easy to operate using a user Reads analogue values
friendly menu structure on 2 x 40 character LCD display. Tests devices
It is powered from a single PP3 size, heavy duty battery Deletes addresses
or an external supply.
Programmes the 3 heat settings
The programmer has a built in addressable base as well
as two external terminals for use with all other current
addressable ancillary devices.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Intelligent addressable device programmer CF800PROG
CSC354 - Intelligent addressable

4 way sounder controller unit

The 4 way sounder controller unit (CSC354) is a loop
connected interface, which provides the facility to power Single address
and control 4 independent conventional sounder circuits. 4 Separate sounder circuit outputs (total 1.6A max)
This greatly simplifies installation in applications where Avoids the need to wire conventional sounders back
specialist sounders or beacons are required by avoiding to the control panel
the need to connect them directly to the intelligent
Outputs are independently programmable (delays on
circuit 1 only)
This unit only uses a single address yet each circuit can Integral battery and power supply
be independently controlled according to the required
cause and effect programming.
Increased system integrity
Beacons and strobes can be wired direct to the
interface (saving on both time and installation)
Specifiers guide
2.5 Test Equipment

1. The sounder controller interface requires a local unswitched 230V
Code CSC354 supply and incorporates a back up battery to maintain functionality
Description 4 way sounder controller unit under mains failure conditions
Standards EN54 Pt4 & Pt17 2005 2. Cable entry can be top or rear
Specification 3. Top entry is via 20mm conduit entries (pre-fitted with blanking
Operating voltage 24V dc plugs for unused entries)
Quiescent current 250A 4. Rear entry via substantial cable slot in metal back plate
Mains supply voltage 230V ac 5. Top cover secured with tamper resistant screws
Mains current consumption 0.4A
Battery 2 x 12 V, 4Ah, SLA
Standby period 24 hours + 30 minutes ringing
Sounder circuit output 0.8A (max), single circuit
Sounder load 3.2A (max), total
Fire relay switching voltage 30V dc
Switching current 1A (resistive), 0.5A (inductive) (max)
Environmental
Physical
Construction ABS/Steel
Weight 5.4kg
Compatibility
systems
6K8 6K8 6K8 6K8
intelligent addressable loop
230V ac mains
FIRE RELAY
N/O C N/C
L N E E + - E + - E + - E + - E - + E - +
OUT IN
+
+
BATT
back up
- battery
-
NOTES:
3. Sounder circuits are monitored for wiring open and short circuit.
4. Output fire relay is a set of changeover volt free-contacts and is not monitored.
5. This unit should only be finally connected to the 230V ac mains supply and battery,
during system commissioning.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
4 way sounder controller unit CSC354
3. UL intelligent addressable systems
Specifiers guide
UL intelligent addressable systems
Quality and
safety certified
3.0 UL listed systems
ULCF3000RM control panel 3.0 UL listed 3.0

Introduction............................................................................................................................... 3.1
Control panels ........................................................................................................................... 3.2
Repeater panels ........................................................................................................................ 3.3
Accessories............................................................................................................................... 3.4
Standard interfaces ................................................................................................................... 3.5
Micro interfaces ........................................................................................................................ 3.6
Specifiers guide
3.1 Introduction
An introduction to UL fire systems...

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) is an Eatons range of addressable fire panels and
independent product safety certification systems are listed by UL testing laboratory to
organisation, established in 1894, to develop UL864 9th Edition for use in fire alarm signalling in
standards and test procedures for products, accordance with the latest National Fire Protection
materials, components, assemblies, tools and Association Standards (NFPA 72), the National
equipment. Chiefly dealing with product safety Electric Code (NFPA 70) and the Life Safety Code
it also evaluates and certifies the efficiency of (NFPA 101).
a companys business processes through its
Note: For further information refer to NFPA 72
magnificent system registration programs.
National Fire Alarm code book of practice. The
Since the launch of our UL Listed fire product NFPA 72 covers the application, installation,
range, several prestigious projects worldwide have location performance and maintenance of fire alarm
been supplied including Hyatt Resort and Spa, systems and their components.
Shangri-la at the Fort and Times Square projects in
South East Asia and several major projects in the
Middle East including a major projects within the
prestigious Riyadh Financial District in the Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia.
The Eaton UL range is designed to provide a
solution for all sizes of project, from the simple
small stand alone system to the large multi
panel networked system with PA/VA and BMS
integration.
SIGNALING
4AC5
FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
ULCF3000 range - UL intelligent

SIGNALING
addressable control panels 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
ULCF3000RM (wall mount red metal)
ULCF3000 (wall mount graphite)
The Eaton ULCF3000 is a high specification intelligent Features and benefits

addressable, wall or rack mounted, UL Listed control
panel available in various loop configurations. It combines Large versatile touch-screen user interface
sophisticated functionality with simple operation and 2 or 4 Class A Style 7 SLC loops
aesthetically pleasing design. Event history buffer (9,999 events) with date/time
The control panel has the ability to support complex stamp
cause and effect programming (via site installer) and a 4 Notification appliance circuit (NACs) outputs
wide range of user controllable functions that make the Dedicated alarm, trouble, AC trouble relays
panel ideal for a diverse range of projects from industrial
Integral short circuit isolators
applications through to large multi site commercial
developments. Up to 200 addresses per loop
Full network capability up to 126 panels
The ULCF3000 uses soft addressing to minimise
installation time and remove the potential for error Supports a comprehensive range of soft addressing
associated with manual addressing. It can operate as modules and devices for greater flexibility in design
a stand alone panel or as part of a networked system, Menu driven graphical user interface for ease of
and has powerful programming options that allow operation
configurable control over whether messages from Reduced commissioning time through soft
specific panels are transmitted around the network or addressing and auto learn functions
remain local. Programming and trouble shooting time minimised
by using a range of features such as auto config,
walk test, system details menus
Specifiers guide
3.2 Control panels
Code ULCF3000 / ULCF3000RM D2 D2

Description UL intelligent addressable control panel
Standards UL864 9th edition W W
Primary operating supply 120V ac / 240V ac, 60Hz, 2.0A supervised
Secondary operating supply H H
Battery voltage 24V dc
Battery charge current 1.0A (max)
Battery derating factor 0.1
Battery capacity supervised 12Ah (max)
Notification appliance circuits Class B, Style Y, Sounder Group 1, Sound-
er 1, Sounder Group 1, Sounder 2, Sounder Group 2
Output voltage 24V dc
Output current 0.75A (max) D1
ULCF3000 D1 ULCF3000RM
Line impedance 50 (wall mount graphite) (wall mount red metal)
When powered by 240V ac, the maximum
current of 3.0A is shared between these
circuits
Description H (mm) W (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm)
When powered by 120V ac, the maximum ULCF3000 397 497 75 130
current of 2.25A is shared between these ULCF3000RM 398 505 48 118
circuits
Circuits are supervised, power limited and
regulated.
Notification appliance circuits Class B, Style Y, SYNC MODULE. NAC1,
System block diagram
NAC2
Output voltage 24V dc
Output current 0.5A (max) Control Panel 2 BMS System
Interface
Line impedance 50 (max)
The maximum current of 0.5A is shared
between these circuits
Circuits are supervised, power limited and
regulated.
Printer Control Panel 1 PSU
Alarm, trouble contacts. Relay expansion
Unity power factor 30V dc
For connection to power limited sources only
BATT
Aux relay (AC Trouble) contacts
Unity power factor 30V dc, 1A
For connection to power limited sources only PA/VA System Site Graphics System
Signaling line circuit Style [7] Class [A] (Addressable Loop)

Rated voltage 24V dc Catalogue numbers
Maximum current 500mA
Line impedance 50 (max) Description Code
Supervised, power limited 2 loop panel ULCF30002G
Network SLC 4 loop panel ULCF30004G
Voltage 5V dc 2 loop panel, integral printer ULCF30002GP
Current 100mA (max) 4 loop panel, integral printer ULCF30004GP
Line impedance 50 (max) 2 loop panel, network card ULCF30002GNC
Power limited 4 loop panel, network card ULCF30004GNC
Limited to same enclosure installations 2 loop panel, integral printer, network card ULCF30002GPNC
Physical 4 loop panel, integral printer, network card ULCF30004GPNC
IP Rating IP30 2 loop panel, red metal box ULCF30002GRM
4 loop panel, red metal box ULCF30004GRM
Compatibility
2 loop panel, integral printer, red metal box ULCF30002GPRM
Suitable for use with Eaton UL fire systems
4 loop panel, integral printer, red metal box ULCF30004GPRM
2 loop panel, network card, red metal box ULCF30002GNCRM
4 loop panel, network card, red metal box ULCF30004GNCRM
2 loop panel, integral printer, network card, ULCF30002GPNCRM
red metal box
4 loop panel, integral printer, network card, ULCF30004GPNCRM
red metal box
Rack mounted 2 loop panel ULR3000L2
Rack mounted 4 loop panel ULR3000L4
Rack mounted 2 loop panel c/w network card ULR3000L2NC
Rack mounted 4 loop panel c/w network card ULR3000L4NC
Loop connected repeater panel ULCF3000PRG
Touchscreen network repeater panel ULCTPR3000
ULCF3000PRG - UL intelligent
SIGNALING
addressable passive repeater 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
panel
The ULCF3000PR passive repeater panel is a cost Features and benefits

effective repeater which is programmed via its 2 x 40
backlit LCD informative display to be either fully passive 2 x 40 Backlit LCD display
(display only) or semi passive (restricted system control) 6 Supervisory LEDs
and must be connected to the panel loop. Active or passive
The passive repeater panel will display the system Maximum of 20 repeaters can be connected to a
information text of the connected control panel and loop
will provide a fire indication, with panel number, of any Can be surface mounted or semi recessed
connected network control panel that has fire activation. Compact economy panel
The passive repeater will require programming with local Menu driven LCD display
text information. Simple connection to panel SLC circuit reduces
In addition to the passive repeater panels menu driven 2 wiring and time
x 40 backlit LCD display, the panel also provides further Distance run up to 2kms from control panel without
system status information via 6 supervisory LEDs additional cable and equipment, saving cost
(power on, alarm, trouble, supervisory, test in progress,
and scroll). Dimensions
D1
W
H
1 2 3 4 5
D2
Description H (mm) W (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm)

ULCF3000PRG 270 332 45 47
Specifiers guide
3.3 Repeater panels

1. Wall mounted by means of 4 fixing screws.
Code ULCF3000PR
2. Cable entry at top or back.
Description Passive repeater panel
3. 12 top entry gland holes with push out blanking plugs.
Standards UL864 9th edition
4. 4 separate rear access cable entry facilities.
System indicators
5. Local mains supply required.
LEDs Power on, Alarm, Trouble, Test,
Supervisory, Scroll LEDs
Mains input, supervised System functionality
Voltage 120V ac to 240V ac, 60Hz 1. Panel operates in either normal, supervisor or engineer mode.
Current 35mA 2. Supervisor and engineer modes are accessed via 4 digit pass
SLC field wiring codes.
Current 0.354mA 3. Supervisor mode allows silence, evacuate and reset commands
Wiring gauge 12 (max) AWG to be sent to host panel (loop connected) or to network (network
Wiring class Class A Style 7 connected).
Ground fault 0.1 4. Engineer mode enables password to be changed if required and
Supervisory, power limited Yes allows access to text download menu.
Line impedance 50 (max) 5. When connected to the network, all text is transmitted via the
Batteries network, changes to other network panels update automatically.
Batteries 1x12V dc, 3.2Ah, 0.1 derating 6. When connected to a panel intelligent addressable loop, text for
Battery charge current 0.4A host panel has to be programmed in to the repeater.
Standby period 24 hours + 30 min alarm 7. Zonal fire and fault indication is by means of 2 x 40 character LCD
Download comms RS232 port display.
Environmental
Operating temperature 0C to 49C Device overview
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93 %RH 1. Panel must be connected to the detection loop of a single panel.
Physical 2. Supplied with integral power supply and standby battery.
Weight 3.6kg (with batteries)
Construction PC/ABS, UL94 5VA rating
Colour Graphite
Cable entry 12 x 20mm knockouts top of back-
box
Compatibility
Standard connections Typical System Architecture

Non Power Limited Circuits Power Limited Circuits
Loop Out
Mains Input Loop In
L N E NC NC - + - +
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Loop connected repeater panel ULCF3000PRG
Eaton product datasheet ULCTPR3000
Specifiers guide
UL listed fire products 3.3 Repeater panelsUL intelligent addressable touch-screen repeater panel
ULCTPR3000 - UL intelligent
SIGNALING
addressable touch-screen 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
repeater panel
The ULCTPR3000 touch-screen repeater panel provides Features and benefits

sophisticated touch-screen functionality yet achieves
a simple end user interface operation within a compact Large versatile touch-screen user interface
panel design. Plug and play. All information is downloaded through
the network
The ULCTPR3000 is designed to work with all UL Listed
Eaton intelligent addressable control panels as a network Integrated network capability allows networking
repeater via its integral dual redundant network card. with the latest Eaton range of intelligent addressable
control panels
Like the main control panel, the repeater is designed to
Multi-language capability
have all the end user control via its touch-screen display.
As well as the ability to operate in multi-language mode PSU approved to UL864 9th Edition
providing the end user the ability to use the panel in his Up to 126 repeaters can be connected to the
own language. network
This touch-screen repeater is easy to install and Programmable as an active or passive repeater
commission. All text is transmitted via the network and Dual redundant network card to enhance system
is automatically updated, therefore no programming is integrity
required. Requires no programming (plug and play)
System integrity, fire alarm system continues to
operate even if there is a short circuit or open circuit
on cable
Easy to change the language to suit the operator
Specifiers guide
3.3 Repeater panels

D
Code ULCTPR3000
Description Touch-screen repeater panel
Standards UL864 9th edition, NFPA 70-72
H
System Indicators
LEDs Power on, alarm, general trouble,
General supervisory, power trouble,
System trouble, test, nac trouble.
Mains Input, Supervised, Power Limited W
Voltage 120V ac to 240V ac, 60Hz

Current 100mA
H W D
Network SLC 5V dc, 11mA (max)
Description (mm) (mm) mm)
Panel 375 357 95
Batteries Cutout 345 325 50
Batteries 2V dc x 12V dc, 7Ah, 0.1 derating
Battery charge current 1.0A Device overview
Standby period 24 hours + 30 min. alarm
1. Panel is connected to the network as part of a networked system.
Programmable relay
2. Supplied with integral power supply and standby battery.
Programmable relay (fire) 30V dc, 1A, resistive
3. Touch-screen end user interface.
Download comms
Download comms RS232 port
Installation
Environmental
1. Wall mounted by means of 4 fixing screws.
Operating temperature 0C to 49C
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93 %RH 2. Cable entry at top or back.
3. 11 top entry gland holes.
Physical
Dimensions (H x W x D) 375mm x 357mm x 95mm 4. Separate rear access cable entry facility.
Weight 9kg (with batteries) 4kg (w/o batteries) 5. Local mains supply required.
Ingress protection IP40 6. Must be network connected.
Construction PC/ABS, UL94 5VA rating
Colour graphite System functionality
Cable entry 11 x 20mm knockouts top of back box
1. Panel operates in either normal, supervisor or engineer mode.
Compatibility
2. Supervisor and engineer modes are accessed via 4 digit pass
Suitable for use with Eaton UL fire systems codes.
3. Supervisor mode allows full system operation.
Standard connections 4. Engineer mode enables password to be changed if required and
TLUAF cd V4+24V dc FAULT AUX FAULT AUX
2 K+24V
ROWTdc
EN +24V dc 1 KRNETWORK
OWTEN 1 cd V4+24V
2+ NETWORK2+ 2dc NETWORK 1 PROGRAMMABLE
NETWORK 2 PROGRAMMABLE
YALER IN OUT TUO IN NI OUT RELAY RELAY INPUT
5. RELAYWhenRELAY
connected to network, all text is transmitted via network,
INPUT
CN C ON E Y +X - B +A - E AY BX XB YA E - A++ B- - X++ Y- E A NOB CX NCY NOE A

C NC B EX Y E NO C NC NO C NC
changes to other
E
network panels update automatically.
TO PANEL EARTH TO
H TRPANEL
AE LENEARTH
AP OT
Network Connected
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Touch-screen repeater panel ULCTPR3000
ULCAP320, ULCAPT340,
SIGNALING
ULCAH330 - UL intelligent 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
addressable sensors
Left to right: Photoelectric smoke sensor, opto-heat sensor, heat sensor
Our UL range has multiple options for intelligent Features and benefits
addressable sensors. All sensors are designed for
optimum functionality in mid-large sized builds. They are Built-in short circuit isolators
all soft addressed and have integral short circuit isolators. Stylish low profile design
All UL addressable sensors are specifically designed 360 viewable LED design
for compatibility with the UL addressable sensor base Removable detector chamber
(UCAB300). Drift compensation
Details of the three sensors are included over the page. Plug and play, no hard addressing required
Clean me feature means sensor can be cleaned on
site using the Eaton manual cleaning procedure
The programmable heat sensor reduces the number
of parts required in the system
Specifiers guide
3.4 Accessories
Photoelectric sensor (ULCAP320) Heat sensor (ULCAH330)

Suitable for most applications. Fastest response to slow burning or Rate of rise with fixed heat sensor settings will detect a rapid increase
smouldering fires which give rise to large visible smoke particles. in temperature or temperatures above 135F, and should be used in
environments where the ambient conditions might cause false alarms
if smoke detection were to be used, for example where there is a high
Opto-heat sensor (ULCAPT340)
level of dust, fumes, steam or smoke under normal conditions.
Responds quickly to fast clean burning fires. Maintains the advantage Fixed heat sensor settings will detect temperatures above 135F
of optical sensors when detecting smouldering fires. The thermal or 194F and should be used in environments where the ambient
enhancement of this sensor allows a higher alarm threshold, providing conditions might cause false alarms if smoke detection were to be
greater rejection of false alarms. The sensor will also give an alarm at used, for example where there is a high level of dust, fumes, steam or
temperatures above 135F. smoke under normal conditions.
For opto-heat and photoelectric operation the sensor automatically

compensates for gradual increase in the scatter signal due to
contamination e.g. dust build up.
Code ULCAP320 ULCAPT340 ULCAH330
Description Addressable sensor, photoelectric Addressable sensor, opto-heat Addressable sensor, multi-mode heat
Standards UL268 UL268 UL521
Supply ratings
Working voltage 18 V dc to 30 V dc 18 V dc to 30 V dc 18 V dc to 30 V dc
Voltage waveform Filtered dc +/- 1 V (max), ripple @120Hz Filtered dc +/- 1 V (max), ripple @120Hz Filtered dc +/- 1 V (max), ripple @120Hz
Standby current 220 A (average) 220 A (average) 220 A (average)
Alarm current 5 mA (max) 5 mA (max) 5 mA (max)
Timings
Start-up time 2 seconds 2 seconds 2 seconds
Reset time 2 seconds (max) 2 seconds (max) 2 seconds (max)
Sensitivity
Sensitivity 2.55+/- 0.33%/ft 2.55+/- 0.33%/ft N/A
Sensitivity checker Use No-Climb, TRUTEST, UL Listing 77TL Use No-Climb, TRUTEST, UL Listing 77TL Use No-Climb, TRUTEST, UL Listing 77TL
Heat class
Heat element rating N/A 135F 135F ROR + Fixed, + Fixed 135F Fixed,
194F Fixed
Heat detector spacing N/A 50ft (heat alone operation) 50ft
Physical
Mounting position Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas
IP rating IP40 IP40 IP40
Environmental
Operating temperature 32F to 100F 32F to 100F 32F to 100F / 32F to 150F (194F
setting)
Compatibility
Compatibility identifier W002 W002 W002
Compatible bases WBA or UCAB300 WBA or UCAB300 WBA or UCAB300
Suitable for use with Eaton UL fire systems Eaton UL fire systems Eaton UL fire systems
Dimensions Performance
Dia Heat class ULCAP320 ULCAPT340 ULCAH330
Heat element N/A 135F ROR + Fixed
rating 135F, Fixed
135, Fixed
194F
D1 Heat detector N/A 50ft (heat alone 50ft
D2 spacing operation)
Heat class N/A A2S A2R
Catalogue numbers
Diameter
(mm) Depth (mm) Depth (mm) Description Code
Description (incl base) (excl base) (incl base) Photoelectric sensor ULCAP320
Photoelectric 104 33 45 Opto-heat sensor ULCAPT340
Opto-heat 104 43 55 Heat sensor ULCAH330
Heat 104 43 55 Addressable sensor base UCAB300
UCAB300 - UL intelligent
SIGNALING
addressable sensor base 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
The UL intelligent addressable standard base (UCAB300) Features and benefits

has been designed for flexibility, simplicity and speed of
installation. Integral sensor shorting link
Separate loop in and loop out terminals
The UCAB300 is compatible with the Eaton UL Listed
range of intelligent addressable sensors and fire Dedicated earth terminal
systems. Stand off fixing feature
The UL intelligent addressable standard base host a Accepts side entry cables
range of intuitive features and incorporates a purpose Selectable sensor locking feature
designed shorting link to ensure wiring continuity if a Quick and simple to install
sensor is removed. Common mounting base for Eaton UL intelligent
The UCAB300 is designed to provide separate addressable sensors
connection terminals for loop in and loop out cables up Positive lock indication multiple cable entry points
to 2.5mm2 together with a dedicated earth drain wire Easy to maintain/service
connection on the base.
This device also has a retaining clip to provide positive
feedback when the sensor is correctly fitted and a
retaining clip can be replaced with locking device
(supplied with base) to prevent unauthorised sensor
removal.
Specifiers guide
3.4 Accessories

Code UCAB300
Description Standard Base
Physical D
Construction PC/ABS
Colour White
Dia (mm) D (mm)
Compatibility
Dia 104 22
Suitable for use with Eaton UL Fire Systems
Installation Utilising locking tab

1. Separate terminals are provided for loop in and loop out connec- Mounting base includes an optional feature to prevent the removal of
tions. the detector without the use of a tool.
3. Base incorporates a substantial cable entry aperture in the rear of 1. Remove the positive lock indication module (1).
the base. 2. Insert the locking module that is located at the centre of the base
4. Breakouts are provided to enable the sensor base to sit neatly as shown (2).
over surface run cables and then enter via the rear entry aperture.
5. The base incorporates a stand off feature to help prevent distor-
tion when mounted on an uneven surface.
6. Fixings are suitable for standard BESA box or direct fixing to a
suitable surface.
If difficulty is experienced when mounting the detector, this may be

due to the following:
Wiring causing an obstruction - move or shorten wires. Mount the sensor onto the base and rotate fully clockwise until it finally
The base is tolerant to uneven mounting surfaces, a very uneven clicks.
surface may cause the base to deform when the mounting
screws are tightened down - loosen screws to reduce this or The sensor is now locked into position. Removeby utilising a suitable
reposition the base. tool (eg a thin screwdriver) into the hole in the sensor cover. Gently
push the tool into the sensor and rotate anticlockwise
Warning Standard connection

Do not use high voltage testers when detectors or control panel are
+
remote indicator (optional)
+V
S+ 4 4
E E
Loop start
S-
3 3
Control Panel
LED
LED
Compatible
F-
Loop finish
1 1
F+
2 2
- VE OUT
- VE IN
earth screen of cable must be continuous
WARNING:
If using the outer connection on terminal 2, ensure the operation of the switch is not impeded
and that there are no shorts between terminal 2 and the switch contact.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Intelligent addressable sensor base UCAB300
Optical smoke sensor ULCAP320
Photo-thermal sensor ULCAPT340
Heat sensor ULCAH330
UCPD-2W, UCPT-2W, UCHT-2W -

SIGNALING
UL conventional detectors 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
Eatons UL range has multiple options for conventional

detectors. All detectors have a removable detector
chamber and drift compensation. The range of detectors
for different applications allow for all build requirements
to be met.
As there is no UL certified conventional panel a
ULMIU872 micro interface is required in conjunction
with a UL intelligent addressable panel to use these
conventional detectors.
Two wire connection

360 visibility LED using lightpipe technology
Wide range of detector types
Drift compensation
Removable detector chamber
Clockwise from top
Common mounting base
left: optical smoke
detector, photo-
Positive lock indication
thermal detector, heat
detector
Discreet design for incorporation in to any decor
Optical smoke detector (UCPD-2W) Heat detectors (UCHT-2W)
The optical detector is suitable for most applications The fixed heat detectors (UCHT-2W) and (UCHTI- 2W)
giving the fastest response to slow burning or will detect temperatures above 135F and 194F. There
smouldering fires which give rise to large visible smoke are two versions of the rate of rise heat detector the
particles. (UCHR-2W) and the (UCHRI-2W) these are used to
detect rapid increases in temperature with a maximum
Photo-thermal detector (UCPT-2W) threshold of 135F and 194F. These detectors are
designed to be used in environments where the ambient
The photo-thermal detector will respond quickly to conditions might cause false alarms if smoke detection
fast clean burning fires yet maintain the advantage of were to be used, for example where there is a high
optical detectors when detecting smouldering fires. The level of dust, fumes, steam or smoke under normal
thermal enhancement of this detector allows a higher conditions.
alarm threshold which provides a greater rejection of
false alarms. The detector will also raise an alarm at
temperatures exceeding 60C.
Specifiers guide
3.4 Accessories
Code UCPD-2W UCPT-2W UCHT-2W UCHTI-2W UCHR-2W UCHRI-2W
Description Optical detector, 2 Photo-thermal Fixed heat 135F Fixed heat 194F Rate of rise & fixed Rate of rise & fixed
wire detector, 2 Wire detector, 2 wire detector, 2 wire heat 135F detector, heat 194F detector,
2 wire 2 wire
Standards UL268 UL268 UL251 UL251 UL251 UL251
Supply ratings
Working voltage 15V dc to 30V dc 15V dc to 30V dc 15V dc to 30V dc 15V dc to 30V dc 15V dc to 30V dc 15V dc to 30V dc
Voltage waveform Filtered dc +/- 1 V Filtered dc +/- 1 V Filtered dc +/- 1 V Filtered dc +/- 1 V Filtered dc +/- 1 V Filtered dc +/- 1 V
(max), ripple @120Hz (max), ripple @120Hz (max), ripple @120Hz (max), ripple @120Hz (max), ripple @120Hz (max), ripple @120Hz
Standby current 95 A (average) 95A (average) 70 A (average) 70 A (average) 70A (average) 70 A (average)
Alarm current Must be held Must be held Must be held Must be held Must be held Must be held
externally to 40mA externally to 40mA externally to 40mA externally to 40mA externally to 40mA externally to 40mA
(max) (max) (max) (max) (max) (max)
Surge current 340A (max) 340 A (max) 340 A (max) 340A (max) 340 A (max) 340 A (max)
Timings
Start-up time 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds
Reset time 2 seconds (max) 2 seconds (max) 2 seconds (max) 2 seconds (max) 2 seconds (max) 2 seconds (max)
Sensitivity
Sensitivity 2.55+/- 0.33%/ft 2.55+/- 0.33%/ft N/A N/A N/A N/A
Sensitivity checker Use No-Climb, Use No-Climb, Use No-Climb, Use No-Climb, Use No-Climb, Use No-Climb,
TRUTEST, UL Listing TRUTEST, UL Listing TRUTEST, UL Listing TRUTEST, UL Listing TRUTEST, UL Listing TRUTEST, UL Listing
77TL 77TL 77TL 77TL 77TL 77TL
Heat class
Heat element N/A 135F 135F 194F 135F 194F
rating
Heat detector N/A 50ft 50ft 50ft 50ft 50ft
spacing (heat alone operation)
Physical
Mounting position Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas
IP rating IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40
Environmental
Operating temp. 32F to 100F 32F to 100F 32F to 100F 32F to 150F 32F to 100F 32F to 150F
Mounting position Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas Ceiling in open areas
Compatibility
Compatibility W001 W001 W001 W001 W001 W001
identifier
Compatible Base CB2E CB2E CB2E CB2E CB2E CB2E
Dimensions Installation User interface

Dia
1. Detectors are fixed and 1. Red LED to indicate alarm
wired via common mounting condition.
base (CB2E). 2. Amber LED to indicate
2. Cable entry into base can be chamber fault/drift
D1
D2
rear or side. compensation limit (UCPD-
3. A locking facility is provided 2W and UCPT-2W models
which can be activated only).
if required to prevent 3. All wiring connections are
unauthorised detector via a common mounting
Diameter removal without the use of a base (supplied separately).
(mm) (incl Depth (mm) Depth (mm) special tool.
Description base) (excl base) (incl base)
4. Positive click mechanism
Optical 104 33 45 incorporated to provide clear
Photo-thermal 104 43 55 indication when detector is
Heat 104 43 55 correctly located in base.
Note: For wiring information
please see CB2E Base.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code Description Code
2 wire detector, optical UCPD-2W 2 wire detector, rate of rise and fixed heat 135f UCHR-2W
2 wire detector, opto-heat UCPT-2W 2 wire detector, rate of rise and fixed heat 194f UCHRI-2W
2 wire detector, fixed heat 135f UCHT-2W Standard detector base CB2E
2 wire detector, fixed heat 194f UCHTI-2W
CB2E - UL conventional
SIGNALING
detector base 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
The UL conventional standard base (CB2E) has been Features and benefits
have been designed for flexibility, simplicity and speed of
installation. Two wire connection
Separate zone in and zone out terminals
The CB2E has been specifically designed to operate
with the Eaton UL Listed range of intelligent addressable Stand off fixing feature
control panel interfaces. Accepts side entry cables
The CB2E is designed to provide separate connection Selectable detector locking feature
terminals for zone in and zone out cables up to 2.5mm2 Quick and simple to install
together with a dedicated earth drain wire connection on Common mounting base for Eaton conventional UL
the base. detectors
This device also has a retaining clip to provide positive Positive lock indication
feedback when the sensor is correctly fitted and a Multiple cable entry points
retaining clip can be replaced with locking device Easy to maintain/service
(supplied with base) to prevent unauthorised sensor
removal.
Specifiers guide
3.4 Accessories

Code UB2E
D
Physical
Construction PC/ABS
Colour White
Dimensions (Dia x D) 104mm x 22mm Dia (mm) D (mm)
Compatibility Dia 104 22
Suitable for use with Eaton UL Fire Systems
Installation Utilising locking tab

1. Separate terminals are provided for loop in and loop out Mounting base includes an optional feature to prevent the removal of
connections. the detector without the use of a tool.
3. Base incorporates a substantial cable entry aperture in the rear of 1. Remove the positive lock
the base. indication module (1).
4. Breakouts are provided to enable the sensor base to sit neatly 2. Insert the locking module that is
over surface run cables and then enter via the rear entry aperture. located at the centre of the base
5. The base incorporates a stand off feature to help prevent as shown (2).
distortion when mounted on an uneven surface.
6. Fixings are suitable for standard BESA box or direct fixing to a
suitable surface.
If difficulty is experienced when mounting the detector, this may be Mount the sensor onto the base and rotate fully clockwise until it finally
due to the following: clicks.
Wiring causing an obstruction - move or shorten wires. The sensor is now locked into position. Removeby utilising a suitable
The base is tolerant to uneven mounting surfaces, a very uneven tool (eg a thin screwdriver) into the hole in the sensor cover. Gently
surface may cause the base to deform when the mounting push the tool into the sensor and rotate anticlockwise
screws are tightened down - loosen screws to reduce this or
reposition the base.
Warning Standard connection

Do not use high voltage testers when detectors or control panel are
+ VE
+
end of line monitor device
+
Cooper Conventional
LED
1 LED
1
Control Panels
4 4
Compatible
EOLM-1
ZONE
2 E 2 E
- 3 3
- VE
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Standard detector base CB2E
2 wire detector, optical UCPD-2W
2 wire detector, opto-heat UCPT-2W
2 wire detector, fixed heat 135f UCHT-2W
2 wire detector, rate of rise and fixed UCHR-2W
heat 135f
2 wire detector, rate of rise and fixed UCHRI-2W
heat 194f
HNWC, HNR - UL ceiling and

SIGNALING
wall mounted horns 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
The ceiling mounted, HNWC, and wall mounted, HNR, Features and benefits
horns are designed to exceed your expectations and
offer the most polished, feature rich and cost effective Wall or ceiling mounting options
solution. 12V dc and 24V dc in one unit
Architects and engineers can now specify the industries Common mounting base
sleekest looking fire notification appliance, while being Contact cover
afforded all the features and benefits that provide the Up to 9 models in 1 unit (3 audible settings)
industrys lowest total cost of ownership.
The combination of 12V dc and 24V dc in one unit Up to 48% savings in current draw (over similar
provides the capability to use a single unit for different products)
installation requirements
5 mounting options
These units use a universal, common mounting base Voltage test points for quick troubleshooting and
making them ideal for retrofit jobs, limited space easy spot checking
environments and pre-existing wire configurations.
Contact cover provides protection from dirt, dust,
They come complete with a contact cover for protection paint and accidental damage, it also allows for pre-
against dirt, dust, paint and damage to the contacts. This wire testing and troubleshooting
contact cover also acts as a shunting device to allow pre-
wire testing for common wiring issues.
Specifiers guide
3.4 Accessories
Code HNR HNWC

Description Horn, wall mounted Horn, ceiling mounted
Standards UL Standard 1971 & UL Standard 464 UL Standard 1971 & UL Standard 464
Operation
12V dc/24V dc 90/95/99 dBA 90/95/99 dBA
Environmental
Operating temperature 0C to 49C 0C to 49C
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93 %RH 0 to 93 %R
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton UL fire systems Eaton UL fire systems
Dimensions Horn ratings per UL anechoic
Mode Regulated Voltage Range 99dB 95dB 90dB

W W D D
Dia D HNR 16V dc to 33.0V dc 0.064 0.044 0.022
HNWC 16V dc to 33.0V dc 0.084 0.044 0.022
HNR 8.0V dc to 17.5V dc 0.047 0.026 0.017
H H HNWC 8.0V dc to 17.5V dc 0.047 0.026 0.017
Standard connection
Wall mount Ceiling mount
+ + -
W D Diameter
From preceeding To next appliance or
H (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) D (mm)
appliance or end of line resistor
133 116 56 166 34 control panel (EOLR)
Horn unit details WARNING:

WARNING:
Do NOT
Do NOTuse
usehigh
highvoltage
voltagetesters if ANY
testers equipment
if ANY is connected
equipment is to the
system.
Screen (Earth) must be continuous along entire length of cable
Screen (Earth) shall
Wiring method mustbebeincontinuous along
accordance with entire
CSA length
C22.1, of cable
Canadian
Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations,
Sectionmethod
Wiring 32. shall be in accordance with CSA C22.1,
Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for
Electrical Installations, Section 32.
Allstrobe
1. 1. All strobe appliances
appliances have
have in-out
in-out wiring terminals that
wiring
accept two
terminals that #12 to two
accept #18 #12
American
to #18 Wire Gauge (AWG)
American
wires at Wire
eachGauge
screw(AWG) wiresStrip
terminal. at each
leads 3/8 inches
screw terminal.to
and connect Strip leadsterminals.
screw 3/8 inches
and connect to screw terminals.
Breakallallin-out
2. 2. Break in-out wire
wire runsruns on supervised circuits to
on supervised
ensuretointegrity
circuits of circuit
ensure integrity supervision. The polarity
of circuit
supervision.
shown in the Thewiring
polaritydiagrams
shown in theis for the operation of the
Horns, strobes and horn strobes wiring diagrams
appliances. is polarity
The for the operation of theby the control panel
is reversed
appliances. The polarity is reversed by
Eatons Multi-Candela Strobes can provide a synchronized strobe appliance when used during supervision.
in conjunction with our UL listed Fire Alarm Control Panels. The Strobe Appliances are the control panel during supervision.
UL Listed under Standard 1971 (Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired) for indoor
Fire Protection Service. They are listed for indoor use only. Eatons Horn Appliances
provide a selectable Continuous or Code 3 Horn tone when connected directly to the
FACP. They can also provide a synchronized Code 3 Horn tone when used in conjunction
with an FACP that incorporates the Wheelock patented sync protocol, Wheelock DSM
sync modules, Wheelock power supplies, or SAFEPATH family of products. The Horn
Appliances can be field set for High (HI), Medium (MED), or Low (LO) dBA sound output.
The Horn Appliances are UL Listed under Standard 464 for Audible Signal Appliances.
They are listed for indoor use only. All models are designed for use with either filtered
DC (VDC) or unfiltered Full-Wave-Rectified (VRMS) input voltage. All inputs are polarized
for compatibility with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a FACP.
The ST Strobe, HS Horn/Strobe, and the HN Horn are for 12V or 24V operation. Strobe
devices for 12V are only approved by UL to be set at 15cd, and 15-75cd, and only to be
powered by DC not FWR. Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Horn, wall mount HNR
Horn, ceiling mount HNWC
HSWC, HSR - UL ceiling and wall

SIGNALING
mounted horn strobes 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
The ceiling mounted, HSWC, and wall mounted, HSR, Features and benefits
horn strobes are designed to exceed your expectations
and offer the most polished, feature rich and cost Wall or ceiling mounting options
effective solution. 12V dc and 24V dc in one unit
Both the HSWC and the HSR are compatible with the Common mounting base
Eaton UL Listed range of intelligent addressable fire Contact cover
systems. Up to 9 models in 1 unit (3 audible and 8 candela
Architects and engineers can now specify the industries settings)
sleekest looking fire notification appliance, while being Quick and simple to install
afforded all the features and benefits that provide the Up to 48% savings in current draw (over similar
industrys lowest total cost of ownership. products)
The combination of 12V dc and 24V dc in one unit Voltage test points for quick troubleshooting and
provides the capability to use a single unit for different easy spot checking
installation requirements Contact cover provides protection from dirt, dust,
These units use a universal, common mounting base paint and accidental damage, it also allows for pre-
making them ideal for retrofit jobs, limited space wire testing and troubleshooting
environments and pre-existing wire configurations.
They come complete with a contact cover for protection
against dirt, dust, paint and damage to the contacts. This
Specifiers guide
3.4 Accessories

W W D D Dia D
Code HSR / HSWC
Description Horn strobes, wall mounted / ceiling mounted
Standards UL Standard 1971 & UL Standard 464
H H
Operation
12/24V dc 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185cd, 90/95/99dB(A)
Environmental
Wall mount Ceiling mount
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93 %RH
H (mm) W (mm) D(mm) Diameter (mm) D (mm)
Compatibility
131 131 110 166 34
Horn unit details

Standard connection
+ + -
control panel (EOLR)
WARNING:
WARNING:
Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is connected to the system.
Do NOT
Screen usemust
(Earth) highbevoltage testers
continuous if ANY
along entire equipment
length of cable is
connected
Wiring methodtoshall
thebesystem.
in accordance with CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code,
Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Section 32.
1. 1. All
All strobe
strobe appliances
appliances have in-out
in-out wiring
wiring terminals that accept
two #12 to
terminals #18
that American
accept two Wire
#12 toGauge
#18 (AWG) wires at each
Wiring methodAmerican
shallterminal.
screw be in Gauge
Wire accordance
Strip leads
(AWG) 3/8 with atCSA
inches
wires C22.1,to screw
and connect
each
Canadian Electrical Code, Strip
terminals.
screw terminal. Partleads
1, Safety Standard for
3/8 inches
Electrical 2. and
Breakconnect
Installations, to screw
Section
all in-out terminals.
32.
wire runs on supervised circuits to ensure
2. Break all of
integrity in-out wire
circuit runs on supervised
supervision. The polarity shown in the wiring
circuits to ensure integrity
diagrams is for the operation of circuit
of the appliances. The polarity is
supervision. The polarity shown
reversed by the control panel during in thesupervision.
wiring diagrams is for the operation of the
Current draw appliances.
ratings The polarity is reversed by
the control panel during supervision.
UL max current* at 99 dB(A) Horns, strobes and
Ratings per UL 1971 and Anechoic at 24V dc horn strobes
24V dc 12V dc Eatons Multi-Candela Strobes can provide
a synchronized strobe appliance when
Mode regulated used in conjunction with our UL listed
Voltage range 15 15/75 30 60 75 95 110 115 135 150 177 185 15 15/75 Fire Alarm Control Panels. The Strobe
HSR 8.0V dc to 33.0V dc 0.082 0.095 0.102 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125 0.159 Appliances are UL Listed under Standard
1971 (Signaling Devices for the Hearing
HSWC 8.0V dc to 33.0V dc 0.082 0.102 0.141 0.148 0.176 0.197 0.242 0.282 0.125
Impaired) for indoor Fire Protection
Service. They are listed for indoor use
UL max current* at 95 dB(A) only. Eatons Horn Appliances provide a
Ratings per UL 1971 and Anechoic at 24V dc selectable Continuous or Code 3 Horn tone
when connected directly to the FACP. They
24V dc 12V dc can also provide a synchronized Code 3
Horn tone when used in conjunction with
Mode regulated an FACP that incorporates the Wheelock
Voltage range 15 15/75 30 60 75 95 110 115 135 150 177 185 15 15/75 patented sync protocol, Wheelock DSM
sync modules, Wheelock power supplies,
HSR 8.0V dc to 33.0V dc 0.073 0.083 0.087 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122 0.153
or SAFEPATH family of products. The Horn
HSWC 8.0V dc to 33.0V dc 0.073 0.087 0.128 0.139 0.163 0.186 0.230 0.272 0.122 Appliances can be field set for High (HI),
Medium (MED), or Low (LO) dBA sound
UL max current* at 90 dB(A) output. The Horn Appliances are UL Listed
under Standard 464 for Audible Signal
Ratings per UL 1971 and Anechoic at 24V dc Appliances. They are listed for indoor use
only. All models are designed for use with
24V dc 12V dc either filtered DC (VDC) or unfiltered Full-
Mode regulated Wave-Rectified (VRMS) input voltage. All
Voltage range 15 15/75 30 60 75 95 110 115 135 150 177 185 15 15/75 inputs are polarized for compatibility with
standard reverse polarity supervision of
HSR 8.0V dc to 33.0V dc 0.065 0.075 0.084 0.136 0.157 0.184 0.226 0.267 0.120 0.148 circuit wiring by a FACP. The ST Strobe, HS
Horn/Strobe, and the HN Horn are for 12V
or 24V operation. Strobe devices for 12V
* UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33V dc for 24V dc units). For strobes the UL max are only approved by UL to be set at 15cd,
current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16V dc for 24V dc units). For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage and 15-75cd, and only to be powered by
(33V dc for 24V dc units). For unfiltered ratings, see installation instructions. DC not FWR.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Horn strobe, wall mount HSR
Horn strobe, ceiling mount HSWC
STWC, STR - UL ceiling and wall

SIGNALING
mounted synchronised strobes 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
The ceiling mounted, STWC and wall mounted STR horn Features and benefits
strobes are designed to exceed your expectations and
offer the most polished, feature rich and cost effective Wall or ceiling mounting options
solution. Common mounting base
Both the STWC and the STR are compatible with the Contact cover
Eaton UL Listed range of intelligent addressable fire Industrys highest strobe candela options
systems. Field selectable tone, dBA and candela settings
Architects and engineers can now specify the industries In/out wiring termination accepting two #12-18 AWG
sleekest looking fire notification appliance, while being wires at each terminal
afforded all the features and benefits that provide the Quick and simple to install
Up to 48% savings in current draw (over similar
The combination of 12V dc and 24V dc in one unit products)
provides the capability to use a single unit for different Voltage test points for quick troubleshooting and
installation requirements easy spot checking
These units use a universal, common mounting base Contact cover provides protection from dirt, dust,
making them ideal for retrofit jobs, limited space paint and accidental damage, it also allows for pre-
environments and pre-existing wire configurations. wire testing and troubleshooting
Specifiers guide
3.4 Accessories

Code STR / STWC Dia D
W W D D
Description Horn strobes, wall mounted / ceiling mounted
Standards UL Standard 1971
Operation
12/24V dc 15/1575/30/75/95/110/135/185cd H H
Environmental
Humidity (non condens- 0 to 93 %RH
ing) Wall mount Ceiling mount
Compatibility
Standard connection
+ + - Horn unit details
WARNING:
WARNING:
system.
connected to must
Screen (Earth) the system.
be continuous along entire length of cable
Wiring method shall be in accordance with CSA C22.1, Canadian
Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations,
Section 32.
Wiring method shall be in accordance with CSA C22.1,
Canadian 1. Electrical
1. All Code,
Allstrobe
strobe Part have
1, Safety
appliances
appliances have Standard
in-out
in-out wiring for
wiring terminals that
Electrical Installations,
accept two
terminals Section
that #12 to 32.
accept #18#12
two American
to #18 Wire Gauge (AWG) Horns, strobes and horn strobes
American
wires at Wire
eachGauge
screw(AWG) wires Strip
terminal. at eachleads 3/8 inches
screw terminal. to
Strip leadsterminals.
3/8 inches Eatons Multi-Candela Strobes can provide a synchronized strobe appliance when used
and connect screw in conjunction with our UL listed Fire Alarm Control Panels. The Strobe Appliances are
and connect to screw terminals. UL Listed under Standard 1971 (Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired) for indoor
2. Breakallall
2. Break in-out
in-out wirewire
runsruns on supervised circuits to
on supervised Fire Protection Service. They are listed for indoor use only. Eatons Horn Appliances
ensuretointegrity
circuits of circuit
of circuit provide a selectable Continuous or Code 3 Horn tone when connected directly to the
supervision.
polaritydiagrams
shown in theis for the operation of the FACP. They can also provide a synchronized Code 3 Horn tone when used in conjunction
wiring diagrams is for the operation of theby the control panel with an FACP that incorporates the Wheelock patented sync protocol, Wheelock DSM
appliances. The polarity is reversed sync modules, Wheelock power supplies, or SAFEPATH family of products. The Horn
during supervision. Appliances can be field set for High (HI), Medium (MED), or Low (LO) dBA sound output.
the control panel during supervision. The Horn Appliances are UL Listed under Standard 464 for Audible Signal Appliances.
powered by DC not FWR.
Current draw ratings

UL max current*
Ratings per UL
1971
and Anechoic at
24V dc 24V dc 12V dc
Mode regulated
Voltage range 15 15/75 30 60 75 95 110 115 135 150 177 185 15 15/75
STR 8.0V dc to 33.0V dc 0.057 0.070 0.085 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110 0.140
STWC 8.0V dc to 33.0V dc 0.061 0.085 0.103 0.135 0.163 0.182 0.205 0.253 0.110
* UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33V dc for 24V dc units). For strobes the UL max
current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16V dc for 24V dc units). For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage
(33V dc for 24V dc units). For unfiltered ratings, see installation instructions.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Synchronised strobe, wall mount STR
Synchronised strobe, ceiling mount STWC
RSSWP range -
SIGNALING
UL ceiling and wall mounted 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
outdoor synchronised strobe
RSSWP-2475C-FW - ceiling mounted RSSWP-2475W-FR - wall mounted
The ceiling mounted, RSSWP-2475C-FW, and wall Features and benefits

mounted, RSSWP-2475W-FR, external strobes are
designed to exceed your expectations and offer the most Wall or ceiling mounting options
polished, feature rich and cost effective solution. Common mounting base
Both the RSSWP-2475C-FW and the RSSWP-2475W- Contact cover
FR are compatible with the Eaton UL Listed range of Industrys highest strobe candela options
intelligent addressable fire systems. Field selectable tone, dBA and candela settings
Architects and engineers can now specify the industries In/out wiring termination accepting two #12-18 AWG
sleekest looking fire notification appliance, while being wires at each terminal
afforded all the features and benefits that provide the Quick and simple to install
Up to 48% savings in current draw (over similar
The combination of 12V dc and 24V dc in one unit products)
provides the capability to use a single unit for different Voltage test points for quick troubleshooting and
installation requirements. easy spot checking
These units use a universal, common mounting base Contact cover provides protection from dirt, dust,
making them ideal for retrofit jobs, limited space paint and accidental damage, it also allows for pre-
environments and pre-existing wire configurations. wire testing and troubleshooting
Specifiers guide
3.4 Accessories
Code RSSWP-2475W-FR RSSWP-2475C-FW
Description External strobes, wall mounted External strobes, ceiling mounted
Standards UL1638 & UL1971 UL1638 & UL1971
Operation
Regulated voltage 24V dc 24V dc
Synchronisation strobe 75 cd Synchronisation strobe 75 cd
Environmental
Operating temperature -40C to 60C -40C to 60C
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 95 %RH 0 to 95 %RH
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton UL fire systems Eaton UL fire systems
Standard connection Dimensions

++ + - - W D

H
WARNING:
WARNING:
system.
Screen (Earth) must be continuous along entire length of cable W
Wiring Description H (mm) (mm)
Screenmethod
(Earth) shall
mustbebe
in continuous
accordance with
alongCSA C22.1,
entire Canadian
length of cable
Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Wall mount 131 131 110
Section 32.
Wiring method shall be in accordance with CSA C22.1,
Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Strobe unit details
Electrical Installations, Section 32.
1. 1. All
Allstrobe
strobeappliances
appliances have
have in-out
in-out wiring terminals that
wiring
accept two
terminals that #12 to #18
accept American
two #12 to #18 Wire Gauge (AWG)
American
wires at Wire
eachGauge
screw(AWG) wiresStrip
terminal. at each
leads 3/8 inches
screw terminal.to
and connect Strip leadsterminals.
screw 3/8 inches
and connect to screw terminals.
2. 2. Break
Breakallallin-out
in-out wire
wire runsruns on supervised circuits to
on supervised
ensuretointegrity
circuits of circuit
of circuit
supervision.
polaritydiagrams
shown in theis for the operation of the
wiring diagrams
appliances. Theis polarity
for the operation
is reversedof theby the control panel
during supervision.
the control panel during supervision.
Horns, strobes and horn strobes

Eatons Multi-Candela Strobes can provide a synchronized strobe appliance when used
in conjunction with our UL listed Fire Alarm Control Panels. The Strobe Appliances are
UL Listed under Standard 1971 (Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired) for indoor
Fire Protection Service. They are listed for indoor use only. Eatons Horn Appliances
provide a selectable Continuous or Code 3 Horn tone when connected directly to the
FACP. They can also provide a synchronized Code 3 Horn tone when used in conjunction
with an FACP that incorporates the Wheelock patented sync protocol, Wheelock DSM
sync modules, Wheelock power supplies, or SAFEPATH family of products. The Horn
Appliances can be field set for High (HI), Medium (MED), or Low (LO) dBA sound output.
The Horn Appliances are UL Listed under Standard 464 for Audible Signal Appliances.
powered by DC not FWR.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Wall mount outdoor synchronised strobe RSSWP-2475W-FR
Ceiling mount outdoor synchronised strobe RSSWP-2475C-FW
Exposed conduit, surface mount back box WPSBB
(RED)
Concealed conduit surface mount back box WPSBB + WPKIT
(RED)
UMPS range -
SIGNALING
UL listed pull stations 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
The UL pull stations, UMPS-100 and UMPS-200, are Features and benefits
designed to exceed your expectations and offer the most
polished, feature rich and cost effective solution. Single/dual action options
Complete with Initiating module (addressable
Both the UMPS-100 and UMPS-200 are compatible
variants only)
with the Eaton UL range of intelligent addressable fire
systems, and come complete with a ULMCIM-C fast Key reset
response intelligent addressable input initiating unit. Corrosion resistant gold plated SPST contacts
This UL pull station is constructed of high quality, die- High-gloss red enamel finish with raised white
cast metal for long lasting performance and is designed lettering
to be fitted to a single gang back-box for flush mounting. Class A, style 7 SLC
For surface mounting a sheet metal back box (SGB32S) Quick and simple to install
can be utilised.
High quality die cast metal case for lasting
The UMPS-100 and UMPS-200 are painted red with performance
raised white lettering, have a locking mechanism to No hard addressing required with initiating unit
prevent unauthorized reset and are complete with a (ULMCIM-C - plug and play)
UL listed fast response intelligent addressable input
initiating module (ULMCIM-C).
Specifiers guide
3.4 Accessories
Code UMPS-100/UMPS-200 D
Description Pull station

Approvals Ul listed
Physical
Construction Die-cast metal
Colour Red
H
Compatibility
H (mm) W (mm) D(mm)
118 80 80
W
Surface mount Intelligent addressable connection

A surface mount installation uses a die-cast (model SGB-32C) or
sheet metal (model SGB32S) back box. The back box has 4 predrilled Internal
mounting holes of 0.187 diameter. A size 8 screw can be used to Wiring
attach the back box to the wall surface. After the back box is in place,
attach the conduit. The cast back box has an opening that is tapped
for a NPT fitting which may be oriented at the top or bottom when
the box is attached to the wall. The sheet metal back box has top and
bottom conduit knockouts. Field wiring is connected as shown in the
supplied wiring diagram. Please note that field wiring should not be
wrapped around the terminal screws but connected to the clamping
connections on the ULMCIM-C interface.
The front housing of the pull station is locked using either a key or a
hex lock depending on the model purchased. Unlock the front housing
and swing it forward to expose the metal mounting plate. Install the
mounting plate to the back box using the screws (4) supplied. If a
Loop In
Loop Out
break rod is being used, move the pull handle to a 45 degree angle and
insert the break rod into the cavity beneath the pull handle. Place the
pull handle back in the normal standby position (flush with the surface Addressable
of the front housing). Loop
Power
Verify that the switch actuator is in the proper standby position before Limited
moving the front housing back to the upright position and locking it.
Flush mount
Operation
Most flush mount installations may be attached to a standard single
The UMPS-100/UMPS-200 are operated by pulling the white handle on
gang box (not supplied).
the front of the pull station as far down as it will go, at which point the
Open the station as described above and mount it to the box using the handle locks into place and is easily visible from up to 50 feet.
two holes located along the centre line of the mounting plate.
The handle is reset by opening the pull station with a key, placing the
white handle in the normal upright position and relocking the station.
Conventional single action pull station
The cost effective conventional versions of the pull station must
be used in conjunction with ULMIU872 micro zone monitor unit or
ULCZMU352 zone monitor unit.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Single action pull station (addressable) UMPS-100
Weatherpoof single action pull station UMPS-100WP
Double action pull station UMPS-200
Micro zone monitor unit ULMIU872
Micro single channel input unit (recognised as callpoint) ULMCIM-C
Conventional single action pull station (back box ordered SG42BK2
seperately)
Conventional double action pull station (back box ordered SG42BK1
seperately)
Back box for conventional, surface mounting SGB32S
Back box for conventional, weatherproof SGB-32C
ULCSC354 -
SIGNALING
UL 4 way sounder controller unit 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT
An extensive range of interfaces are available to Features and benefits

support the Eaton range of UL intelligent addressable
control panels, providing solutions for most design Quick and simple to install
requirements. 4 separate sounder circuits (0.4A) per circuit (1.6A)
total
The UL listed 4 way sounder controller unit (ULCSC354)
is a loop connected interface, which provides the facility Outputs independently programmable
to power and control 4 independent conventional 24 hour integral battery backup
sounder circuits located in a remote area from the Integral short circuit isolator
intelligent addressable control panel.
This greatly simplifies system design and reduces Avoids the need to wire conventional sounders back
installation costs where specialist horns and strobes are to the main panel
required by avoiding the need to connect them directly
Increased system integrity. Self powered
to the intelligent addressable control panel.
independently of SLC
The unit only uses a single address yet each circuit can No external short circuit isolator required
be independently controlled according to the required
Horns and strobes can be wired direct to the
cause and effect programming.
interface thereby saving time and cabling cost
Specifiers guide
Technical specification Notes:

No hard addressing of the interface is required. (See control panel
Code ULCSC354
Description 4 way sounder controller unit
This unit requires a permanent 120/230V ac supply.
Signalling line circuit (Style 7, Class A, Supervised, Power Limited) Dimensions
SLC current 0.417mA to 5.4mA D
Voltage 24V dc
Line impedance 50
Sounder 1, 2, 3, 4 (Style Y, Class B, Supervised, Power Limited)
Voltage 24V dc
Sounder load per channel 0.4A (max) H
Sounder load total 1.6A (max)
End of line resistor 6.8k
Mains supply
Voltage 120V ac to 240V ac
Current 0.1A
Frequency 60Hz
W
Environmental
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93 %RH H (mm) W (mm) D(mm)
Physical 300 300 74

Weight 5.4kg Standard connections
Ingress protection IP40 6k8 6k8 6k8 6k8
Battery backup 2 x 12V, 4Ah, 0.1 derating factor ROUTE

AWAY
SUPERVISED POWER LIMITED
ROUTE
FROM EACH
Standby 24 Hours + 30mins alarm
AWAY ADDRESSABLE
OTHER
FROM EACH LOOP
OTHER
Charge current 1A (max) 230V AC MAINS

SUPERVISED
NON POWER LIMITED
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton UL fire systems L N E + - + - + - + - - + - +
230V AC
MAINS 1 2 3 4 OUT IN
SOUNDER CIRCUIT
Installation BATTERY
+
+
BACK UP
1. Remove the cover of the unit.

NON SUPERVISED BATT BATTERY
NON POWER LIMITED
-
-
2. Fit the back plate in position and pass the wires into it taking care
not to damage the circuit board. Note:
3. Connect the unit according to the standard connection diagram 1. The end of line resistors must always be fitted, even if the
supplied with the unit. sounder circuits are unused. Installer / service engineer must
ensure they are fitted.
2. The ANSI pattern tone is generated by the horns themselves.
Operation
Normal standby / alarm / fault
Sounder circuit
Field wiring SLC single channel
Description Circuit (input) (output)
Wiring gauge 12 Max AWG 12 Max AWG
Wiring class Class A Style 7 Class B Style Y
Ground fault imped- 0.1 0.1
ance
Supervised, power Yes Yes, regulated
limited
Line impedance 50 16
Audible synchronised N/A N/A
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
4 way sounder controller unit ULCSC354
ULCZMU352 -
SIGNALING
UL zone monitor unit 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT

control panels, providing solutions for most design Monitors a zone of UL approved compatible
requirements. conventional detectors
Monitors a zone of UL approved compatible pull
The UL zone monitor unit (ULCZMU352) permits
stations
the connect of a zone of the Eaton UL conventional
detectors and pull stations (if required) to the Eaton Only takes a single address
intelligent addressable system. Input monitored for open, short circuits and ground
trouble
Housed in a IP65 rated box the ULCZMU352 provides
a cost effective means of utilizing the wiring of a pre Integral short circuit isolator
existing conventional zone, enabling system designer Quick and simple to install
to provide fire detection in a pre existing area without No hard addressing required (plug and play)
affecting the building aesthetics.
Specifiers guide
Code ULCZMU352 D
Description Zone monitor unit
Signalling line circuit (Style 7, Class A, Supervised, Power Limited)
Load current (min/max) 2.8mA to 8.0mA H
Supply voltage 24V dc
Detector zone (Style C, Class B, Supervised, Power Limited)
Voltage 21V dc to 26V dc, 22.9V dc (nom)
Current (alarm) 17mA to 40mA W
Line impedance 2.5 (max)
End of line resistance 5K1
Fire input trigger 680
H (mm) W (mm) D(mm)
Compatible detectors UPCD-2W, UCPT-2W, UCHRI-2W, 129 180 60
UCHT-2W, UCHR-2W, UCHTI-2W
Compatibility identifier ULCV1
Pull station zone (Style C, Class B, Supervised, Power Limited)
680 Ohms 5K1
Voltage 8.4Vpp (pulsed every 1 sec)
6K8
Current 1.2mA
Trigger resistor 680
- OUT +
End of line resistor 6.8k - IN +
Maximum 20
Conventional
Line impedance 16 Detectors
Addressable Loop
- OUT +
Environmental - IN +
Operating temperature 32f to 120f
- + - + - + - +
Physical
Weight 0.28kg OUT
LOOP
IN CALL
POINT
DETECTOR
ZONE
Ingress protection IP65 ZONE
Compatibility
Note:
This unit can only be used with the Eaton UL detector base (CB2E) and
compatible Eaton UL detectors.
Installation The end of line resistor must always be fitted, even if the spur is
unused. Installer / service engineer must ensure it is fitted.
Separate the two halves of the unit and remove the PCB.
Detector zone end of line device is 5k1 (supplied).
Drill out (or knock out) the required cable entries in the surface
mounting back-box. Pull station zone end of line device is 6k8 (supplied).
Fit the back-box in position and pass the wires into it. Refit the PCB. Compatibility identifier ULCV1.
Connect the unit according to the standard connection diagram
supplied with the unit.
Operation
Pull station zone:
Normal standby / alarm / nac silenced / alarm / reset / fault /
supervisory / drill
Detector zone:
Normal standby / alarm / fault
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Zone monitor unit ULCZMU352
2 wire detector, optical UCPD-2W
2 wire detector, opto-heat UCPT-2W
2 wire detector, fixed heat 135f UCHT-2W
2 wire detector, rate of rise and fixed heat 135f UCHR-2W
2 wire detector, rate of rise and fixed heat 194f UCHRI-2W
Standard detector base CB2E
ULCSUM355 -
SIGNALING
UL shop monitor unit 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT

control panels, providing solutions for most design Soft addressed
requirements. Integral short circuit isolator
The UL shop monitor unit (ULCSUM355) is designed to Single address
enable small units with conventional fire detection to be Accepts a zone of UL approved conventional
fully integrated with a main intelligent addressable fire detectors and pull stations
system. Provides 2 conventional sounder circuits
This unit is ideal for applications such as connecting Includes a set of output changeover contacts (fire
individual shop units into a main shopping centre relay)
system. Inputs monitored for open, short circuits and ground
The UL shop monitor unit provides a zone of detection trouble
with up to 20 Eaton UL conventional detector/bases Quick and simple to install
supported. It also supports a zone of pull stations as well No hard addressing required (Plug and play)
as 2 conventional sounder circuits.
An external power supply is required to drive the 2 Reduced installation cost by using the 2 sounder
conventional sounder circuits. This power supply must be circuits
UL1481 listed, regulated for fire and current limited.
Specifiers guide
Dimensions Technical specification

D
Code ULCSUM355
Description Shop monitor unit
H Voltage 24V dc
Current 4.9mA to 5.0mA
H W D Detector zone (Style C, Class B, Supervised, Power Limited )

(mm) (mm) (mm) Voltage 21V dc to 26V dc, 22.9 V dc (nom)
W 129 180 60 Current (alarm) 17mA to 40mA
Line impedance 2.5 (max)
Installation End of line resistor 5.6k
Fire input trigger 680
1. Separate the two halves of the unit and remove the PCB. UPCD-2W, UCPT-2W, UCHRI-2W,
2. Drill out (or knock out) the required cable entries in the surface UCHT-2W, UCHR-2W, UCHTI-2W
mounting back-box. Compatibility identifier ULCV1
3. Fit the back-box in position and pass the wires into it. Refit the Sounder 1, sounder 2 (Style Y, Class B, Supervised, Power Limited)
PCB. Voltage 24V dc
4. Connect the unit according to the standard connection diagram Current 1A (max)
supplied with the unit. Line impedance 8
End of line resistance 12k
Operation
Pull station zone (Style C, Class B, Supervised, Power Limited)
Pull station zone: Voltage (8.4 Vpp pulsed every 1 8.4V
Normal standby / alarm / nac silenced / alarm reset / fault / supervisory sec)
/ drill Current 1.2mA
Detector zone: Line impedance 16
Normal standby / alarm / fault. End of line resistor 6.8k

Trigger resistor 680
Standard connections 24 V external PSU (Supervised, Power Limited)

Voltage 24V dc
5K6
Current 2A (max)
UL1481 LISTED FOR FIRE
24V DC OUTPUT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Fault
Contact 24V End of line resistor 12k
6K8 12K 12K N/O O/P
Maximum 20
Conventional
Line impedance 4
- OUT + Detectors
- IN +
12K - +
Gauge wire 12 AWG
Addressable Loop - OUT +
UL 1481 listed regulated for fire,
- IN + current limited
Environmental
- + - + - + - + NC + - + - - +
OUT IN CALL DETECTOR FIRE + - + -

EXTERNAL 24V
POINT ZONE RELAY
LOOP PSU EXTERNAL
Physical
ZONE 1 2
MONITOR PSU
INPUT
SOUNDER

Note:
Weight 0.28kg
1. The end of line resistor must always be fitted, even if the inputs are unused.
2. Recommended cable type FPLP (plenum cable), type FPLR (riser cable), or
type FPL. Compatibility
SLC Sound-
field Pull De- er 1 24 V dc PSU
wiring station tector Sound- external external
Description (Input) zone zone er 2 supply monitor
Wiring 12 12 12 12 12 12
Gauge Max Max Max Max AWG Max AWG Max AWG
AWG AWG AWG
Wiring Class A Class B Class B Class B N/A N/A
Style 7 Style 7 Style C Style C Style Y
Ground fault 0.1 ohm 0.1 ohm 0.1 ohm 0.1 ohm TBD Power TBD Power
impedance Supply Supply
Supervised, Yes Yes Yes Regulated Supervised Supplemen-
Power limited supervised power tary
Power limited
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Shop monitor unit ULCSUM355
ULCSI350 -
SIGNALING
UL spur isolator unit 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT

control panels, providing solutions for most design Allows a spur of intelligent addressable devices to
requirements. be connected to the main loop
Integral short circuit isolators for the loop and the
The UL spur isolator unit (ULCSI350) enables a spur
spur
of Eatons UL intelligent addressable devices to be
connected to a main intelligent addressable loop, the Quick and simple to install
device is designed to simplify installation of remote parts No hard addressing required (Plug and play)
of buildings or for simple system extensions. Easy to expand a system using existing wiring
The unit permits up to 32 Eaton UL intelligent Reduced installation cost
addressable devices to be installed as a spur off
the main loop whilst maintaining the loop addressing
sequence.
It should be ensured at the system design stage that the
number of devices on the addressable spur and area of
coverage meet the requirement UFPA72 and EN54.
Specifiers guide
Dimensions Technical specification

D
Code ULCSI350
Description Spur isolator unit
Voltage 24V dc
H
Spur output (Style 4, Class B, Supervised, Power Limited)
Voltage 24V dc
Current 2mA to 500mA
W
Environmental
H (mm) W (mm) D(mm) Operating temperature 0C to 49C
129 180 60 Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93 %RH
Physical
Installation Dimensions (H x W x D) 129mm x 180mm x 60mm
1. Separate the two halves of the unit and remove the PCB. Weight 0.28kg
2. Drill out (or knock out) the required cable entries in the surface Ingress protection IP65
mounting back-box. Compatibility
3. Fit the back-box in position and pass the wires into it. Refit the Suitable for use with Eaton UL fire systems
PCB.
Notes:
4. Connect the unit according to the standard connection diagram No addressing of the interface is required (see control panel operation for details).
supplied with the unit. A spur isolator unit must be used when making spurs from the intelligent addressable panel
loop. Without this unit, the self addressing features of the system will not function correctly.
No End of
Line resistor
Required
Detectors
(see Notes)
Addressable Spur
All connections are
Power Limited
- +
OUT IN
- + - +
Note:
This unit can only be used with the Eaton
To Loop Finish From Loop Start
UL detector base UCAB300 and compatible
Eaton UL intelligent addressable detectors.
Addressable Loop
Field wiring SLC Single channel

Description circuit (input) (input)
Wiring class Class A Style 7 Class B Style 4
Ground fault impedance 0.1 0.1
Supervised, power limited Yes Yes
Max line impedance 50 50
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Spur isolator unit ULCSI350
ULCIO351 -
SIGNALING
UL 3 channel I/O unit 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT

The UL 3 channel I/O unit (ULCIO351) enables simple 3 separate inputs and 3 separate outputs
interfacing between the fire system and other equipment Inputs monitored for open and short circuits
such as nurse call systems or access control systems. Quick and simple to install
The inputs are fully monitored for open, short circuits No hard addressing required (Plug and play)
and ground trouble. Unit takes 3 inputs and 3 outputs
Only 1 address required to monitor and control
saving on equipment and installation
Specifiers guide

D
Code ULCIO351
Description 3 channel I/O unit
Operating voltage 24V dc H
Line impedance 50
Inputs 1, 2, 3 contact only initiating circuit
(Style C, Class B, Supervised, Power Limited)
Voltage 8.4Vpp (pulsed every 1 sec) W
Current 1mA (max)
Line impedance 16 (max) H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Trigger resistance 5.6k 129 180 60
Output 1, 2, 3 (3 contact set programmable) Standard connections
Voltage 24V dc to 30V dc Power Limited Circuits
Current 1A (max, resistive PF1)

Connect Only To A Power Limited Source
Switching power 33k (min)
5k6
5k6
5k6
Power factor 1
Environmental
Operating temperature 0C to 49C 22k 22k 22k

ADDRESSABLE LOOP
Physical
Non Power Limited Circuits
Weight 0.28kg
OUTPUTS
- + - + - + - + - + N/O C N/C N/O C N/C N/O C N/C

Compatibility IN
LOOP
OUT
1
INPUTS
2 3
Notes: Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3
No addressing of the interface is required (see control panel operation for details). Note:
1. The end of line resistors must always be fitted, even if the inputs are unused. Installer /
service engineer must ensure it is fitted.
2. Monitored inputs can detect open circuit, short circuit or ground faults.
3. Output relays are volt-free contacts and are not monitored, but most be connected to
Installation power limited source.
1. Separate the two halves of the unit and remove the PCB.
2. Drill out (or knock out) the required cable entries in the surface SLC field wir-
mounting back-box. Description ing (Input) Input 1, 2, 3 Output 1, 2, 3
Wiring gauge 12 Max AWG 12 Max AWG 12 Max AWG
3. Fit the back-box in position and pass the wires into it. Refit PCB.
Wiring class Class A Style 7 Class B Style C N/A
4. Connect the unit according to the standard connection diagram
Ground fault 0.1 0.1 0.1
supplied with the unit. impedance
Supervised, Yes Yes Programmable
power limited
Operation
Input 1, 2, 3 operation:
Normal standby (default) / alarm / nac silenced / alarm reset / trouble /
supervisory / drill
(Features programmable using pc site installer).
Output 1, 2, 3 operations:
Normal standby / alarm
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
3 channel I/O unit ULCIO351
ULCMIO353 -
SIGNALING
UL 230V ac relay unit 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT

The UL 120V ac / 230V ac relay unit (ULCMIO353) Single address
enables simple interfacing between the fire system and Mains rated relay unit
other equipment such as nurse call systems or access Input monitored for open and short circuits
control systems.
The ULCMIO353 is supplied with a set of change over No hard addressing required (plug and play)
contacts rated at 1A (resistive) and with the ability of the
The unit includes 1 input and 1 output
output unit to switch mains also makes the unit ideal for
plant control or mains powered door holders.
Specifiers guide

D
Code ULCMIO353
Description 120V ac / 230V ac Relay Unit
Voltage 24V dc H
Current 335A to 395A
Line impedance 50
Output 1 (programmable)
Voltage 120V ac to 230V ac
Contact rating 1A resistive W
Power factor 1
H (mm) W (mm) D(mm)
Environmental
129 180 60
Physical
POWER
Weight 0.28kg LIMITED VOLT-FREE OUTPUT
230V RATED
CIRCUITS
Ingress protection IP65 NON
ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE LOOP POWER
Compatibility LIMITED
CIRCUITS
Notes:
No addressing of the interface is required (see control panel operation for details). - + - + - +
C N/C N/O
Installation
IN OUT NC
1. Separate the two halves of the unit and remove the PCB.
2. Drill out (or knock out) the required cable entries in the surface
mounting back-box.
3. Fit the back-box in position and pass the wires into it. Refit the
PCB. Description SLC field wiring (input) Output 2
4. Connect the unit according to the standard connection diagram
Wiring class Class A Style 7 N/A
supplied with the unit.
5. This unit is suitable for one conduit connection. Only the mains is
Supervised, power Yes Programmable
allowed this conduit connection. The hub most be connected to
limited
the conduit before the hub is connected to the enclosure.
Operation
Output 1 operation:
Warning!
Segregate mains cable from other connections to this
unit.
120V ac / 230V ac relay output is un-fused. Ensure that
the 120V ac / 230V ac supply being switched by this unit
is adequately protected.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
230V ac relay unit ULCMIO353
SIGNALING
ULMCOM - UL micro single 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
channel output unit

EQUIPMENT

The UL single channel output unit (ULMCOM) is an Single address
extremely compact unit ideal for incorporation in to Non latching changeover relay contacts
external equipment and suitable for switching low Suitable for switching low volts control gear
voltages (24V dc at 1A maximum).
Optional variant: ULMCOM-S
This unit incorporates a set of non latching relay contacts Quick and simple to install
and is suitable for switching HVAC control circuits, plant
shutdown control circuits, fire door closure etc.
Compact size
The ULMCOM is identified by the panel as an input /
output unit, with a maximum of 20 units permitted per
loop. Optional variant
The ULMCOM-S is identified by the panel as a sounder,

does not reset on silence but resets on panel reset. The
maximum number of ULMCOM-S units per loop is 60,
and is counted towards the total number of sounders on
the loop.
Specifiers guide

Code ULMCOM and ULMCOM-S
Description Single channel output units
D
Current 0.322mA (max)
Output relay (supervisory programmable)
W H
Switching voltage 24V dc to 30V dc
Contact rating 1A Resistive, pf=1 (max)
Max line impedance 16 H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Power factor 1 65 35 18.5
Environmental
Operating temperature 0C to 49C Standard connections
Physical
Loop In
Weight 0.05kg
Relay Contacts Must Loop Out Relay Contacts Must
Compatibility Be Connected to a Addressable Be Connected to a
Power Limited Source Loop Power Limited Source
Notes:
No addressing of the interface is required (see control panel operation for details).
Loop In Loop In
Mounting details (back box)
Relay Contacts Must Loop Out Relay Contacts Must Loop Out
Be Connected to a Addressable Be Connected to a Addressable
Power Limited Source Loop Power Limited Source Loop
Notes:
1. Output relay are volt-free contacts and are not monitored.
FR4 PCB Interface Plate 2. Recommended cable type FPLP (plenum cable), type FPLR (riser cable), or type FPL.
Secured to box with
2 self tapping screws.
SLC field wiring Single channel

Description (input) output
60mm Wiring gauge 12 Max AWG 12 Max AWG
Wiring class Class A, Style 7 -
180mm Ground fault imped- 0.1 -
ance
130mm
Supervised, power Yes Yes

limited
Installation
1. Fit the unit in position in accordance to the mounting details.
2. Connect the unit according to standard connections.
3. Up to 3 units can be fitted inside a micro module box unit.
Operation
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Micro single channel output unit (recognised as output ULMCOM
unit)
Micro single channel output unit (recognised as sounder) ULMCOM-S
Micro module box unit (empty box) ULBU
SIGNALING
ULMCIM - UL micro single 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
channel input unit

EQUIPMENT

The UL micro single channel input unit (ULMCIM) Single address
is a single input, soft addressed micro interface, Suitable for monitoring:
incorporating integral short circuit isolators. It is flow switches / non fire inputs / auxillary panels
extremely compact and therefore ideal for incorporation Optional variant: ULMCIM-C
into other equipment.
It is designed for applications requiring the monitoring No hard addressing required (plug and play)
of a set of normally open, volt free contacts such as
Compact size
sprinkler system flow switches, auxiliary panel fire/fault
signals as well as non fire input signals such as flow Optional variant
valve open contacts, generator start up, fire door closed
etc. The ULMCIM-C is designed for use with Eatons pull
stations and is identified by the panel as a pull station.
Therefore, up to 200 can be connected to the loop
(ULMCIM maximum is 20 per loop).
Specifiers guide

Code ULMCIM / ULMCIM-C
Description Single channel input units
D
Current 332A
W H
Input (Initiating Circuit Class B, Style C, Supervised, Power Limited)
Voltage 8.4Vpp (pulsed every 1 sec)
Current 1 .2mA H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Trigger resistance 5.6k 65 35 18.5
Line impendance 1 6 (max)
Environmental Standard connections
5K6 5K6
Physical
Dimensions (H x W x D) 65mm x 35mm x 18.5mm Loop In
22K
22K
Weight 0.05kg
Ingress protection IP40 Loop Out
Addressable
Compatibility Loop
Notes:
5K6 of the interface is required (see control panel operation for details).
No addressing 5K6
ULMCIM-C needs to be programmed as a pull station on site installer software.

Loop In Loop In
22K
22K
Loop Out Loop Ou t

Mounting details (back box) Addressable Addressable
Loop Loop
Notes:
1. The end of line resistor provided must always be fitted, even if the input is unused.
2. Monitored inputs can detect open or short circuit faults.
3. Recommended loop cable type: FIRETUF, FP200, MICC.
FR4 PCB Interface Plate

Secured to box with
2 self tapping screws. SLC field wiring Single channel
Description (input) input
Wiring class Class A, Style 7 Class B, Style C
60mm
Ground fault 0.1 0.1
impedance
180mm
130mm Supervised, power Yes Yes
limited
Installation
Operation
Normal Standby / Alarm / NAC Silence / Alarm Reset / Trouble /
Supervisory / Drill
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Micro single channel input unit (recognised as input unit) ULMCIM
Micro single channel input unit (recognised as pull station) ULMCIM-C
ULMIU872 -
SIGNALING
UL micro zone monitor unit 4AC5

FIRE ALARM
EQUIPMENT

The UL zone monitor unit (ULMIU872) is an extremely Single address
compact unit ideal for incorporation in external Accepts a zone of Eaton UL conventional detectors
equipment, it is a single zone input unit, soft addressed Input monitored for open and short ground trouble
and incorporates integral short circuit isolators.
It is suitable for interfacing a zone of up to 20 Eaton No hard addressing required (plug and play)
UL conventional detectors onto a Eaton UL intelligent
Compact size
It will operate with any Eaton UL conventional detector
in configuration with the UL conventional base (CB2E).
Specifiers guide
Code ULMIU872
Description Micro zone monitor unit
D
Voltage 24V dc W H
Current 4.9mA-5.0mA
Line impedance 50
Detector zone class B Style C Supervised, Power Limited
Voltage 21-26V dc
Contact 17-40 mA 65 35 18.5
Line Impedance 2.5

End of line resistor 5.6K
Fire input trigger 680K
Maximum 20
Environmental Conventional
Operating temperature 0C to 49C Detectors
5k6
5K6
Physical
Loop In
22k
Dimensions (W x H x D) 65mm x 35mm x 18.5mm
Weight 0.05kg Loop Out
Ingress protection IP40 MCIM Addressable
Loop
Compatibility
Notes:
Notes: 1. This unit can only be used with Eaton UL conventional detector base and compatible
No addressing of the interface is required (see control panel operation for details). detectors.
2. Only connect cable screen to its adjacent earth terminal.
3. The end of line resistor must always be fitted, even if the spur is unused. Installer /
service engineer must ensure it is fitted.
Mounting details (back box) 4. Maximum number of conventional call points allowed is unlimited.
5. Detector zone end of line device is 5k6 (supplied).
6. Compatibility Identifier ULCV1.
SLC field wiring

Description (input) Detector zone
FR4 PCB Interface Plate
Secured to box with
2 self tapping screws.
Wiring class Class A, Style 7 Class B, Style 7
Supervised, power Yes Yes
60mm
limited
180mm
130mm
Installation
Operation
Normal standby / alarm / alarm test /alarm
Silence / alarm reset / trouble /trouble silence
/ Off normal position of switches
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Micro zone monitor unit ULMIU872
4. Conventional fire systems
Specifiers guide
Conventional fire systems
Simple solutions for

smaller applications
4.0 Conventional systems
Conventional callpoint 4.0 Conventional 4.0

Introduction............................................................................................................................... 4.1
Control panels and repeater panels .......................................................................................... 4.2
Accessories............................................................................................................................... 4.3
Ancillaries.................................................................................................................................. 4.4
Specifiers guide
4.1 Introduction
An introduction to
Conventional fire systems...
The philosophy of a conventional system revolves around Normally however there will be less sounder circuits
dividing the building into a number of areas called zones. than detection zone circuits so it will be necessary for a
The detectors and call points within each zone are then sounder circuit to provide cover for more than one zone.
wired on a dedicated separate circuit.
This increases installation complexity by forcing the
In the event of a detector or call point being triggered, sounder wiring to follow different routes to that of the
the panel is able to identify which circuit contains the detector wiring.
triggered device and thereby indicate which zone the fire
When designing a conventional system it is important
alarm has come from. The indicated zone can then be
to ensure that the panel has adequate zone capacity for
manually searched to locate the triggered device.
the size and complexity of the building and that the panel
With this type of functionality a conventional system is can support the intended sounder circuit wiring and
best used in smaller builds where it wouldnt be difficult loading.
to locate the triggered device in a given zone.
Unwanted Alarms
Because most conventional detectors are simple two

state devices they can only be in either a normal or
fire condition. Although modern components and good
system design can go some way to reducing potential
problems, it is not uncommon for conventional systems
to generate unwanted alarms due to certain operating
conditions or transient environmental conditions such as
the presence of steam near to a smoke detector.
A key development aimed at reducing such unwanted
alarms has been the multi-criteria detector. Traditionally,
detectors were designed to respond to particular fire
phenomena such as heat or the presence of smoke.
However, Eaton now offer multi-criteria devices, which
contain both a smoke sensing element and a thermal
Typical conventional system architecture
sensing element.
The fire alarm decision is taken by analysis of the
responses from both elements, resulting in improved
detection performance as well as greatly enhanced false
alarm suppression.
Sounder Circuits
In addition to the detection circuits, there is also a need

for separate circuits of alarm annunciation devices such
as sounders and beacons to signal the existence of a fire
alarm condition to the building users. For sounder circuit
continuity monitoring to function effectively, sounder
circuits have to be wire in a single radial circuit, spurs
and tees are not permitted.
Almost every conventional fire panel will have facilities
for more than one sounder circuit and generally the
higher the specification of the panel or the higher the
number of detection zones provided, the more sounder Example conventional system layout
circuits will be provided.
Specifiers guide 4.2 Control panels and repeater panels
FXP4000 series -
Conventional control panel
A high specification
system with the
flexibility to make it
suitable for a large
range of projects
The FXP4000 series panels are fully certified to EN54 Features and benefits
parts 2 & 4. The panel is the perfect solution to any
conventional system requirement. The advanced features Flexible, high specification system
include a simple one-shot user test facility, class Very easy to maintain and service
change contacts, battery voltage alarms and charger Suitable for a large range of projects
temperature compensation, all included as standard to
No fuses required
ensure ease of use and high reliability.
Maintenance free poly switch circuit protection, with
auto reset
Compatible repeater panel
Class change and programmable fire/fault relay as
The FXP4000 series includes a repeater panel standard on 2/4 zone and fire and fault on the 8 zone
(FXPRP4000) which is compatible with the 8 zone Discreet panel design
panel. The repeater displays all the same functions as
Numerical access code (no lost keys)
the main panel and includes an indicator test facility.
The 8 zone variant features configurable zonal relay
card option and interlink
FXP4002 FXP4004 FXP4008
No. of zones 2 4 8 Supplied complete with battery for 24 hour standby
Detectors per zone 30 30 30
No. of alarm circuits 2 2 2
Specifiers guide
4.2 Control panels and repeater panels
Code FXP4002 FXP4004 FXP4008
Description 2 zone control panel 4 zone control panel 8 zone control panel
Standards EN54 Pt2 & Pt4 1998, EN50130 Pt4 1996, EN54 Pt2 & Pt4 1998, EN50130 Pt4 1996, EN54 Pt2 & Pt4 1998, EN50130 Pt4 1996,
EN50130 Pt4 EN50130 Pt4 EN50130 Pt4
Specification
Number of zones 2 4 8
Detectors per zone 30 30 30
Number of alarm circuits 2 2 4
Alarm circuit load 150mA per circuit, 0.3A total 400mA per circuit, 0.8A total 500mA per circuit, 2A total
End of line devices Detection circuits: EOLM-1 monitoring unit Detection circuits: EOLM-1 monitoring unit Detection circuits: EOLM-1 monitoring unit
Alarm lines: 6.8K resistor Alarm lines: 6.8K resistor Alarm lines: 6.8K resistor
Auxiliary fire signal/fault output Fire or fault configurable Fire or fault configurable Both fire and fault
Auxiliary dc output 24V dc fused. 30mA 24V dc fused. 30mA 24V dc fused. 30mA
Repeater port No No Yes
Mains input voltage 230V ac -15% +10% 230V ac -15% +10% 230V ac -15% +10%
System operating voltage 24V dc 24V dc 24V dc
Standby duration 24 hours 24 hours 24 hours
Battery 1 x 12v 3.2ah 1 x 12v 3.2ah 2 x 12v 3.2ah
Recharge period 24 hours 24 hours 24 hours
Environmental
Humidity 0 to 75% RH 0 to 75% RH 0 to 75% RH
(Non condensing)
Physical
Construction Polycarbonate housing & back box Polycarbonate housing & back box Polycarbonate housing & back box
Dimensions (H x W x D) Surface: 270mm x 332mm x 90mm Surface: 270mm x 332mm x 90mm Surface: 270mm x 332mm x 90mm
Cut-out: 265mm x 327mm x 47m Cut-out: 265mm x 327mm x 47m Cut-out: 265mm x 327mm x 47m
Weight 5.2kg 5.8kg 6.0kg
Ingress protection IP30 IP30 IP30
Cable entry Top: 12x20mm entries with blanking plugs Top: 12x20mm entries with blanking plugs Top: 12x20mm entries with blanking plugs
Rear cable entry aperture Rear cable entry aperture Rear cable entry aperture
Standard panel connections Dimensions

D1
W
MUTE SCROLL
H
BUZZER
1 2 3 4 5
D2
H (mm) W (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm)

2/4/8 zone panel 270 332 45 47
Cut-out 265 327 - 47
Note: If surface mounting add D1 and D2 to obtain depth dimension
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
2 zone control panel FXP4002
Repeater panel FXPRP4000
(only compatible with 8 zone panel)
Steel back box FX22003300 MB
Specifiers guide 4.2 Control panels and repeater panels
FXP5000 series -
Conventional control panel
Contemporary
and compact panel
design that provides
a solution to any
conventional system
requirement
The new FXP5000 series of conventional control panels Features and benefits
is currently available in a 16 zone version. The panel
features an array of user friendly features. The attractive Zonal relay card as standard
flush or surface mountable plastic enclosure, with metal One man test facility
back box, has been designed through intensive voice Non latching zone feature
of the customer research to provide ample space for
Class change input
termination of cables.
Fire and fault relays
The FXP50016 comes with a zonal relay card as standard
Discreet enclosure
allowing outputs to be switched on a by zone basis.
Supplied complete with battery for 24 hour standby
Compatible repeater panel
The FXP5000 series includes a repeater panel FXP50016
(FXP5000RP) which is compatible with the standard No. of zones 16
16 zone panel. Specifically designed for ease of Detectors per zone 30
installation, it requires only 2 interconnecting wires No. of alarm circuits 4
from the main panel, saving material cost and labour Zonal relay card
time.
Specifiers guide
Code FXP50016
Description 16 zone control panel
Standards EN54 Pt2 1998, A1:2006,
EN54 Pt4 1998, A1:2002 + A2:2006
Specification
Number of zones 16
Detectors per zone 30
Number of alarm circuits 4
Alarm circuit load 400mA per circuit, 1.6A total
End of line devices Detection circuits: EOLM-1
monitoring unit Alarm lines: 6.8K
resistor
Auxiliary fire signal/fault output 1A 24V dc single pole changeover
contacts
Auxiliary dc output 50mA
Repeater port Yes
Mains input voltage 230V ac -15% +10%
System operating voltage 24V dc
Standby duration 24 hours
Battery (sealed lead acid) 2 x 4Ah
Recharge period 24 hours
Environmental
Physical
Construction Polycarbonate housing & metal back
box
Dimensions (H x W x D) Surface: 276mm x 375mm x 136mm
Cut-out: 232mm x 335mm x 96mm
Weight 6.8kg
Cable entry Top: 12x20mm entries with blanking
plugs
Rear cable entry aperture
Dimensions
D1 W2
D2
H1
H2
W1
Description H1 (mm) W1 (mm) D1 (mm) H2 (mm) W2 (mm) D2 (mm)

Total height Total width Total depth Back box Back box Back box
height width depth
16 Zone* 276 375 136 232 335 96
*Repeater panel dimensions same as 16 zone control panel
Specifiers guide
System functionality Detection capacity

1. Normal and supervisor mode facility. Supervisor mode protected 1. Up to 30 detectors per zone. End of line monitoring devices must
by 4 digit security code to prevent unauthorised use be fitted and are supplied as standard.
2. Supervisor mode provides access to test mode, where a one shot 2. Detector circuits are monitored for open circuit, short circuit and
weekly test facility can be initiated by the user. When in operation, detector removal.
the user has a period of time in which to put a call point into fire
condition, after which the system automatically resets and returns
Alarm capacity
to normal mode
3. Commissioning walk test feature permits the system to be 1. Four separate alarm lines - 400mA maximum load per line.
easily tested after installation and prior to handover. The panel 2. Alarm lines are monitored for open circuit and short circuit faults.
automatically resets and returns to normal operation after a
detection device has been tested. Each device can then be tested
Repeater panel
in turn via the same procedure
4. Supervisor mode also provides facility to disable the following for 1. Repeater matches the style and appearance of the main control
maintenance or other purposes: panels
Each detection zone independently 2. Facility for signalling to the Repeater panel provided as standard
The alarm circuits 3. Repeater requires only a single pair of wires to receive signals
from the main control panel, plus local mains power supply,
5. Non-latching zone facility is available as standard and can be
reducing the cost of installation
programmable via Dil switches located on the display board
4. Displays essential information at other key locations in a large
building/site
User interface
Zone fire or fault conditions
1. Stylish and compact panel with 6 touch button keypad control of Zone or alarm lines in test mode
all functions and LED indication
Zone or alarm lines in disabled mode
2. Simple one-shot weekly test with auto-reset facility
Fault isolations and test mode for control outputs
3. Comprehensive power, fire, and fault LED indicators and integral
piezo buzzer for on-board fire or fault indication
4. Battery high/low voltage alarm facility
5. Log book storage facility in front panel
Interface options
1. Class change input facility. Terminals provided for switching of 1 1
alarm circuits to indicate school/college class change 2 3 2 3

EOLM-1
2. 2 x1A 24V DC relays for Fire and Fault are available for remote
6K8
Resistor
6K8
Resistor
signalling
1 1
2 3 2 3
EOLM-1
3. Auxiliary 24V DC output power supply provided as standard on all

Volt free
normally
panels
open EOLM-1
contacts
230VAC OUTPUT
EOLM-1
Standard panel connections

L N
Mains
E 24V 0V
External
Power Class
NO C NC NO C NC
Fire Fault
- 1+ E - 2+
Sounder Circuits
- +
1
E
Zone Circuits
- +
2
E - + E - + E
3 4
Zone Circuits
Supply Change Circuit Circuit 3 and 4
1 and 2
Out (4 Zone Version Only)
1 1
2 3 2 3
EOLM-1
6K8
Resistor
1 1
2 3 2 3
EOLM-1
Volt free
normally To
open EOLM-1 Repeater
contacts Panel
230VAC OUTPUT 6K8 Resistors To EOLM-1
L N E 24V 0V NO C NC NO C NC - 1+ - 2+ - 3+ - 4+ - 1+ - 2+ - 3+ - 4+ - 5+ - 6+ - 7+ - 8 + TX+ TX- - 9 + - 10

Repeater
External Zone Circuits

Power Class Fire Fault Zone Circuits 9 to 16
Mains Sounder Circuits
Supply Change Circuit Circuit 1 to 8 (16 Zone
Out Panel Only)
Catalogue numbers
- + - +
Description FRE -
FPE
+ Fault
Code
Repeater panel FXP5000RP
- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8
FXN922 -
Conventional multi-mode detector
The conventional range offers a multi-mode, 5 in 1 Features and benefits

detector (FXN922), covering many building needs. Its
quick and simple to install with a stylish low profile Offers a range of sensor types
design. The detector is mounted on our standard 360 visibility LED using lightpipe technology
conventional base (FXN520) but can also be used in Drift compensation
conjunction with our relay base (FXN520R) for local
switching. Each detector is fitted with a 360 viewable
LED for indication. Quick and simple to install
Wide viewing angle for increased LED visibility
This multi-mode detector can be configured to operate
as either an optical detector, photo-thermal detector or Common mounting base
1 of 3 heat detector modes (rate of rise and 2 fixed heat Positive lock indication
models) using the four position switches located at the Discreet design for incorporation into any decor
back of the detector. The FXN922 is certified for use in all Easy to maintain/service
5 modes.
We can also supply separate detectors for each individual
mode if they are required. These are displayed in the
catalogue numbers in the table over the page.
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories

Dia
Code FXN922
Description Multi-mode detector
Standards EN54 Part 5 & 7 2001
Supply ratings
Standby current 30A (max) D1
Startup current 340A (max) D2
Alarm current 25mA (max)
Fixing information
Mounting position Ceiling in open areas
Mounting options Surface mount with FXN520 base
Area coverage 100m (subject to local standards) Dia (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm)
System wiring 2 Core 104 55 42
Environmental
Operating temperature -20C to 75C (dependent on setting)
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93%
Physical
Construction PC/ABS
Colour White
Dimensions excl base (dia x depth) 104mm x 42mm
Dimensions incl base (dia x depth)) 104mm x 55mm
Emc CE Marked
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton conventional fire systems
Performance
Optical Photo-
smoke thermal Rate of rise Fixed heat Fixed heat
Feature mode mode mode 77 C mode 92 C mode
Area coverage 100m2 100m2 50m2 50m2 50m2
(subject to local standards)
Heat class N/A A2S A1R BS CS
Alarm temperature N/A 60 C 60 C 77 C 92 C
Installation
1. Detectors are fixed and wired via common mounting base.
2. Cable entry into base can be rear or side.
3. A locking facility is provided which can be activated if required
to prevent unauthorised detector removal without the use of a
special tool.
4. Positive click mechanism incorporated to provide clear indication
when detector is correctly located in base.
User interface
1. Red LED to indicate alarm condition.
Catalogue numbers
2. Amber LED to indicate chamber fault/drift compensation limit.
Description Code
3. All wiring connections are via a common mounting base (supplied
5 in 1 multi-mode sensor FXN922
separately).
Optical smoke sensor FXN533
Photo/thermal sensor FXN632
Rate of rise heat detector FXN525
Fixed heat detector 77 C FXN524
Standard base FXN520
Relay base FXN520R
FX251D -
Conventional remote indicator
The conventional remote indicator (FX251D) is designed Features and benefits

to provide discreet remote indication, whilst providing
the ability to monitor a detector. High visibility LED
Fits on to a standard single gang back box
The FX251D is compatible with the Eaton range of
conventional fire systems. Aesthetically pleasing
The remote indicator is ideal for applications such as
void spaces or outside locked or inaccessible rooms Wide viewing angle for increased LED visibility
to provide indication of the activation of an automatic Discreet design for incorporation into any decor
detector. Easy to maintain/service
The device is supplied complete with back box and is
surface mounted.
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FX251D D
Description Remote Indicator

Environmental
H
Physical
Construction ABS
Colour White
Lens colour Red
Dimensions (H x W x D) 87mm x 87mm x 30mm W
Weight 0.28kg
Ingress protection IP30 H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
87 87 30
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton conventional fire systems
Installation Standard connections

1. Mounting plate fixes to single gang back box or can be direct fixed REMOTE
to wall or ceiling. INDICATOR
+- +-
2. Cable entry is normally from rear but breakouts are provided in
DETECTOR
side of base plate.
BASE
1 4
3. Cables connect to terminals on PCB within base plate.
4. Front cover is pushed onto base plate and locks in place.
WARNING:
1. FX251D is connected to an individual detector. Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is
2. FX251D activates if detector is triggered. connected to the system.
3. LED cancels when detector is reset.
4. Low current consumption.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Conventional remote indicator FX251D
Weatherproof conventional remote indicator CIR301WP
FXN520 -
Conventional standard sensor base
The FXN520 conventional standard base has been Features and benefits
specifically designed to be compatible with the Eaton
range of conventional detectors. Quick and simple to install
Separate zone in and zone out terminals
This standard base has been designed for flexibility,
simplicity and speed of installation. Stand off fixing feature
Selectable detector locking
It incorporates purpose designed devices to provide fault
warning if detector is removed whilst maintaining full Accepts side entry surface cables
zone wiring integrity. Common base for the Eaton range of conventional
The base has a schottky diode in series with the negative detectors
terminals to enable fault monitoring and allow the circuit
to continue if a detector is removed.
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FXN520
Physical
D
Construction PC/ABS
Colour White
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton conventional sensors
Dia
Installation Dia (mm) D (mm)

1. Base incorporates a retaining clip to provide positive feedback 104 22
when detector is correctly fitted.
2. Separate terminals are provided for zone in and zone out
connections. Standard connections
3. Each terminal can accept up to 2 x 2.5mm cables
4. Base incorporates a substantial cable entry aperture in the rear of
+ VE
the base. +
5. Breakouts are provided to enable the detector base to sit neatly

over surface cables and then enter via the rear entry aperture.

+ 1 LED
1 LED
6. Base mounting incorporates a stand off feature to help prevent

Control Panelsl
4 4
Conventional
Compatible
EOLM-1
ZONE
distortion when mounted on an uneven surface. 2 E 2 E
7. Fixings are suitable for standard BESA box or direct fixing to - 3 3

suitable surface
8. Optional locking devices (supplied with base) to prevent - VE
unauthorised detector removal.
User interface
1. Eaton conventional detectors and bases support the use of a
remote LED (optional extra FX251D).
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Fixed heat detector 77oC FXN524
FXN520R -
Conventional relay base
The FXN520R conventional relay base has been Features and benefits
specifically designed to be compatible with the Eaton
range of conventional detectors. Quick and simple to install
Designed specifically for use with Eaton detectors
This relay base as been designed for flexibility, simplicity
and speed of installation. Provides remote signal for external interfacing
First fix mounting plate for ease of installation
It provides a local relay signal in the event of its host
detector being triggered, making it ideal for instigating a Local control output from host detector
local response.
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FXN520R
Description Relay base
Specification
D
Relay contact rating 1A at 24V dc
Relay trigger source Detector remote LED output
Detector locking facility Supplied as standard
Physical
Construction PC/ABS
Dia
Colour White
Dimensions (Dia x D) 102mm x 40mm Dia (mm) D (mm)
102 40
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton conventional detectors
Installation Standard connections

1. Relay base is supplied with a first fix fixing plate.
2. Fixing plate has a central cable aperture.
3. Cable entry is from rear.
+ VE
4. Main body is then clipped into place on base, body locks into +

+ 1 LED
1 LED
Control Panelsl
4 4
Conventional
Compatible
EOLM-1
ZONE
2 E 2 E
1. Relay is controlled by status of host detector. - 3 3

2. If host detector is triggered relay activates.
- VE
Interface options
1. Eaton conventional detectors and bases support the use of a
remote LED (optional extra FX251D).
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Relay base FXN520R
5 In 1 multi-mode sensor FXN922
MBD50R, MBD100R - Conventional

reflective beam detectors
Two versions of the conventional zone powered reflective Features and benefits
beam detectors are available in this range, the MBD50R
with a range of up to 50 metres and the MBD100R with Zone connected
a range of 50 to 100 meters. Simple two wire connection
Both the MBD50R and the MBD100R are compatible Reflective beam detection
with the Eaton range of conventional fire systems. No power supply required
These conventional zone powered reflective beam Two ranges available:
detectors are extremely simple to install, they require no - up to 50m
separate power supply, operate on a reflective principle - 50m to 100m
and have a simple set up mode to enable easy and quick Quick and simple to setup
alignment during installation. Saves on both time and installation costs
These units are designed to replace individual point Single device to install instead of numerous point
detectors in large open areas such as warehouses. detectors
Fire and fault conditions are signalled to panel using Single point of maintenance
standard zone wiring so no additional interconnection is Wall mounted for ease of maintenance, especially in
required. warehouses with racking
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code MBD50R MBD100R
Description Reflective beam detector Reflective beam detector
Standards EN54 Pt12 2002 EN54 Pt12 2002
Specification
Quiescent current < 5mA (no LEDs illuminated) < 5mA (no LEDs illuminated)
Alarm current < 9mA < 9mA
Alignment current < 18mA < 18mA
Power up time 20 seconds (approx) 20 seconds (approx)
Operating range 5 to 50 metres 50 to 100 metres
Tolerance to beam misalignment at 35% Detector 0.8, Prism 5.0 Detector 0.8, Prism 5.0
Fire alarm thresholds 2.50dB (25%) 3.74dB (35%) 6.02dB (50%) 2.50dB (25%) 3.74dB (35%) 6.02dB (50%)
Optical wavelength 880nm 880nm
Environmental
Physical
Colour White White
Dimensions (H x W x D) 210mm 130mm x 120mm 210mm 130mm x 120mm
Weight 0.8kg 0.8kg
Compatibility
Suitable for use with Eaton conventional fire systems Eaton conventional fire systems
1. Must be fixed to solid structure.
2. Recommended mounting height is 0.3 to 0.6 metres below the
ceiling.
3. Cables can be terminated into separate termination box (not
210 130 120
supplied) or use purpose designed mounting bracket (MRBFP) H D
ordered separately.
4. Mounting bracket has facilities for glanding of incoming cables
plus simple fixing of beam detector.
5. Test filter is supplied with detector to simulate required smoke
obscuration level and confirm correct operation. W
System functionality Standard connections

to beam detector socket
Beam detectors have 3 modes:
Prism targeting mode - Designed to provide simple
initial alignment of beam and reflector assembly.
IN
Alignment mode - Enables accurate fine tuning of beam alignment

without the need for additional calibration equipment or a second + - + -
operator. Compatible
ZONE
Conventional
IN
Normal running mode Control Panel EOL

DEVICE
User interface
Beam detector status LEDs: WARNING:
Red LED constantly illuminated indicates fire condition. connected to the system.
Flashing amber LED indicates fault condition.
Note:
Screen1(Earth)
beam must
per zone
be continuous along entire length of zone.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Reflective beam detector (50m range) MBD50R
Reflective beam detector (50-100m range) MBD100R
Mounting bracket MRBFP
MDP201 -
Conventional duct mounting probe
The duct mounting probe unit is designed for use with Features
the Eaton range of addressable and conventional optical
smoke sensors / detectors. Code MDP201
Duct width range 300mm to 1500mm
The presence of smoke in a ventilation duct is detected
Duct air speed range 1m/s to 20m/s
by sampling the airflow through the duct via two
Temperature range -20C or +60C
sampling tubes. A detector and base are mounted within
the sampling chamber, which is located on the external
skin of the duct, with sample and exhaust probes
passing into the duct in an area of low turbulence. The Duct probe unit shown with
unit requires an analogue optical sensor or conventional optical detector - detector
and base must be ordered
optical detector and corresponding base and is supplied separately.
with full fixing instructions.
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Selecting location
To avoid excessive turbulence, the duct probe should be placed in a
straight section of duct at a distance from any bends of least three
duct widths. If the duct has several extraction points that combine into
one duct the duct probe sensitivity will be reduced, it is recommended
therefore, that each duct is fitted with its own duct probe.
Testing
A small hole fitted with a plug is on the exhaust side of the duct probe
so that smoke can be used to check the detector is operational without
removing the lid. ENSURE THE PLUG IS REFITTED AFTER TESTING.
Servicing
The duct probe should be checked regularly to ensure there is no
build-up of dirt. If dirt etc has accumulated in the sampling unit then
the detector should be removed from the duct probe and the tubes,
elbows etc, cleaned.
Installation diagrams
264.00mm 188.00mm
80mm
CABLE ENTRY
90 ELBOWS 20mm (3/4)
132.00mm
28mm
AIR FLOW
DIRECTION BLUE DOT

233mm DIRECTION INDICATOR
WHITE TUBE BLACK TUBE

(EXHAUST) (INLET)
20mm
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Duct mounting probe MDP201
Relay base FXN520R
FX201, FX203 -
Conventional callpoints
Two versions of conventional callpoints are available in Features and benefits

this range, the FX201 which can be either surface or
flush mounted and the FX203 which is a weatherproof Fast fit clip on front cover
version. Wide range of accessories
Both the FX201 and the FX203 are compatible with the Heavy duty terminals
Eaton range of conventional fire systems. Two models available:
- Internal
These conventional callpoints are attractively designed,
- Weatherproof
simple to install and are supplied as standard with
a frangible glass element and a test key for ease of Quick and simple to install
maintenance. Single tool for test and access
A comprehensive range of accessories are available to Robust construction
maximise the functionality of the callpoint for particular IP65 version available
applications. Easy to maintain/service
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FX201 FX203

Description Surface/flush mount callpoint Weatherproof callpoint
Specification
Environmental
Physical
Colour Red Red
Dimensions (H x W x D) 87mm x 87mm x 57mm (36mm flush) 87mm x 87mm x 59mm
Weight 0.2kg 0.2kg
Ingress protection IP24D IP65
Compatibility
Dimensions Standard connections
COMMON
W
680
+ + - -
H
Compatible
Conventional
Control Panel
D WARNING:
Description H (mm) W (mm) D (mm) connected to the system.
Flush mounted 87 87 36 Screen (Earth) must be continuous along entire length of cable
Surface mounted 87 87 57
Weatherproof 87 87 59 User interface
1. To enable quick and simple installation, callpoints use a fast fit self
Installation locking clip on front cover which is very simple to fit, but once in
place, can only be removed by use of a special key (supplied).
1. Surface callpoint has standard rear BESA fixing facilities. In 2. Callpoint is triggered by pressing against the element.
addition, back box can accept top or bottom surface entry cables.
Surface callpoint can also be flush mounted.
2. Callpoint has test facility via special test key to prevent
unauthorised operation.
3. Insertion of test key for test purposes and for cover removal is
at bottom of callpoint to facilitate ease of access when mounted
next to door architrave.
4. Test key is dual function, used to test callpoint operation by
simulating activation and also to allow removal of clip on cover to
gain access to element.
5. Element is held in place by clip on self locking cover which can
only be removed by use of a special tool (callpoint test key).
6. Separate zone in and zone out terminals are provided for all
connections.
7. Surface/flush callpoints are IP24D, weatherproof is IP65. Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Surface/flush callpoint FX201
Weatherproof callpoint FX203
Protective hinged cover CXPC
Spacer plates (pack of 10) MBGSP
Recessing bezels (pack of 10) MBGBEZ
Resettable element kit (pack of 10) MBGREKIT
Spare break glasses (pack of 5) FX5G
Callpoint keys (pack of 10) MFBGKEY3
FX006, MWB824 -
Conventional bells
The conventional 6 inch bell, FX006, incorporates highly Features and benefits
efficient rotary centrifugal movements combining high
sound output with low current consumption. High sound output
The FX006 is compatible with the Eaton range of
conventional fire systems. Multi-fixing base plate
Bells still remain a popular choice for many applications
such as schools where they can sometimes be used as a Can be used for non fire applications
signal for non fire purposes such as class change. Easy to maintain/service
The MWB824 is a weatherproof 8 inch bell that can be
used for external use. The MWB824 enables a common
bell sound to be achieved throughout a complete site,
including areas where a weatherproof device is required.
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FX006 MWB824

Description Internal 6 inch bell Weatherproof 8 inch bell
Specification
Operating voltage 24V dc 24V dc
Current consumption 25mA at 24V dc 28mA at 24V dc
Sound output 93-95dB(A) at 24V dc 95dB(A) (+/-2)
Environmental
Physical
Construction Gong-steel/base-polycarbonate Stove enamelled
Colour Red Red
Dimensions (Dia x D) 152mm x 63mm 200mm x 104mm
Ingress protection IP21C IP54
Cable entry Rear Via separate back box
Compatibility
FX006 D Dia
1. Multiple rear fixing options, can be fixed direct to wall or mounted

on suitable BESA box.
2. Cable entry into bell is from rear.
3. Incorporates heavy duty terminals suitable for 2.5mm cables. Dia
MWB824
D
1. Supplied with heavy duty gasketed back box which supports

bottom entry cables. Dia
Description (mm) D (mm)
2. Incorporates heavy duty terminals
6 inch internal bell 152 63
8 inch weatherproof bell 200 104
Device functionality
FX006 Standard connections
1. Operation is driven by an internal motor and striker arrangement.
2. Bells are polarised and suppressed.
- - + +
Compatible
MWB824 Conventional
Control Panel
1. Bell operates via solenoid.
2. Bell is polarised and suppressed.
WARNING:
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Internal 6 inch bell FX006
Weatherproof 8 inch bell MWB824
FX003, FX003W -
Conventional flush sounders
Two versions of the conventional flush sounders are Features and benefits
available in this range, the red FX003 and the white
FX003W. Choice of colours
Separate volume control
Both the FX003 and the FX003W are compatible with
the Eaton range of conventional fire systems. Choice of tone is determined by selection of
appropriate terminal for negative connection
These conventional flush sounders provide an excellent
combination of high sound output and discreet
appearance. Ideal for retail, hotel and residential Discreet low profile design
applications such as sheltered housing. Easy to maintain/service
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FX003 FX003W

Description Flush sounder Flush sounder
Specification
Sound output 98dB(a) (+/- 2), at 1 Metre 98dB(a) (+/- 2), at 1 Metre
Environmental
Physical
Construction ABS ABS
Colour Red White
Weight 0.3kg 0.3kg
Cable entry Via separate back box Via separate back box
Compatibility
1. Sounder fixes to a single gang deep back box. W
D
2. Fixing screws included.
3. Connections are to main sounder body.
4. Separate alarm line in and alarm line out terminals are provided. H
5. For surface mount applications a separate red single gang box can
be ordered separately.

Interface options 86 86 36
Operates from nominal 24V dc supply and can be connected to any
suitably rated conventional sounder circuit.
2nd SOUND
1st SOUND
COMMON
+ + - - - -
Compatible
Conventional
Control Panel
WARNING:
Screen (Earth) must be continuous along entire length of cable.
NOTE:
Diagram shown with 1st sound connected, if 2nd sound is
required connect both negative in and negative out to the
second sound terminal.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Conventional flush sounder (red) FX003
Conventional flush sounder (white) FX003W
Sounder surface backbox (red only) MFSSBB
FX002SB, FX002DB -
Conventional surface sounders
Two versions of the conventional surface sounder are Features and benefits
available in this range, the shallow base (FX002SB) and
the weatherproof deep base (FX002DB). Shallow base has unobtrusive low profile design
Pre drilled cable entries
Both the FX002SB and the FX002DB are compatible
with the Eaton range of conventional fire systems. Weatherproof variant
32 selectable tones
These conventional surface sounders have 32 different
alarm tone selections and adjustable volume levels via Quick and simple to install
the internal volume controller. Low current, high sound output
Depending on the selected tone, sound levels of up to Suitable for a wide range of applications
105dB(A) can be achieved. Automatic synchronisation
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FX002SB FX002DB

Description Surface sounder, shallow base Weatherproof surface sounder, deep base
Specification
Sound output 105dB(a) max (+/-2) at 24V dc, at 1 meter 105dB(a) max (+/-2) at 24V dc, at 1 meter
Number of tones 32 32
Environmental
Physical
Colour Red Red
Cable entry Rear Rear/Side
Compatibility
1. Supplied with simple to install first fix mounting base. D D
2. Fixing and cable entry holes are pre-drilled on FX002SB. Fixing

holes are drilled upon installation of FX002DB to maintain
weatherproof integrity.
3. Cable entry is from rear, or side on the FX002DB.
5. Separate zone in and zone out terminals are provided.
6. Main body is pushed into sounder base and then twisted to lock
into place.
Dia Dia
Dia
Description (mm) D (mm)
Standard connections Surface sounder, shallow base 93 63
Weatherrpoof surface sounder 93 93
2nd SOUND
1st SOUND
COMMON
Interface options
+ + - - - - suitably rated conventional sounder circuit.
Compatible
JSB Conventional
Control Panel
Options
Choice of tone setting (set via DIP switches can be altered at any time).
WARNING:
NOTE:
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Surface sounder, shallow base FX002SB
Weatherproof surface sounder, deep base FX002DB
FX007 - Conventional high output

wall sounder
The conventional high output wall sounder (FX007) has a Features and benefits
maximum output of 120dB(a) at 1 metre making it ideal
for use in areas with high ambient noise levels. High output sounder
Choice of tones
The FX007 is compatible with the Eaton range of
conventional fire systems. Variable volume setting
This conventional high output wall sounder is simple to
install and uses a first fix back plate onto which the main Ideal for areas with high ambient noise
body attaches with a self locking press fix assembly.
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FX007 D
Description High output wall sounder

Standards EN54 Pt3
Specification
H
Current consumption 210mA to 260mA
Sound output 120dB(A) (+/- 2) Max at 1 Metre (tone 5)
114dB(A) (+/- 2) Max at 1 Metre (tone 3) W
Environmental
Operating temperature -25C to +70C H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93% RH 105 105 95
Physical
Construction ABS
Colour Red
Dimensions (Dia x D) 105mm x 105mm x 95mm
Weight 0.28kg
+ + - -
Compatibility Compatible
Suitable for use with Eaton conventional fire systems Conventional
Control Panel
Installation
WARNING:
1. First fix mounting plate is fixed to wall.
2. Cable entry is from rear, or top/bottom.
4. Separate alarm line in and alarm line out terminals are provided. Screen (Earth) must be continuous along entire length of cable.
Interface options
Sounder operates from nominal 24V dc supply and can be connected
to any suitably rated conventional sounder circuit.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
High ouput wall sounder FX007
MLC624 - Conventional low current

wall sounder
The MLC624 low current sounder has been designed Features and benefits
to provide a high sound output with a low current
consumption. Quick and simple to install
It is ideal for applications where high sound levels need
to be achieved but where available sounder circuit High efficiency design
capacity is limited. 3 different tones
The low current sounder is simple to install and uses a Separate volume control
first fix back plate onto which the main body attaches Low current, high sound output
with a self locking press fix assembly. Automatic synchronisation
Self locking assembly
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories

D
Code MLC624
Description Low current wall sounder
Standards EN54 Pt3
Specification H

Current consumption 5mA at 24V dc
Sound output 100dB(a) at 24V dc at 1 metre
W
Environmental
Operating temperature -25C to +70C H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93% RH 105 105 95
Physical
Construction PC.ABS Standard connections
Colour Red
Dimensions (Dia x D) 105mm x 105mm x 95mm
Weight 0.25kg
Ingress protection IP42 + + - -
Compatibility
Compatible
Control Panel
Installation
1. First fix mounting plate is fixed to wall. WARNING:
2. Cable entry is from rear, or top/bottom. Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is
4. Separate alarm line in and alarm line out terminals are provided.
Interface options
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Low current wall sounder MLC624
FXN824 - Conventional base

mountable sounder
The conventional base mountable sounder (FXN824) Features and benefits

has a slim and aesthetically pleasing design and can
be installed as either a discreet stand alone sounder or Discreet appearance
ceiling mounted with a detector and base. Can be used with a detector as a sounder base or
stand alone as a sounder (detector base required
The FXN824 is compatible with the Eaton range of
separately)
conventional detectors and fire systems.
Mounting with a detector and base simplifies the
installation of the system by enabling a detector and
sounder to be fixed at a single common point. Discreet low profile design
Single installation point
When used as a stand alone sounder the device can be
either wall or ceiling mounted and completed with an Can be wired as a stand alone unit
optional cover plate (MDS824COV). Easy to maintain/service
These conventional base mountable sounders are
ideal for applications such as hotel bedrooms where a
detector sounder is required.
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories

Dia
Code FXN824
Description Base mountable sounder
Standards EN54 Pt3
D
Specification
Current consumption 5mA (low) 7 ma (high) at 24V
Sound output 80/90dB(a) (+/-3), at 1 Metre
Environmental
Operating temperature -10C to +55C Dia (mm) D (mm)
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93% RH 111 26
Physical
Construction ABS Standard connections
Colour White
2nd SOUND
1st SOUND
COMMON
Weight 0.4kg
Cable entry Rear
- - - - + +
Compatibility
Compatible
Control Panel
WARNING:
Installation Do NOT use high voltage testers if ANY equipment is
1. Sounder fixes to mounting surface. connected to the system.
2. Cables pass through the middle of the sounder.
3. Sounder wiring terminates at the sounder terminals.
4. Detector wiring terminates at normal connections on detector NOTE:
base.
5. If no detector is to be fitted, a blanking plate can be fitted instead. second sound terminal.
Interface options
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Base mountable sounder FXN824
Blanking plate (pack of 5) MDS824COV
FXSOLWRS, FXSOLCWS -
Conventional solista LX wall and
ceiling beacons
The Solista LX range of visual alarm devices (VADs) Features and benefits
has both a wall and a ceiling variant. The Solista LX Wall
(FXSOLWRS) is suitable for a variety of applications and Ultra low current consumption of 10mA
compatible with both a shallow base and deep base. Up to 7.5m coverage volume
A patented lens design distributes light to achieve the 0.5Hz or 1Hz Flash rate
required illumination specified by EN 54-23, whilst using Coverage switch to 2.5m on the wall variant and 3m
minimum current consumption. on the ceiling variant.
The Solista LX Ceiling (FXSOLCWS) has a unique lens Use where current consumption is a key
design that distributes the light in a cylindrical shape to consideration
achieve the required illumination specified by EN 54-23. Ideal for bedrooms, bathrooms and toilets
Designed for installation at a height of up to 3m and with Switch flash rate to 0.5Hz to reduce current
a discrete appearance, the device is ideal for a variety of consumption
applications, including bedrooms, bathrooms and toilets. Reduces power consumption by up to 50%
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FXSOLWRS FXSOLCWS

Mounting type Wall Ceiling
Voltage 9 - 60VDC 9 - 60VDC
Current 10 - 25mA dependent on setting 10 - 25mA dependent on setting
Coverage (y) 7.5m on high output settings 7.5m on high output settings
2.5m on low output settings 2.5m on low output settings
Mounting height (x) 2.4m (max) 3m (max)
Coverage volume code W-2.4-7.5 C-3-7.5
Coverage volume 135m3 (15m3) 132m3 (21m3)
Flash rate 1Hz (Switchable to 0.5Hz) 1Hz (Switchable to 0.5Hz)
Monitoring Reverse polarity Reverse polarity
Protection IP33C shallow base, IP65 deep base IP33C shallow base, IP65 deep base
Weight 100g 100g
Body colour Red White
Flash colour Red Red
Dimensions
FXSOLWRS
93mm 66mm
DEEP BASE
SHALLOW BASE
38mm
Dia (mm) D (mm)

Shallow base 93 38
Deep base 93 66
FXSOLCWS
93mm 65mm
DEEP BASE
SHALLOW BASE
37mm
Dia (mm) D (mm)

Shallow base 93 37
Deep base 93 65
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Solista LX wall red body shallow base FXSOLWRS
Solista LX wall red body deep base FXSOLWRD
Solista LX ceiling white body shallow base FXSOLCWS
Deep base for FXSOLCWS FX000WWP
FXROLPWR - Conventional RoLP LX

wall
The RoLP LX Wall is ideal for dual use applications where Features and benefits
a visual alarm device is required in addition to an audible
alarm. Ultra low current consumption
RoLP and RoLP Maxi sounder options
The RoLP LX is a reliable, high performing VAD (Visual
Alarm Device) that is certified to EN 54-23. Up to 7.5m coverage volume (switchable to 2.5m)
0.5 or 1Hz flash rate
Recommended for wall use and requiring just one
installation point, the RoLP LX Wall is also available as a Use where current consumption is a key
base only for use with any standard RoLP sounder. consideration
Delivering up to 106dB(A) at 1 metre sound output
Ideal for bedrooms, bathrooms and toilets
Switch flash rate to 0.5Hz to reduce current
consumption
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FXROLPWR
95mm 95mm
Mounting Wall
Voltage 18 - 28VDC (Fire Use) 9 - 15 VDC (Fire Use) 2 x 20mm
Current 22 - 37mA dependent on setting (Sounder

and beacon; tone 3)
Coverage (y) 7.5m on high output settings
2.5m on low output settings
135mm
Mounting height (x) 2.4m (max)
Coverage volume code W-2.4-7.5
Coverage volume 135m3 (15m3)
Flash rate 1Hz (Switchable to 0.5Hz)
Monitoring Reverse polarity
Protection IP65 D (mm) W (mm) H (mm)
Weight 200g 95 95 135
Body colour Red
Flash colour Red
Sound output 102dB(A) at 1 metre (Typical tone 3 - RoLP)
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
RoLP wall red body base and sounder FXROLPWR
RoLP wall red body base only FXROLPWR-B
FXSYG1WR, FXSYG1WR-WP -
Conventional symphoni LX wall
sounder beacons
The Symphoni LX Wall visual alarm device (VAD) is a Features and benefits
durable sounder beacon that is certified to EN 54-23.
Boasting impressive performance and a durable design, Ultra low current consumption
it ensures reliability and energy efficiency. Its high sound Up to 7.5m coverage volume (switchable to 2.5m)
output makes it suitable for open areas or where there is 0.5 or 1Hz Flash rate
higher than normal background noise.
Coverage switch to 2.5m
This range includes a standard version, providing UK Use where current consumption is a key
alarm tones and an E version that has tones including consideration
the German DIN tone and the Netherlands Slow Whoop.
Ideal for bedrooms, bathrooms and toilets
The Symphoni LX is also available as a base-only Switch flash rate to 0.5Hz to reduce current
variant and both the normal and base-only come in a consumption
weatherproof, IP66 variant.
Reduces power consumption by up to 50%
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FXSYG1WR FXSYG1WR-WP

Mounting type Wall Wall
Voltage 18 - 28VDC (Fire Use) 18 - 28VDC (Fire Use)
Current 15 - 30mA dependent on setting 15 - 30mA dependent on setting
(Sounder; tone 29) (Sounder; tone 29)
Coverage (y) 7.5m on high output settings 7.5m on high output settings
2.5m on low output settings 2.5m on low output settings
Mounting height (x) 2.4m (max) 2.4m (max)
Coverage volume code W-2.4-7.5 W-2.4-7.5
Coverage volume 135m3 (15m3) 135m3 (15m3)
Operating temperature -10C to +55C, -25C to +70C
Protection IP21C IP66
Weight 200g 200g
Body colour Red Red
Flash colour Red Red
Sound output 100dB(A) (Typical tone 29 - Symphoni) at 1 metre 100dB(A) (Typical tone 29 - Symphoni) at 1 metre
Dimensions
FXSYG1WR
106mm 92mm
2 x 20mm
147mm
D (mm) W (mm) H (mm)

92 106 147
FXSYG1WR-WP
111mm 100mm
151mm
D (mm) W (mm) H (mm)

100 111 151
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Symphoni LX wall red body FXSYG1WR
Symphoni LX wall base red body FXSYR-B
Symphoni LX wall weatherproof red body FXYG1WR-WP
Symphoni LX wall weatherproof base red body FXSYR-B-WP
MLB124SB, MLB124DB -
Conventional LED indicators
The LED indicators can still provide reliable light Features and benefits
indication in areas which do not have to meet the new
regulations regarding EN54-23 visual alarm devices. The MLB124SB has an unobtrusive low profile
design
The low profile, MLB124SB, is simple to install, and
The MLB124DB is the weatherproof variant with an
offers a reduced depth with pre-drilled fixing and cable
IP65 rating
entry holes, suitable for both wall or ceiling mounting.
Low power consumption LEDs
The weatherproof variant, MLB124DB, is IP65 rated
Choice of flash frequency
making them ideal for both outdoor and industrial
applications. Choice of power settings
Pre drilled cable entries on the MLB124SB and a
Both the low profile and weatherproof indicators utilises
choice of cable entry positions on the MLB124DB.
18 carefully positioned LEDs to provide a high intensity
output. Both output intensity and flash frequency is Low power requirement
selectable using internal DIP switch. Selectable flash frequency
Selectable flash intensity
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code MLB124SB MLB124DB

Description Low profile LED indicator Weatherproof LED indicator
Specification
Current consumption 3 to 6mA at 24V dc 3 to 6mA at 24V dc
(depending on power setting) (depending on power setting)
Environmental
Physical
Colour Red Red
Lens colour Red Red
Weight 0.1kg 0.15kg
Cable entry Rear Rear/side
Compatibility
1. Supplied with simple to install first fix mounting base.
2. Fixing and cable entry holes are pre-drilled.
3. Cable entry is from rear on MLB124SB and both rear and side on
MLB124DB. D
D
4. Connections are to main beacon body.

5. Separate alarm line in / out terminals are provided.
6. Main body is pushed into base and then twisted to lock into place.
Dia
Dia
Interface options
Description Dia (mm) D (mm)
Operates from nominal 24V dc supply and can be connected to any Low profile LED indicator 95 53
Weatherproof LED indicator 95 80
+ + - -
Compatible
Conventional
Control Panel
WARNING:
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Low profile LED indicator MLB124SB
Weatherproof LED indicator MLB124DB
FL-RL-R-S, FL-RL-R-D - Conventional

xenon sounder indicator
The Xenon sounder indicator is an audible and visual Features and benefits
device which requires one single installation point. This
greatly reduces installation costs and is less obtrusive High output sounder beacon
than two separate devices. Versions are available Automatic sounder synchronisation
with the sounder and beacon linked, or with separate Up to 103dB(A) with built in Xenon flash
terminals for independent operation.
Suitable for a variety of applications
The weatherproof variant offers an ideal solution for Improved tone clarity, reducing confusion
installation in harsher environments, having a IP65
protection rating.
Note: From 31st December 2013 a new beacon
standard, EN 54-23 became mandatory across Europe
where Construction Product Regulation (CPR) applies.
If you are in a region where this standard applies please
understand that these indicators do not meet the
requirements of the new standards
Specifiers guide
4.3 Accessories
Code FL-RL-R-S FL-RL-R-D

Voltage 18 - 28Vdc (*1) 18 - 28Vdc (*1)
Current 68mA (typical Tone 3) 68mA (typical Tone 3)
Sound output 101dB(A) at 1 metre (typical Tone 3) 101dB(A) at 1 metre (typical Tone 3)
Tones Preset to tone 3, 32 tones available Preset to tone 3, 32 tones available
Flash power 0.7j 0.7j
Flash rate 1Hz 1Hz
Volume control 10dB 10dB
Temperature - 10C to + 55C - 10C to + 55C
Protection IP54 IP65
Construction ABS, PC lens ABS, PC lens
Weight 0.33Kg 0.33Kg
Colours Red Red
Lens colour Red Red
Dimensions
D D
Dia Dia
Description Dia (mm) D (mm)

Xenon sounder indicator 93 92
Weatherproof xenon sounder indicator 93 121
2nd SOUND
1st SOUND
COMMON
- - - - + +
Compatible
Conventional
Control Panel
WARNING:
NOTE:
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Xenon sounder indicator FL-RL-R-S
Weatherproof xenon sounder indicator FL-RL-R-D
Specifiers guide 4.4 Ancilliaries
MDR240, MDR24L - Conventional

heavy duty door retainers
This range of heavy duty magnetic door retainers are Features and benefits
robust and simple to install, making them ideal for a wide
range of applications, such as nursing homes, hospitals, Heavy duty construction
schools and industrial premises. Mains and 24V dc version
Two versions are available, the mains powered MDR240 Manual release switch
which has a holding force of 40kg and the MDR24L 24V Optional floor mounting bracket available
dc powered also with a holding force of 40kg. Quick and simple to install
Both versions enable doors to be held open under Slim profile unit
normal conditions but to be automatically released in the
event of fire alarm activation when interfaced with the
fire panel.
Their die cast aluminium construction with plastic front
cover plate make them suitable for most applications.
Both versions are supplied with door mounted striker
plates and can be fixed directly to a suitable wall,
alternatively a floor bracket can be used to allow floor
mounting.
Specifiers guide
4.4 Ancilliaries
Code MDR240 MDR24L

Description Mains powered heavy duty door retainer 24V dc powered heavy duty door retainer
Specification
Operating voltage 230V ac to 240V ac 24V dc
Power consumption 1.2VA 40mA
Holding force 50kg 50kg
Environmental
Physical
Colour White body / black plate White body / black plate
Dimensions (H x W x D) Magnet: 95mm x 95mm 40mm Magnet: 95mm x 95mm 40mm
Striker plate: 65mm x 65mm x 48mm Striker plate: 65mm x 65mm x 48mm
Weight 1.0kg 1.0kg
Compatibility
1. Door retainer unit and striker plate should be fixed to a smooth D W
surface.
W
2. A single 20mm cable entry facility is provided. D
3. Door retainer can be rotated to provide cable entry at either top,
bottom or side as required. H
4. Fixings should be able to support at least double the holding force
of the magnet. H
1. Designed to operate only with self closing doors. Magnet 95 95 40
2. Door retainer is fitted to wall or floor using floor bracket. Striker Plate 65 65 48
3. Striker plate is fitted to door.
4. Door retainer is fed with a constant supply via an external control Standard connections
device. INPUT VOLTAGE
5. Supply energises an electromagnet, which holds the striker plate
securely against the magnet.
6. If supply to magnet is interrupted, magnet will de-energise.
7. Door closes under control of its own self closing device.
TO DOOR RETAINER
WARNING:
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Mains powered heavy duty door retainer MDR240
24V dc heavy duty door retainer MDR24L
Floor mounting bracket for heavy duty door retainers ZMDRFBB
FX021240LC, FX02124VLC -
Conventional compact door retainers
Eaton compact magnetic door retainers are competitively Features and benefits
priced, simple to install and discreetly styled.
Fast fit clip on cover
The reliable compact door retainers are ideal for a wide
Mains and 24V dc versions available
range of applications, such as nursing homes, hospitals
and busy corridors. They enable doors to be held open Manual release facility
under normal conditions but automatically released in Optional floor mounting bracket available
the event of fire alarm activation when interfaced with Quick and simple to install
the fire panel.
Slim profile unit
Specifiers guide
4.4 Ancilliaries
Code FX021240LC FX02124VLC

Description Mains powered compact door retainer 24V dc powered compact door retainer
Specification
Operating voltage 230 V ac to 240 V ac 24V dc
Power consumption 1.2 VA 40mA
Holding force 45 kg 50 kg
Environmental
Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 93 %RH 0 to 93 %RH
Physical
Colour White White
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Magnet 71mm x 108mm 44mm 71mm x 108mm 44mm
Striker plate 65mm x 65mm x 48mm 65mm x 65mm x 48mm
Weight 1.0 kg 1.0 kg
Compatibility
1. Door retainer unit and striker plate should be fixed to a smooth W
D
surface. D W
2. 16mm & 20mm cable entry facilities are provided at the top and
both sides.
3. 10mm cable entry is provided at the rear H
4. Fixings should be able to support at least double the holding force H

of the magnet.

Magnet 71 108 44
1. Designed to operate only with self closing doors. Striker Plate 65 65 48
2. Door retainer is fitted to wall or floor using floor bracket.
3. Striker plate is fitted to door.
4. Door retainer is fed with a constant supply via an external control Standard connections
device.
INPUT VOLTAGE
5. Supply energises an electromagnet, which holds the striker plate
securely against the magnet.
6. If supply to magnet is interrupted, magnet will de-energise.
7. Door closes under control of its own self closing device.
TO DOOR RETAINER
WARNING:
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Mains powered compact door retainer FX021240LC
24V dc compact door retainer FX02124VLC
Floor mounting bracket for compact door retainers FX021LCFB
MAR724 -
Conventional heavy duty relay unit
The heavy duty relay unit (MAR724) is designed for Features and benefits
interfacing heavy loads such as door release units or
plant shut down equipment with fire alarm systems. Simple to install
Visible status indication LED
This unit is simple to fix and install and the neat
unobtrusive design makes it suitable for use in a wide Double pole change over contacts
range of areas. Low current consumption
The heavy duty relay unit is powered by 24V dc 230V ac rated contacts
external supply and is provided with 2 separate sets of Will switch up to 10A (resistive)
changeover contacts. The front mounted status LED
illuminates when relay is energised.
Specifiers guide
4.4 Ancilliaries
Code MAR724
Description Heavy duty relay unit
Specification H
Coil rating 24V dc 10mA

Contact rating 10A at 240V ac or 30V dc
Contacts 2 x sets of changeover contacts
Environmental
W
D
Physical H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Construction PC/ABS 89 150 58
Weight 0.24Kg
Compatibility
RELAY 1 RELAY 2
Suitable for use with Eaton fire systems
24V dc INPUT
Installation
1. Heavy duty relay unit fixes to a standard deep double gang back
box (supplied). NC C NO NC C NO + -
2. Cable entry is via back box, cables are terminated into heavy duty
Compatible
terminals on relay PCB. Control Panel
24V dc OUTPUT
Interface options
WARNING:
Relay is powered by an external 24V dc supply.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Heavy duty relay unit MAR724
FX range -
EN54 Pt.4 approved power supply
G case - left, P case - right
Switch mode power supply unit with 24V dc output Feature and benefits
voltage, available with a maximum output current of
1.5A, 2.5A and 5A. Switching Technology
Fault relay
The unit is a high efficiency switching power supply;
protected from overloads, polarity reversals and Tamper switch
short circuits. 4 LEDs indicate power supply status: Integral battery
mains power (green), battery charging (green), battery Fault indicator
discharged (yellow) & fault (yellow).
Small & large versions of metallic casing available
Specifically recommended as an auxiliary power supply EN54 Pt.4 Approved
unit for fire detection system components such as
Output currents available: 1.5A, 2.5A, 5A
electromagnets, notification devices, etc.
Simple to use
Using the unit in large systems eliminates the problem
Secure steel enclosure
of long power cable runs which simplifies installation.
The case comes provided with a mechanical lock and
tamper switch for opening and closing the front door.
The Power Supply Units are certified in accordance with
the standard UNI EN54-4:1997 + A1:2002 +A2:2006.
Specifiers guide
4.4 Ancilliaries
Code FX1-5ABP FX1-5ABG FX2-5ABG FX5-0ABG

Description Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply
Standards EN 60950 pt1, EN 50130 EN 60950 pt1, EN 50130 EN 60950 pt1, EN 50130 EN 60950 pt1, EN 50130
Pt 4, EN50081, EN54 Pt4, Pt 4, EN50081, EN54 Pt4, Pt 4, EN50081, EN54 Pt4, Pt 4, EN50081, EN54 Pt4,
A1:2002, A2:2006 A1:2002, A2:2006 A1:2002, A2:2006 A1:2002, A2:2006
Specification
Output voltage (-) Min 20.2, Norm 27.6, Max Min 20.2, Norm 27.6, Max Min 20.2, Norm 27.6, Max Min 20.2, Norm 27.6, Max
29.4 29.4 29.4 29.4
Load current (A) 1.3 1.3 2.2 4.4
Rechage current battery (A) 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.55
Total current (A) 1.5 1.5 2.5 5.0
Ripple (mV) 174 174 166 246
Input voltage (V~) 230 V~ -15+10%, 50/60 Hz 230 V~ -15+10%, 50/60 Hz 230 V~ -15+10%, 50/60 Hz 230 V~ -15+10%, 50/60 Hz
Current absorption (A max) 0.42 0.42 0.68 1.21
Battery (Pb) 2 x 12V 4.0 Ah 2 x 12V 4.0 Ah 2 x 12V 7.0 Ah 2 x 12V 17.0 Ah
Fuses
Switching Fs1 F2 F2 F3.15 F4
Switching Fs2 F6.3 F6.3 F6.3 F6.3
Physical
Operating temperature +5C to +40C +5C to +40C +5C to +40C +5C to +40C
Housing material Epoxy varnished sheet Epoxy varnished sheet Epoxy varnished sheet Epoxy varnished sheet
Standard equipment Two keys per lock Two keys per lock Two keys per lock Two keys per lock
Packaging 1pc. / package 1pc. / package 1pc. / package 1pc. / package
Insulation class Class I Class I Class I Class I
Ingress protection IP30 IP30 IP30 IP30
Electrical protection Fuses for mains and battery Fuses for mains and battery Fuses for mains and battery Fuses for mains and battery
overload. Short circuit in overload. Short circuit in overload. Short circuit in overload. Short circuit in
output, battery inversion. output, battery inversion. output, battery inversion. output, battery inversion.
Door opening tamper. Door opening tamper. Door opening tamper. Door opening tamper.
1. Enclosure is designed for wall mounting.
W
2. 2 x 20mm knockouts are provided for cable entry at the rear of the
enclosure.
3. A fused terminal block is provided for mains supply connection.
4. Output is protected by internal fuse (displayed in table below). D
1. FX range power supplies provide outputs between 1.5A and 5A.
2. Output is used to supply any connected load and also to recharge
the integral batteries. H
3. To enable batteries to be charged correctly maximum continuous

external load should not exceed the values displayed in the table
below.
4. LED indicators are provided to signify:
5. Mains healthy (Green) H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
6. System fault (Yellow) P Case 290 250 180
7. Battery Charging (Green) G Case 450 260 205
8. Charger output fault (Yellow)
9. Mains healthy and system fault LEDs are visible without removing
front cover.
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
24V 1.5A PSU P CASE FX1-5ABP
24V 1.5A PSU G CASE FX1-5ABG
5. Emergency voice communication systems
Specifiers guide
Emergency voice communication systems
A safety record that

speaks for itself
5.0 Emergency voice communication systems
EVCS product family 5.0 Emergency voice communication systems 5.0

Introduction............................................................................................................................... 5.1
Outstations ............................................................................................................................... 5.2
Emergency assist alarm............................................................................................................ 5.3
Specifiers guide
5.1 Introduction
An introduction to Emergency Voice

Communication systems...
This VoCALL Emergency Voice Communication System (EVCS) is designed to fully comply with BS5839 Pt9 (abb.
Pt9) for use as a fire telephone system, disabled refuge call system or as a combined system when both fire
telephones and disabled mrefuge points are required. The standard states that were both systems are fitted to a
building these should form a single msystem.
An EVCS is a fixed, monitored and maintained, bi-directional, full duplex voice communication system to assist
the orderly mevacuation of disabled or mobility impaired people and enhance fire fighters communication during
emergencies.
Allied to the fully compliant hardware, Cooper also offer software packages such as VoCALL Site Installer, allowing
global configuration of the system from any exchange on the network, and the VoCALL ReCALL, system, a real time
incident and fault logging system, which not only logs faults and the mstart and end of call incidents, it records the
conversation as well.
Standards Compliance
Designed from the outset to comply with BS5839 Pt9.
Scalable Solution
Outstations are common across the range and can be

used on both compact and network solution.
Cable Saving
By utilising a star topology for compact systems and

a ring and star topology for the network solution,
outstations can be cabled in low cost 2 core fire rated
cables.
Space Saving
By distributing the network solution, no dedicated

comms room is required, and the exchanges can be
located in risers or utility cupboards.
Highly Integrated
By allowing designers to choose the outstation type

and mix any type on a system, including emergency
assistance alarms, all EVCS and disabled calls can be
managed from a single control location, or in the case of
the network solution up to 8 points.
Site Proven VoCALL suits all sizes of installation...

With thousands of sites since the launch in 2003 you ...from 1 & 2 outstation systems to massive
can be sure of the systems reliability and longevity, all 364 line dual network systems.
the firmware is flash based, making site upgrades to
the latest version simple to implement to add the latest
software features.
Specifiers guide 5.2 Outstations
CFVCSHP - VoCALL type A outstation
The VoCALL Type A outstation is a compact unit which Features and benefits
offers easy access via a magnetic push catch door.
Compact design
The Type A outstation is compatible with all VoCALL
High volume ringer
systems for use as a standard fire telephone or disabled
refuge call point. Status LED
Telecoil for hearing impaired users
Full duplex operation
Stainless steel option
Versatility, the unit can be used on all VoCALL
systems
Dual use, the Type A outstation can be used as a fire
telephone or a disabled refuge call point
Magnetic push catch, for quick and easy access
Specifiers guide
5.2 Outstations
Technical specification Unit wiring
Code CFVCSHP
Product description VoCALL Type A outstation
Outstation cables
Type Enhanced
Cores 2 core 1mm or 1.5mm
Distance 500m
Physical
Type A Outstations are defined in BS5839 Pt9 and can be used as a fire
Construction Zintec, Powder Coated
telephone or disabled refuge call point.
Colour options Red / Stainless Steel
When choosing the outstation type for use with an EVC System we
Weight 1.4kg (IP65 lockable box 2.5kg) recommend reading section 11 of BS5839 Pt9:2011.
Installation
Mounting Surface or flush 11.1.a
Mounting height 1200mm from the finished floor level to the centre
Type A Outstations should be used for evacuation or fire fighting use
point of the unit. and a Type B Outstation should only be used where Type A Outstations
Cutout 325mm x157mm (flush mount units)
are impractical.
Clearance When units are used as refuge call points suitable
space for a wheelchair user must be allowed.
11.1.b
For disabled refuges Type A or Type B Outstations can be used, how-
ever in locations (section 11.6.k) Type B Outstations can only be used
where the background noise is below 40dBA (therefore there can be no
Unit mounting sounder or voice alarm coverage in the area).
85mm 85mm
All VoCALL Outstations are designed for use by multi-disability users,
152mm 152mm having high contrast signage in line with RNIB guidelines and an induc-
tion loop coil (to BSEN60118-4) in the outstation.
334mm
It is recommend that Type A Outstations are used in most locations,
otherwise you may have to consider acoustic hoods or 2 outstations in
each location for compliance with the other associated standards and
320mm 320mm
laws, including BS8300 and the Equality Act 2010.
191mm
1200mm* 1200mm*
Dimensions
W2 D1
W1
H1 H2
Backbox D2
H1 W1 D1 D2
Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Backbox 320 152 85 -
H2 W2 D1 D2 Catalogue numbers
Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Description Code
Flush Mounted 334 191 85 2 VoCALL Type A outstation, surface mount, red CFVCSHP
VoCALL Type A outstation, surface mount, stainless steel CFVCSHPSS
VoCALL Type A outstation, flush mount, red CFVCFHP
VoCALL Type A outstation, flush mount, stainless steel CFVCFHPSS
VoCALL Type A uncased red handset CFVCHFS
VoCALL Type A outstation, IP65 lockable, surface mount, red CFVCIPA
CFVCSHF - VoCALL type B outstation
The VoCALL Type B Outstations are designed to be Features and benefits

versatile, compact and easy to use.
Compact design
These units can be both flush (via a separate bezel) or
High volume ringer
surface mounted, have a high volume ringer, status LED
and tactile Braille signage. Status LED
20mm cable glands
Loop output for hearing impaired users
Tactile Braille signage
Full duplex operation
Flush bezel mounting available
Stainless steel option
Versatility, the unit can be used on all VoCALL
systems
Full duplex operation, allowing 2 way voice
communication
Tactile Braille signage to assist partially sighted
people to easily operate.
Specifiers guide
5.2 Outstations
Code CFVCSHF
Product description VoCALL Type B outstation
Outstation cables
Type Fire rated (some installations will require enhanced cabling, see wiring guide for details).
Cores 2 core 1mm or 1.5mm
Distance 500m
Indications & controls
Status LEDs 2 off red (flashing for location lights, solid in use)
Call button Press to call button
Cancel button Press to cancel button
Physical
Construction Zintec, powder coated
Colour options Green / red / stainless steel
Weight 1.105kg
Installation
Mounting Surface or flush
Mounting height 1000mm from the finished floor level to the centre point of the unit.
Cutout 140mm x 140mm (flush mount units)
Clearance When units are used as refuge call points suitable space for a wheelchair user must be
allowed.
Unit mounting Unit wiring

46mm Connections inside the
45mm Network / Compact Unit
135mm 135mm 1mm CSA 2 core Enhanced
135mm 135mm
Line connector on Network / Compact Unit to Type B Line -
Line + connector on Network / Compact Unit to Type B Line +
154mm
When choosing the outstation type for use with an EVC System we
recommend reading section 11 of BS5839 Pt9:2011.
1000mm* 11.1.a
1000mm*
Type A Outstations should be used for evacuation or fire fighting use
and a Type B Outstation should only be used where Type A Outstations
Dimensions are impractical.
W2 D1
11.1.b
For disabled refuges Type A or Type B Outstations can be used,
W1 however in locations (section 11.6.k) Type B Outstations can only be
used where the background noise is below 40dBA (therefore there can
H1 H2
be no sounder or voice alarm coverage in the area).
All VoCALL Outstations are designed for use by multi-disability users,
having high contrast signage in line with RNIB guidelines and an
induction loop coil (to BSEN60118-4) in the outstation.
D2
Backbox
H1 W1 D1 D2
Backbox 135 135 42 -
H2 W2 D1 D2 Catalogue numbers
Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Description Code
Flush (seperate bazel) 154 154 45 2
VoCALL Type B outstation, surface mount, red CFVCSHF
VoCALL Type B outstation, surface mount, green CFVCSHFG
VoCALL Type B outstation, surface mount, stainless steel CFVCSHFSS
VoCALL flush mounting bazel for use with any Type B CFVCFHB
outstation, stainless steel
CFVCDUO - VoCALL combined

type A and B outstation
For situations where both a fire fighting telephone and a Features and benefits
disabled refuge point are required in the same location.
In normal use the Type B green disabled refuge point BS5839 pt9 compliant
operates and rings, however if the door is opened and Monitored handset
the Fire telephone handset is lifted, a call from the Handsfree unit
handset is directed to the control point instead.
Telecoil in handset
CFVCDUO can be used with either the compact or Uses single line
network VoCALL systems and only takes one line
Flush case
position. The VoCALL Emergency Voice Communication
system (EVCS) is designed to fully comply with BS5839 Simple two core connection to controller or
pt9:2011, for use as a fire telephone, disabled refuge exchange using 1mm CSA fire rated cables
communication and disabled call system, and allows all Fire telephone automatically overrides disabled
parts to be combined into a single system. refuge point
An EVCS is a fixed, monitored and maintained, High contrast green indication of refuge point, with
bidirectional, full duplex voice communication tactile Braille to assist use
system to assist the orderly evacuation of disabled LEDs show system is operating and help to locate
or mobility impaired people and enhance firefighters the unit in poor lighting conditions
communication during emergencies.
Specifiers guide
5.2 Outstations
Technical specification Unit mounting

All handsets should be mounted at a height of either 1200mm from the
floor, or on a 1400mm centre line to comply with the requirements of
Code CFVCDUO
Building Regulations Document M (Access for the Disabled).
Description VoCALL combined type A and B outstation
Standards EMC: EN55103-1 & EN55103-2 The back box has 4 indented feet to allow mounting on uneven walls. A
LVD: EN60950
cut out of 500mm x 160mm is recommended, the front bezel has ad-
Product family: BS5839 Pt9 & BS9999 &
EN60118-4 justments to level the back box on the wall. As the units are to be used
as a refuge point suitable space must be allowed to the side of the unit
Outstation cables to allow a wheelchair to be parked for using the system.
Grade Enhanced
Cores 2 core 1mm or 1.5mm CSA When choosing the outstation type for use with an EVCS we recom-
Distance 500M mend reading section 11 of BS5839 Pt9 2011 which deals with outsta-
tion types, and states as follows:
Physical
Construction Zintec, powder coated, RAL3001 11.1.a
Dimensions 480mm x 190mm x 82mm Type A handsets should be used for evacuation or fire fighting use, and
Weight 2.6kg a Type B handsets should only be used where a type A handsets are
impractical.
11.1.b
Dimensions For disabled refuges Type A or Type B handsets can be used, however
W2 D1 in locations (section 11.6.k) Type B handsets can only be used where
the background noise is below 40dBA (therefore there can be no
sounder or voice alarm coverage in the area).
W1
VoCALL handsets are designed for use by multidisability users, having
H1 H2 high contrast signage in line with RNIB guidelines and an induction
loop coil (to BSEN60118-4) in the handset.
CFVCDUO can be used where both functions are required, and eases
compliances with other associated standards and laws, including
Backbox D2 BS8300 and the Equality Act 2010.
H1 W1 D1 D2
Backbox 480 190 82 -
H2 W2 D1 D2
Flush mounted 494 204 82 2
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
VoCALL Type A and Type B flush mount outstation CFVCDUO
CFVCRHS, CFVCRJP - VoCALL

roaming handset and jack plate
The VoCALL roaming handset is used along with the Features and benefits
jack plate for emergency voice communication system
installations in countries whose fire codes allow for Flexible roaming phone
roaming handsets (these units are not suitable for Low noise high quality telephone jack
installation in the UK under BS5839 Pt9). Telecoil for hearing impaired users
When used together the roaming handset and jack plate Full duplex operation
form a Type A outstation which is compatible with all Stainless steel jack plate
VoCALL systems.
The jack plate can be surface or flush mounted
Full duplex operation, allowing 2 way voice
communication
Specifiers guide
5.2 Outstations
Code CFVCRHS Code CFVCRJP

Product description VoCALL roaming handset Product description VoCALL jack plate
Controls Outstation cables
Call Automatic off hook dialling Type Enhanced
Connection Cores 2 core 1mm or 1.5mm
Jack plate 1/4 mono neutrik heavy duty Distance 500m
Monitoring dc open, short and earth
Physical
End of line 10K 1/4 W
Construction Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS)
UL90V1 Physical
Colour Red Construction Brushed stainless steel
Weight 0.7kg Colour Stainless Steel
Weight 0.14kg
Installation
Mounting Surface or flush
Mounting height 1000mm from the finished floor level to the centre
point of the unit.
Cutout 86mm x 86mm (flush units)
Unit mounting Jack plate wiring

25mm
Connections inside the
86mm Network / Compact Unit
- VE - VE
-
1mm CSA 2 core Enhanced IN
+
+ VE + VE
86mm - VE
10K EOL or 2 core cable
-
OUT
to next Jack Plate
+ VE
+
1000mm*
The jack plate and roaming handset are suitable for EVC System
installations in countries whose fire codes allow for roaming handsets.
Not suitable for installation in the UK under BS5839 Pt9.
Dimensions
W D

Jack Plate 86 86 25
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
VoCALL roaming handset CFVCRHS
VoCALL jack plate CFVCRJP
Specifiers guide 5.3 Emergency assist alarm
CFVCEA - emergency assist

alarm VoCALL kit
This Emergency Assist Alarm VoCALL kit has been Features and benefits
specifically designed to integrate disabled call functions
into the VoCALL network or VoCALL compact ranges Monitored to BS5839 Pt9
providing the perfect solution for conformity with the Remote powered from the VoCALL system
Building Regulations Document M and Equality Act 2010. Dual loop pull cord
Emergency Assist Alarms are required by Building High contrast labels
Regulation Document M, and by integrating it with Blue indication
the Emergency Voice Communication System all calls
Saving power, no PSU is required.
relating to disabled communications can be monitored
on the same VoCALL system. One install saves running 2 separate systems.
One location for all calls from disabled toilets and
This Emergency Assist solution is fully monitored and
refuge points monitored from one location.
battery backed by the VoCALL system, saving local
power supplies and giving confidence in the system Tactile braille signage to assist partially sighted
integrity. people to easily operate the cancel plate.
No additional equipment necessary to connect to
The Emergency Assist Alarm shows up as a call on
the VoCALL system.
the VoCALL system, but has no speech path so a
conversation cannot be had with the occupant, use of
the type B outstations would allow this.
Specifiers guide
5.3 Emergency assist alarm
System Installation Wiring

The Emergency Assist Alarm should be installed in accordance with The wiring from the VoCALL master exchange, or from the VoCALL
the recommendations of BS8300 and to the requirements of Building compact exchange consists of a single pair; this does not have to be
Regulations Approved Document M. The diagram below demonstrates fire rated, although this may be used, the link through to the pull cord
a typical layout for installation in a disabled persons toilet. is monitored and any open circuit or short will be recorded as a fault on
Note: Where pertinent other or alternative standards of design and the VoCALL system. A 10K resistor must be fitted in the pull cord unit
installation should be adhered to. for the monitoring to work. If this is not fitted then the exchange will
show open circuit fault.
All system components are designed to be sited internally and
positioned in locations where they are readily accessible by the user. Always segregate Extra Low Voltage (ELV) wiring from the mains
The area should be clean and dry. Sound and light levels allow the wiring. System requires minimum 2 core 0.4mm2 cable. All wall-
status of all device indicators and sounders to be seen and heard. mounting devices should be mounted onto a back box of the required
depth.
VoCall - -
12V + + Over Door
Unit
- Indicator
+
Pull Cord Unit -
+ Cancel
- Unit
-
+
+
Note:
1. Installer must follow schematic above when connecting to
VoCALL circuits.
2. Circuit is limited to one each of the over door indicator, pull cord,
and cancel units only.
Pull station installation System operation

To place a call - operate the pull cord. LEDs will illuminate on pull cord
unit, cancel unit and over door indicator. An internal buzzer will also
sound in the over door indicator.
Knot the cord to ensure the lowest Vocall unit will indicate emergency assist alarm activations.
ring is 100mm from the floor.
Cut off excess cord. To reset call - press the cancel button on emergency assist alarm.
Screw the
two piece connector
connector
together
100mm Catalogue numbers

Description Code
Emergency assist alarm - vocall kit CFVCEA
Emergency assist pull code unit CFEAPULL
Over door indicator CFEAODI
Cancel button CFEARSP
Pull cord accessory pack CFEACORD
Disabled sticker (pack of 5) CFEADS
CFEAPULLKIT - emergency assist

alarm stand alone kit
The Emergency Assist Alarm - stand alone kit provides Features and benefits
the perfect solution for conformity with the Building
Regulations Document M and Equality Act 2010. Complies with regulations and recommendations
Dual loop pull cord
This is a simple 2 wire system that has been specifically
designed to meet the needs of disabled service users High contrast labels
and conforms to all the relevant requirements; Disability Blue indication
Rights Commission code of practice, English Tourism Quick and simple installation, with limited cabling
Council Recommendations and RNIB signage guidelines. requirements
The use of combined high output blue LED indication High contrast printing for increased visibility
and buzzer ensures a response to the call. Tactile braille signage to assist partially sighted
The Emergency Assist Alarm - stand alone kit comprises people to easily operate the cancel plate
of all the components needed to install a fully compliant Additional plate can be added to give system
system, with additional parts available separately. flexibility
Specifiers guide
System installation Mains wiring

The Emergency Assist Alarm should be installed in accordance with The general requirement for the mains supply to the call controller is
the recommendations of BS8300 and to the requirements of Building fixed wiring, using three core cable of no less than 1mm2. This should
Regulations Approved Document M. The diagram below demonstrates be fed from an isolating switched fused spur, fused at 3A, which is
a typical layout for installation in a disabled person toilet. marked appropriately and secure from unauthorised operation.
Note: Where pertinent other or alternative standards of design and All mains wiring should be provided in accordance with the current
installation should be adhered to. edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations (BS 7671) or in accordance with
All system components are designed to be sited internally and the relevant national wiring rules.
positioned in locations where they are readily accessible by the user.
The area should be clean and dry. Sound and light levels allow the Extra low voltage (ELV) wiring
status of all device indicators and sounders to be seen and heard.
Always segregate low voltage wiring from the mains wiring. System
requires minimum 2 core 0.4mm2 cable.
All wall-mounting devices should be mounted onto a back box of the
1 required depth.
2 Wiring the unit

6
Power - -
12V + + IN Over Door
Supply
7 - Indicator
+ OUT
3 4
Pull Cord Unit -
IN Cancel
+
- Unit
-
+ OUT
10K
5
OUT IN
PSU Over door indicator
Over door indicator Cancel unit
1. Ceiling pull is surface mounted 5. The lower cord pull should be exactly Cancel unit Pull cord unit
2. The Ceiling Pull should be positioned so 100mm above floor level (remove excess
that its readily accessible from the WC or cord).
bath (where applicable). 6. The Over Door Indicator provides an
3. The Cancel Button should be positioned audible and visual signal to indicate the
so that it is reachable from the WC and a area where assistance is required.
wheelchair. 7. The Power Supply is situated in corridor System operation
4. The upper cord pull should be located and supplied via switched fuse spur.
between 800mm & 1000mm above floor Normal state Power supply unit power LED is lit.
level.
To place a call Operate the pull cord. LEDs will illuminate pull cord
unit, cancel unit and over door indicator. An internal
buzzer will also sound in the over door indicator.
Pull station installation
To reset call Press the cancel button.
Note:
1. Circuit is limited to one additional item from the Over Door
Knot the cord to ensure the lowest
Indicator, Pull Cord or Cancel units only. This circuit should be one
ring is 100mm from the floor. continuous radial type circuit with no spurs.
Cut off excess cord.
Catalogue numbers
Screw the
Description Code
two piece connector
together Emergency assist alarm - stand alone kit CFEAPULLKIT
Individual emergency assist alarm components
100mm
Low current power supply unit CFEAPSUKIT
Over door indicator CFEAODI
Pull cord accessory pack CFEACORD
CFEASL4, CFEAPSU - emergency

assist alarm 4 way splitter and PSU
The 4 way splitter unit allows up to 4 stand alone Features and benefits
disabled toilets to be monitored in one specific area.
Designed to comply with all regulations and
Staff can then, at the designated area such as a recommendations
reception or security desk, react to an alarm swiftly and
High visibility
efficiently.
Small compact design
The emergency assist power supply unit (PSU) is
Local panel acknowledge call button
designed to power the 4 way splitter.
Up to 4 disabled toilets monitored in one area
When using the 4 way splitter each disabled toilet does
Uses blue LEDs to avoid confusion
not need its own PSU as each toilet is powered by the 4
way splitter. Visibility to remote staffed areas
No mains or PSU required at each disabled toilet
The VoCALL emergency assist alarm kit can be used
using the 4 way splitter
with the 4 way splitter. The individual components of
the VoCALL emergency assist alarm kit can also be
purchased separately
Specifiers guide
Code CFEASL4 Code CFEAPSU

Description 4 Way Splitter Unit Description Power Supply Unit
Specification Specification
Output Volt free relay Mains 230V ac +10% -15%
Physical Output 12V dc (nominal)
Construction PC Battery (optional) YUASA NP 0.8Ah/12V
Dimensions (mm) H 86 x W 146 x D 39 Physical
Construction PC
Dimensions (mm) H 86 x W 146 x D 39
Wiring
The mains powered supply must be wired by a qualified person in
accordance with the latest revision on the IEE wiring regulations
(currently 17th Edition), and connected to the building mains supply
using a fused spur (fitted with a 3A fuse).
All mains wiring should be provided in accordance with the current
edition of the IEE Wiring Regs (BS 7671) or in accordance with the
relevant national wiring rules.
Always segregate Extra Low Voltage (ELV) wiring from the mains
wiring. System requires minimum 2 core 0.4mm2 cable. All wall-
mounting devices should be mounted onto a back box of the required
depth.
2 CORE CABLE
CEILING PULL CORD
CANCEL BUTTON
4 WAY SPLITTER
SL4 UNIT
(CFEASL4)
OVER DOOR
INDICATOR
L
N
E
CEILING PULL CORD
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CANCEL BUTTON

(CFEAPSU)
OVER DOOR
INDICATOR
CEILING PULL CORD
CANCEL BUTTON
OVER DOOR
INDICATOR Catalogue numbers
Description Code
4 way splitter CFEASL4
High current power supply unit CFEAPSU
CEILING PULL CORD
Emergency assist alarm - vocall kit CFVCEA
CANCEL BUTTON Over door indicator CFEAODI
OVER DOOR
INDICATOR Pull cord accessory pack CFEACORD
6. Public address and voice alarm systems
Specifiers guide
Public address and voice alarm systems
Flexible and compliant

voice distribution
6.0 Public address and voice alarm systems
Emergency microphone all call (EMA) 6.0 Public address and voice alarm systems 6.0
Introduction............................................................................................................................... 6.1
Panels ....................................................................................................................................... 6.2
Speakers.................................................................................................................................... 6.3
Specifiers guide
6.1 Introduction
An introduction to Public Address and

Voice Alarm systems...
Under BS5839 Pt.8 2013, Voice Alarm (VA) systems are recommended for all public buildings and multi-
storey buildings over four floors. VA systems are the quickest way to evacuate the public and staff from a
building.
Following fire detection, automated messages control the flow of people in stair wells and corridors
allowing an orderly evacuation without panic. These messages are supplemented by spoken messages
from the fire service or management suite confirming the validity and need to leave the building. This
positive confirmation speeds evacuation and avoids the false alarm mentality reducing the risk of death
from fire.
Specifiers guide 6.2 Panels
CFVADAU - VoCALL voice distributed

amplifier unit (DAU)
The VoCALL Voice series of voice alarm systems are Features and benefits
designed for the majority of fixed installations and are
available in several forms. Can function as a stand alone or networked system
EN54-16 and EN54-4 LPCB certified for CPR
The VoCALL voice distributed amplifier unit (DAU) is
a complete VA system, which has been developed BS5839 part 8, 2008 compliant
to replace talking sounders in many voice alarm Single or dual 50W 100V line outputs
applications. 3 Messages (65 Seconds) or 130 second with new
It is supplied in a single wall mount box which is module
complete with messages, fire interface, single or dual Dual VoCALL voice network ports
50W monitored amplifiers, power supply, monitored Eaton loop addressable option
battery charger and the ability to connect non monitored
Opto isolated fire interface (with reset) for any fire
paging and music sources directly.
panel
The boxes can be connected together using the network Wall mounted
ports so a system with up-to 128 nodes is available and
Common fault out
paged from the all call CFVAEMA fire microphones or
the CFVAMZ multi-zone panels. Paging input
Operates on CWZ fire cables
Full fault monitoring
EN54-4 battery charging and monitoring
Direct music input
Music ramping
Specifiers guide
6.2 Panels
The VoCALL Voice DAU draws the minimum of current in standby
Code CFVADAU conditions, muting the music when the AC supply fails, enabling the
Description Voice distributed amplifier unit (DAU) unit to draw a minuscule 60mA quiescent current, enabling the use of
Standards EN54-16 and EN54-4 LPCB certified 5AH commodity SLA batteries for compliance with BS5839 pt8.
Power supply and charger Connection to a fire alarm system could not be simpler; the DAU
AC input 230V ac +/- 10% 50/60 Hz appears as an addressable device on Eatons analogue addressable
Internal power supply 27.6V dc panels. For compatibility with other fire alarm CIE, the DAU has
Supply & battery Monitored
independent Alert and Evacuate inputs, which can be directly
connected to reverse monitored sounder circuits. Once activated the
Protection Deep discharge, Short, Terminal
fire alarm signals need to be de-latched by the reset input.
Temperature compensation Yes
The speaker lines are monitored using a low current DC system, which
Battery size and type 2 x 12V 5AHr
is continuous and works with the music playing. Faults reported are
Mains fuse 240V 2A HRC
open, short and earth faults. Each speaker fitted to the DAU must have
Battery fuse 6.3AF 20mm a DC blocking capacitor fitted. The use of DC monitoring allows all
Max charge current 1.1A cable types (MICC and soft skin) to be used with the system as well
Inputs as multiple spurs. Music sources can be plugged directly into the DAU
Ports 2 (in and out)
and the level of this can be set using the front panel menu. When used
with a paging microphone, the music ducks and restores gently after
Cables Each leg is 4 off 2 core cables
paging.
Background music
Sensitivity -6dBV to + 2dBV
Level range 30dB
Cables
Cables between the fire panel, emergency microphone (CFVAEMA)
Page and speakers must be fire rated for standards compliance.
Sensitivity -6dBV to + 4dBV The system is designed to run with CWZ rated SPEAKER cables
Ptt type 0V to access including Mineral Insulated types, for maximum run lengths consult the
Power +24 nominal chart in the instructions.
Speaker circuits Each speaker circuit can have up to two spurs as shown above for
Circuits 1 or 2 off 50W RMS each maximum flexibility.
Level 100V RMS (+40dBV)
Bandwidth 80 Hz to 18 KHz (-3dB full power)
Distortion 0.05% 50W 27.6V 5% 50W 22V
Messages
All messages are WindowsTM WAV files and are uploaded to the
Monitoring DC end of line (9k expected)
onboard Flash memory using a specially developed PC application and
Capacitor Typically 2.2 uF 250V DC a serial port (including USB types). The unit holds three messages, with
Fault indication Open, Short, Earth a combined playing time of over 65(130) seconds.
Protection Short, open, thermal, DC offset
Fire interface
Analogue addressable Eaton loop interface with short circuit
isolation and auto addressing
Compatible inputs 3 off isolated + 12V to +33V
Outputs 1 Relay (open on fault)
Dimensions

Voice DAU panel 400 320 180
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
50W single channel addressable DAU CFVADAU50
2 x 50W dual addressable DAU CFVADAU100
Specifiers guide 6.2 Panels
CFVAEMA - VoCALL emergency

microphone all call (EMA)
The VoCALL Voice EMA is designed to provide an all call Features and benefits
emergency microphone as the top two priorities of the
VoCALL Voice DAU network. EN54-16 CPR certified by LPCB
Dual VoCALL voice network ports
All connections are fully monitored for open, short
and earth faults and the microphone capsule is also Fully monitored
monitored for open and short conditions. Close coupled noise cancelling fist microphone
The pre-amplifier is a high quality compressor limiter, Studio quality compressor limiter
which prevents the system from being overdriven by Wall mounted enclosure
poor microphone use, it also corrects for quiet speakers. Bass and treble controls
Tone controls allow the microphone to be equalised for
Selectable 1, 2 or 3 note chime
maximum clarity and the chime is selectable (1, 2 or 3
note) and the level controlled independently of the voice Secure controls inside panel
level. Three message buttons and cancel
The CFVAEMA connects to the DAU using eight cores of Compliant high visibility signage
cable for each network port typically this will consist of BS5839 part 8, 2008 compliant
four off two core cables, the required conductor gauge is
1mm CSA. For further information on cable types, refer
to BS5839 part 8, 2008.
Specifiers guide
6.2 Panels
Code CFVAEMA
Description Emergency microphone all call
Standards EN54-16 CPR certified by LPCB
Type Dynamic close-coupled noise cancelling element
Response 100Hz to 5KHz
Sensitivity -52dB
Impedance 200
Monitoring Open and short circuit
Power
Voltage 24V nominal (18V to 35V DC)
Current 60mA Nominal
Indication & controls
Led indicators 12 off; Alert Message playing, Evac Message Playing, Test Message Playing, Speak
Now, System Busy, Microphone Fault
User controls 5 off, Microphone Push to Talk, Alert Message Play, Evac Message Play, Test
Message Play, Message Cancel
Audio controls 4 off, Microphone Level, Chime Level, Bass, Treble
Chime select 2 way Dip switch, no chime, 1,2 or 3 notes
Audio processing
Gain 54dB
Compressor Variable ratio 2:1 to limit 20:1
Attack 10mS
Release Automatic from 500mS to 1500mS
Dynamic range >60dB
THD <0.25%
Output level +4dBV Max
Physcial
Dimensions (H x W x D) 400 x 320 x 180
Weight 4.5 Kg
Protection IP30
Dimensions Paging
To Page all zones on the system pick up the microphone and press
W the button on the side, the green speak LED will light and speech can
commence, if the Yellow Busy light lights then another microphone at
the same or higher priority is already accessing the system and you are
D not allowed to broadcast.
H
Messages
To broadcast a message to all zones, simply press the message button
required, the LED beside the button will light indicating you have
started the message broadcast. All messages from the panel latch and
must be cancelled by pressing the Black cancel button, the LED for the
selected message will extinguish immediately, however the message
Description H (mm) W (mm) D (mm) will run to the end of the current cycle.
CFVAEMA 400 320 180
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Emergency microphone all call CFVAEMA
Specifiers guide 6.3 Speakers
SAFEV6-EN - Vandal resistant

loudspeaker
This series of elegant looking robust metal cabinet Features and benefits
loudspeakers are vandal resistant and are supplied with a
100 volt line transformer. Up to 100dB(A) at 10W at 1 metre
BS5839, Part 8 Compliant as standard
The units contain 2 x 20mm knock-out gland entries and
have a range of fixing holes for easy installation to wall Up to 10 watts
or ceiling. Recommended for voice evacuation systems, Vandal-resistant
these units are ideally suited for use in shopping centres, 100V/70V line transformer
prisons, schools, railway stations, etc. The SAFEV6-EN
units are supplied with 100V/70V line transformer as
standard.
Specifiers guide
6.3 Speakers
Technical specification Performance
Code SAFEV6-EN Feature SAFEV6-EN

Dimensions front and 190 x 190 x 85mm Output 100dB at 10W
depth Sensitivity 90dB at 1W
Rated power 10W IP rating IP66
Maximum power, RMS 10W
Material/Colour/finish White RAL 9010/mild steel
Sound pressure level,
power W/1m 100dB
1 W at 1 metre 90dB
Nett weight alone/with 1.8/2.0Kg
transformer
Min/max ambient 20C to + 50C
temperature
Effective frequency range 110 to 12,000Hz
Dispersion at 1,000Hz 150 conical
Terminal Ceramic block
Mounting 6mm fixing holes
Transformer power 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3.0, 6.0, 10W
tappings
Input impedance standard 40k, 20k, 13.33k, 6.66k, 3.33k, 1.66k, 1.0k
model ohms
Impedance 8 ohms
Dimensions

Vandal resistant loudspeaker 190 190 85
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Vandal resistant loudspeaker SAFEV6-EN
PAC15-EN, RAC15-EN - Sound

projector
These elegant but rugged sound projectors are Features and benefits
manufactured in an aluminium extruded case finished in
white (RAL 9010). The RAC15-EN, robust bi-directional BS5839, Part 8 Compliant as standard
speaker has a slide fitting mounting bracket whereas Up to 104dB(A) at 15W at 1 metre
the PAC 15 projector speaker has a fitted U-bracket. Up to 15 watts with multiple tappings
Incorporated in these units is a high quality dual cone
IP54
driver unit giving both clear speech and excellent
background music reproduction for many applications Rugged aluminium construction
both indoors and out. With a rugged construction, these 100V line transformer as standard
units are ideally suited for use in corridors, passageways, Options available: 8 ohms, addressable modules,
shopping centres, prisons, car parks, railway stations and special paint finish, special cable gland and tails
other public places. (including armoured and braided)
The RAC15-EN and PAC15-EN are BS 5839, Part 8
Compliant, weatherproof to IP54 and are fitted with a
100V line transformer and a 0.5m fire rated cable tail as
standard.
Additional modifications available: 8 ohm, addressable
modules, special cable tails/glands (including armoured
and braided) and special paint finishes.
Specifiers guide
6.3 Speakers
Code RAC15-EN PAC15-EN

Rated power 2 x 7.5W 15W
Maximum power, RMS 15W 20W
Material Aluminium Aluminium
Colour/finish White to RAL 9010 White to RAL 9010
Sound pressure level, power W/1m 98dB 104dB
1W at 1 metre 90dB 92dB
Nett weight 2.6Kg 2.4Kg
IP Norm 54 54
Min/max ambient temperature - 40C to 90C - 40C to 90C
Effective frequency range 140 to 20,000Hz 120 to 20,000Hz
Dispersion at 1,000Hz 130 conical 130 conical
Terminal 0.5m fire rated cable 0.5m fire rated cable
Mounting Slide bracket U bracket
Transformer power tappings 0.75, 1.1, 2.5, 3.0, 7.5, 15W 0.8, 1.3, 2.7, 4.0, 7.5, 15W
Imput impedance standard model 13.3k, 9.1k, 4.0k, 3.3k, 1.3k, 666 12.5k, 7.7k, 3.7k 2.5k 1.3k, 666 ohms
ohms
Impedance 4 ohms 8 ohms
Performance
Feature RAC15-EN PAC15-EN

Output 98dB at 15W 104dB at 20W
Sensitivity 90dB at 1W 92dB at 1W
IP rating IP54 IP54
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
Bi-directional speaker RAC15-EN
Projector speaker PAC15-EN
CM20-EN - Weatherproof column

loudspeaker
The slimline CM20-EN is a column speaker that has Features and benefits
been designed for installation with the kind of appeal
normally associated with foreground music. This robust BS5839, Part 8 Compliant as standard
but attractive loudspeaker is designed to give high quality Up to 109dB(A)
sound reproduction. Complete with an easily fitted 15, 20 and 40W units
rugged stainless steel swivel bracket arrangement this
IP65
weatherproof speaker can be used in airports, the rail
industry churches, small theatres and other places of Aluminium
entertainment. Switchable between 100V line transformer and
8 ohms
With an ingress protection rating of IP65 and BS5839,
part 8 compliant as stantard, these units represent an
affordable and elegant high quality solution for music and
speech reproduction.
Specifiers guide
6.3 Speakers
Code CM20-EN
Power 20W - 100V line / 4 ohms
Output 106dB(A) @ 20W
Sensitivity 91dB(A) @ 1W
Tappings (100V) 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, 20W
Frequency range 100-20,000
Dispersion @ 1kHz 180o Horiz / 70o Vert
Temperature - 20oC to + 50oC
Protection IP65
Cable entry Industrial version 1 x M25 entry with conduit adaptor
Pt8 - 2 x M20 entries with glands
Mounting Tilt & turn bracket
Weight 2.7kg
Material Aluminium
BS5839-8 Yes
Colour White
Performance
Feature CM20-EN
Output 101 dB at 20W
Sensitivity 88dB at 1W
IP rating IP65
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
20W weatherproof column speaker CM20-EN
MC range - Ceiling loudspeaker
Designed to be aesthetically pleasing and acoustically Features and benefits

engineered for quality sound reproduction, the MC range
of loudspeakers are ideal for general public address, BS5839, Part 8 Compliant as standard
music background and voice evacuation systems. 103 dB(A) at 10W at 1 metre
For ease of installation, the units incorporate a user- 10 watts
friendly fixing method and are supplied with a 100 volt Mild steel construction
line transformer. 100V/70V line transformer
The MC range is supplied with a firedome which can Variety of sizes
be fitted into a ceiling prior to the drive assembly, giving
the advantage of hard wiring through 2 x 20mm gland
entries.
The MC range are supplied compliant to BS5839, part 8
and come in a variety of sizes, including 4, 5 and 6.
Specifiers guide
6.3 Speakers
Code MC4-EN MC5-EN MC6-EN

Power 10W 10W 10W
Material Mild steel Mild steel Mild steel
Colour/finish White RAL 9010 White RAL 9010 White RAL 9010
Sound pressure level, power
W/1m 100dB 103dB 103dB
1W at 1 metre 90 93 93
Nett weight 0.9kg (1.5 with firedome) 1.6kg 1.8Kg
Min/max ambient temperature 20C to + 50C 20C to + 50C 20C to + 50C
Effective frequency range 140-14,000Hz 100-15,000Hz 100-15,000Hz
Dispersion at 1,000hz 140 150 conical 170 conical
Ceiling cutout required 110mm 165mm 200mm
Terminal Ceramic block Ceramic block Ceramic block
Mounting Firedome Firedome Firedome
Transformer power tappings 0.75, 1.5, 3.0, 6.0, 10W 0.75, 1.5, 3.0, 6.0, 10W 0.75, 1.5, 3.0, 6.0, 10W
Input impedance standard model 13.33k, 6.6k, 3.3k, 1.66k, 1.0k ohms 13.33k, 6.6k, 3.3k, 1.66k, 1.0k ohms 13.33k, 6.6k, 3.3k, 1.66k, 1.0k ohms
Impedance 8 ohms 8 ohms 8 ohms
Additions to bs5839, part 8 High temperature cable for unit wiring. High temperature cable for unit wiring. High temperature cable for unit wiring.
compliant unit Thermal fuse. Thermal fuse. Thermal fuse.
Line voltage 100V 70/100V 70/100V
Performance
Feature MC4-EN MC5-EN MC6-EN
Output 100 dB at 10W 103 dB at 10W 103 dB at 10W
Sensitivity 90dB at 1W 93dB at 1W 93dB at 1W
IP rating N/A N/A N/A
Catalogue numbers
Description Code
4 ceiling loudspeaker MC4-EN
7. Miscellaneous
Specifiers guide
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
ENW50 engineering specification
VESDA smoke detection systems
Optical beam smoke detectors
W15 engineering specification
7.0 Miscellaneous
7.0 Miscellaneous 7.0

EN W50 engineering specification .............................................................................................7.1
VESDA engineering specification...............................................................................................7.2
Optical beam smoke detectors..................................................................................................7.3
W15 engineering specification...................................................................................................7.4
Specifiers guide 7.1 Miscellaneous
Section 7. 1 miscellaneous
Engineering specification EN W50
1000 Performance objectives

2000 Design parameters
3000 System description
4000 Control requirements
5000 Testing and commissioning
1000 Performance objectives

Provide a fully automatic fire detection and alarm system to satisfy the area coverage, and operational and performance criteria as
outlined elsewhere in this section.
Provide central control and indication equipment, and, where specified, distributed and repeat indication facilities.
Provide audible alarms and combined audible/visual alarms of the nature and type indicated, to achieve the required sound levels and
intelligibility specified and to satisfy relevant British Standards.
Provide software system and programming, including security of stored information; and re-programming capability.
Provide dedicated power supplies to fire detection and alarm control panels, and, where required, ancillary and field devices, including
independent standby battery-charger facilities.
Undertake all testing and commissioning of the system in accordance with standard and regulatory criteria, specialised
manufacturers standard procedures, to the satisfaction of the contract administrators (CA) representative, employers
representative and local fire authority, as required. Undertake all testing and commissioning to an integrated programme with other
systems to ensure that all necessary power supplies are available, and that the correct operation of all interfaces with ancillary systems
can be proved.
Provide full record information, including testing results, operational and maintenance manuals, record drawings, zonal and address
designations and certification.
Provide demonstration and instruction to selected members of the employers staff.
Provide all system components of compatible operation, and all of a single manufacturers standard product range. Employ a
specialist fire alarm system contractor, who is LPCB approved, to select system components, undertake installation of specialist
equipment, and undertake testing, commissioning and certification.
1010 Controls and interfaces

Provide integral auxiliary control facilities and effect interfaces with other systems including BMS, ventilation plant, control panels,
mechanical plant, lifts, security access, door release units, voice alarm systems and fire telephone systems.
Section 7. 1 miscellaneous - Engineering specification EN W50
2000 Design parameters

Provide a fire detection and alarm system complying fully with the requirements of the following standards, guidelines and
recommendations.
B.S.3939 (As applicable, for control equipment and detection standards)

B.S.4422 Pt3 Fire protection equipment.
B.S.4683 Specification for electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres.
B.S.5306 Pt0 Guide for the selection of installed systems and other fire equipment.
Pt4 Specification for carbon dioxide systems
B.S.5371 Fire fighting installations and equipment on premises
B.S.5445 Components of automatic fire detection systems
B.S.5499 Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols
B.S.5750 Quality systems
B.S.5588 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of buildings
B.S.5839 Pt1: 2013 Code of practice for system design, installation and servicing. Incorporating EN54 pt 23
Pt2: 1983 Specification for manual call points.
Pt3: 1988 Specification for automatic release mechanisms for certain fire protection equipment.
Pt4: 1988 Specification for control and indicating equipment
Pt5: 1988 Specification for optical beam smoke detectors.
Pt8: 1998 Code of practice for design, installation and servicing of voice alarm systems.
Pt9:2003 Code of practice for the design, installation, commissioning and maintenance of emergency
voice communication systems.
PD6531: 1992 Queries and interpretations on BS5839 Pts1 and 4 (as amended).
B.S.6133 Code of practice for safe operation of lead acid cells and batteries.
B.S.6387 Specification for performance requirements for cables required to maintain circuit integrity
under fire conditions.
B.S.7443 Specification for sound systems for emergency purposes.
B.S.7671 Requirements for electrical installations: IEE wiring regulations, 17th edition.
B.S.7671 Guidance notes 1 through 7 inclusive
BS EN 50200: 2006 Method of test for resistance to fire of unprotected small cables for use in emergency circuits.
BS EN 54 Fire detection and alarm systems.
BSRIA Application guide 1981/1 locating fire alarm sounders for audibility.
BSRIA Application handbook 1992/3 installation, commissioning and maintenance of fire and
security systems.
CIBSE Guide Volume E: Fire Engineering.
Loss Prevention Council publications

Smoke Detectors Act 1991 (EH37)
Fire Officers Committee (FOC) rules for automatic fire alarm installations for protection of property.
2200 System parameters

System Category: [ ?? ]
Addressable System: [ Analogue Addressable ]
Spare capacity per loop: [ 20% ]
Device Addresses per loop: [ 200 ]
2300 Status of tender drawings

Ensure that all requirements for the chosen manufacturers equipment are included for in the tender package. This is to cover ancillary
components and items such as separate power supplies for bells, interface units, zone isolators etc. which are required by some systems
and not others, and for the manner in which the system is to be wired, which varies from one manufacturer to another. Determine the
requirement for additional items by reference to architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings.
3000 System description
3100 System type and configuration
3110 General
The fire detection and alarm system is to include the following items:
1. Main control and indication panel
2. Repeater panel
3. Automatic detection circuits or loops, connecting automatic detection devices, manual call points and other interface,
isolation and control devices.
4. Alarm circuits connected to audible/visual alarms.
5. Auxiliary circuits connected so as to automatically interface with other systems.
6. Networking provision
7. Printer log
The arrangement of the system components is to be as indicated on the tender drawings. The system type (and configuration) is to be
as outlined below. The system control is to be as described at Clause 4000. The system is to include all components necessary to achieve
the operational performance outlined in this specification, including all sundry relays, interfacing and interconnecting components.
3120 System type

Provide a fire detection and alarm system of the following type, or combination of types.
Analogue intelligent addressable system
Provide a system in which all automatic detectors, manual call points, alarm devices and other field and interface devices have an inbuild
short circuit isolator and are capable of being soft addressed by the panel to give a unique identification address; and in which the main
control and identification panel has a microprocessor - based, pre-programmed software system which allows identification of the
condition of all devices in the system. The automatic devices are to be of the analogue type providing an analogue indication of the
condition status, and the panel is to have a facility to recognise the analogue signals and respond in accordance with pre-selected
threshold alarm levels.
The fire detection and alarm system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001:2008 certified company and meet the term and definition in
BS EN ISO 13943 and the following shall apply:
The CIE (Control and Indicating Equipment) and peripheral devices shall be 100% manufactured by a single manufacturer
(or division thereof).
The CIE and peripheral devices shall be approved to the latest EN standard by an industry recognized and reputable third
party test house such as LPCB/VDS.
The complete system must also be approved to the latest EN54-13 and compliant with BS.5839 Part 1 2013 Code of
Practice.
3200 Main control and indication panels
3210 Self-contained panels for analogue addressable systems
3211 General
Provide a multi-zone, multi-loop main control panel of the intelligent addressable type, housing all items of control and indication equip-
ment and located and mounted as indicated on the drawings. The panel is to have a fascia layout generally as set-out in the selected man-
ufacturers standard arrangement and be of tamper-proof construction. Components, including the power supply unit are to be mounted
internally or on the front panel to provide a single integral unit. The equipment mounting is to be arranged such that the enclosure can be
fixed in position, and outgoing cables terminated, prior to the equipment being installed. The enclosure is to incorporate suitable internal
cable management such that modular components can be easily replaced. The internal layout is to be arranged to provide adequate free
space for cable
termination. Access to all terminals is to be possible with the panel in an operational state. The enclosure is to include a series of 20mm
knockouts to the top of the enclosure for termination of cable glands.
Equip the panel with all necessary controls and indication to monitor, interrogate, programme, silence, test and re-set the system. The
panel is to include facilities for full fault monitoring of all devices connected to the loop. The panel is to provide a real time graphical
representation of the analogue level of each device to aid fault diagnosis. The panel is to incorporate a 96 zone designation LED indicator
board. The panel is to be capable of indicating the exact source of the alarm condition on the display. An integrated microprocessor system
is to be provided to interpret, analyse and dispense fire alarm information. A non-volatile memory is to be provided to record all system
events, up to a maximum of 9,999 events, and hold these available for printing out or displaying on screen. The time and date of each
event is to be recorded, with sufficient data to identify the device, zone and loop. The earliest event is to be automatically discarded on
memory overrun.
Programming is to be completed by the manufacturer or manufacturers representative, including zone definition in accordance with
B.S.5839: Part 1. Each zone to be given a unique reference. The fire alarm zoning should accord as a minimum with the schedule of fire
alarm zones, duly developed by the contractor and agreed with the engineer. A colour marked up drawing showing zone areas is to be
provided at system acceptance.
Issue for comment, prior to programming, all necessary information, e.g. proposed room names and numbers. A full chart detailing device
numbers, types, loop connected, zone, address and position is to be supplied as part of the users operating and instruction manual.
Where indicated, provide facilities for connection of repeat panels. Incorporate means for disabling the link to the repeat panel(s), with
audible and visual indication when disabled.
The Main control panel must be CPR and EN54 pt13 approved by an industry recognised 3rd party test house (LPCB, VdS).
3212 Features
The panel is to incorporate the following features as a minimum
1. Interactive, touch sensitive liquid crystal display, back-lit, with a 320 x 240 mm viewable area, to enable all alarm and
fault conditions to be reported. All information is to be stored in the display memory to enable messages to be scrolled
and reviewed prior to system re-setting. The display language should be switchable to enable control information or any
system information messages to be in English or the required local language.
2. A switchable, touch sensitive liquid crystal display keypad for system interrogation, programming, device labelling and
device/zone isolation including facilities to display index, display log and review/scroll and also provision for a dedicated
PC based software package using a standard computer, keyboard and interconnection facility.
3. All necessary control cards for the number of loops required, including spare capacity.
4. System status lamp/LED indications.
5. Touch sensitive screen controls to:
Replace and add devices. Enable or disable sensors, zones, sounders, interface units.
Logs of current faults and fires. View addressable device status.
Graphical analysis of Intelligent sensor Printer status to allow On request or Auto with filtering
information. options.

Check configuration facility to identify device type Test Evacuate alarm.
mismatch and to pinpoint loop open and short Stop evacuation procedure (alarm mute)
circuit faults.
Control clock and date setting
Control the volume and tone of all addressable Cancel fault buzzer
loop powered sounders.
Disable links to other systems for test purposes.
Pulse the addressable device led status indicators Panel test/enter facility
during normal operation, or to withhold normal
operation indication. This feature must be Address isolate facility
programmable by the touch screen at access
level 3.
6. Zone identification
7. Real time graphical display of selected system address analogue level
8. Fault monitoring for all detection circuits, to cover open, short circuit and earth fault conditions, with a separate alarm
output provided for each of these conditions.
9. Supervisory buzzer.
10. Integral battery/charger power supply unit (see clause 3400)
11. An integral 40 character thermal printer to provide a hard copy of all information shown on the display, and stored
information to provide history, full or selective, of system events.
12. Real time clock.
13. All necessary operating relay/switch devices and auxiliary devices to control remote ancillary devices. (see clause 4000)
14. Sufficient quantity of terminals to receive all incoming and outgoing circuit wiring, including provision for future spare
capacity.
15. Alarm circuits, of sufficient number as outlined elsewhere, complete with continuous circuit fault monitoring facilities.
16. Instructions for user operation.
17. A zone chart identifying the building fire alarm zones, is to be mounted adjacent to the panel.
18. An output port to allow communication with a suitable computer, using RS - 232 data interchange system.
19. All necessary volt free contracts to achieve operation of ancillary systems (as outlined at clause 4200)
3240 Repeat indicating panels

The FACP shall support loop powered and networked repeaters. Network repeaters shall have a large interactive, touch sensitive, backlit,
320x240 viewable LCD screen. Repeaters shall be programmable as passive (indication only) or active (indication and control) and must be
equipped with EN54-4 approved power supplies. A number of repeater indicating panels shall be provided in the designated locations. Text
information for each device/zone shall be transmitted through the network. No programming is required at the repeater end.
A) Each network mounted repeat indicating panel is to be self-contained, have its own mains and standby power supply (or
as proposed by the respective system manufacturer), and is to provide immediate duplication of all indications displayed
on the main control and indication panel. The repeat panel display is to be identical in all regards to the main panel and
programmable as passive (indication only) or active (indication and control).
B) Each loop connected repeat indicating panel is to be self-contained, have its own mains and standby power supply (or as
proposed by the respective system manufacturer), and is to provide immediate duplication of all indications displayed on
the connected control and indication panel. The loop connected repeater panels are to have limited control function
facilities.
3300 Field devices
3310 General
Detectors are to be kept free of any contamination due to works taking place after installation and commissioning by bagging etc, and any
heads contaminated are to be replaced by the installer at no extra cost.
3311 Mounting heights

Mount items of equipment at the following typical centre line heights above floor level (except where indicated otherwise on drawings):-
1. Manual call points - 1200 mm
2. Main control and mimic panels 1500mm.
All fire alarm equipment heights to be agreed with engineer prior to commencing installation and subject to architects drawings which may
be issued post tender. Refer also to the schedule of mounting heights and agree any discrepancies with the CA prior to finalising any
installation proposals.
3312 Remote indicators

Provide remote LED indicators to indicate the operation of automatic detectors which are mounted in locations where they cannot readily
be seen (e.g. within all plant rooms, switch rooms, risers, lift motor rooms, ceiling voids and locked rooms). The remote LED indicator
units are to be connected to the respective detector back plate terminals, and be installed flush or surface to ceiling or wall boxes, as re-
quired. If more than detector is connected to the remote indicator then an addressable remote indicator shall be used.
Mount indicators above plant room entrance doors, wired to their associated detector. The Installer should note that these indicators are
not necessarily detailed on either layout drawings or system schematics. Clearly label all remote indicators as to their location and purpose.
Remote Indicators must be approved by an industry recognised 3rd party test house (LPCB, VdS).
3320 Field devices for intelligent addressable systems
3321 Detectors general

Provide automatic detectors of the type and in the locations as indicated on the drawings. Ensure each detector is of the intelligent
addressable type and capable of being individually both soft or hard addressed and have an inbuilt short circuit isolator and shall have a
360 viewing LED indicator. Smoke detectors should have drift compensation and chamber monitoring as standard.
Detectors must be CPR approved to EN54 Pt5 ,Pt7 and Pt17 by an industry recognised 3rd party test house (LPCB, VdS).
Incorporate the following facilities in each detector:-

1. Common mounting base for different types, allowing detector heads to be fully interchangeable and must not contain any
electronic parts.
2. Each detector shall comprise of three components:
Termination plate (base) for wiring termination only
Electronics module shall plug into the termination plate as a second fix item and shall house all electronic
components and circuitry including micro-processors and short circuit isolators.
Replaceable sensor chamber
3. Integral 360 viewing LED alarm indication of operation where directly visible. Remote indication is to be provided where
concealed i.e. duct sensors, lift shafts etc.
4. Capability of automatic or manual disablement for maintenance purposes.

5. Appropriate indication on main control and repeater panel when sensor removed from base.
6. Ensure removal of a detector head does not render any part of system inoperative.
All automatic detectors are to produce an analogue output which changes with smoke density or temperature. Detectors are to change
this to digital data for transmission to the processor.
All automatic detection devices are to be individually compensated, within their internal operational software, for any degradation in
performance due to ageing, dust accumulation, component characteristic change etc.
Detectors installed anywhere on any loop are to be capable of being assigned to any zone.
3322 Manual call points

Provide manual call points of the addressable type complying fully with BS 5839 : Part 2,EN54 Pt11 and Pt17 made of polycarbonate/
moulded ABS material and finished in red. All manual call points are to be of the same type. Install call points complete with suitable
inscription of operation,and provided with suitable proprietary enclosures for surface or flush mounting and internal/external locations.
Ensure each manual call point is of the intelligent addressable type and capable of being individually both soft or hard addressed and
have an inbuilt short circuit isolator .
Manual call point must be CPR approved by an industry recognised 3rd party test house (LPCB, VdS).
Incorporate the following facilities within each manual call point:

1. External test facility to operate contacts without opening manual call point.
2. An LED to indicate operation of manual call point.
3. All call points to external areas and all plant rooms to be equipped with polycarbonate flip-up front covers to prevent
accidental activation.
3323 Automatic smoke detectors

Allow for the supply and installation of smoke detectors on site as required to afford the above category of compliance.
Locate smoke detectors within 1,500mm of the fire lift fire curtains and open riser shafts.
Optical smoke detectors
Detectors are to be of the obscuration or scatter light type, capable of sensitivity adjustment via the system control panel.
3324 Automatic heat detectors

Provide heat sensors of the electronic type and specifically designed for analogue operation and capable, in a single unit, of being
utilised as fixed temperature heat detection.
The detector shall comply with the sensitivity performance of B.S. 5445.
3328 Isolation and interface devices

Short circuit (line) isolation
Short circuit isolation provision shall be within each addressable device to maintain maximum system integrity under a loop short
circuit fault condition and compliant to EN54 pt17.

Interface units
The interface units are to be of the addressable type with inbuilt short circuit isolators, connected, powered by the local loop circuit and
are to provide the required inputs / outputs for control or indication functions. Where interface units are indicated, coordinate their location
with the respective system specialist to ensure their mounting is situated at high level and as close as possible to the corresponding
specialists equipment. Label all interface units with both their function and address. Each input/output way is to be fully programmable
from the control panel and be fully monitored for open and short circuit conditions.
3329 Audible and visual alarm devices

General
Circuits are to be monitored for open circuit, earth and short circuit fault conditions by an appropriate end-of-line device.
Audible alarm devices must be CPR approved to EN54 pt3 and pt17 by an industry recognised 3rd party test house (LPCB, VdS).
Visual alarm devices (VADs)
Visual Alarm Devices (VADs) must be CPR approved to EN54 pt23 by an industry recognised 3rd party test house (LPCB, VdS). They must
have a flash rate of between 0.5Hz and 2Hz and have an output of between 1 and 500 candela. They should be either red or white flash
and the housing shall be either red or white in colour. VADs can be either conventional or addressable.
VAD quantities and layouts should be designed based upon manufacturers specified coverage and achieving a minimum of 0.4 lux above
ambient light levels in the area of application. Consideration should be given to providing VADs in WCs, bathrooms, any area where a person
who is hard of hearing or deaf may be working, where personal music systems are in use, where there is intentional reduction or limiting
of audible alarms (eg: radio broadcast studios, operating theatres) and any areas of high ambient noise particularly if hearing protection is
in use. The decision on where to place VADs should be risk assessment driven in in consultation with the end user of the building.
Refer to documents COP0001 and LPCB guidance for further information.
3400 Power supplies
3410 General

Provide separate power supplies to each item of equipment, as required, comprising a primary mains 230V a.c. supply, and a secondary/
back-up D.C. power supply unit, incorporating a battery charger, for the specified system operating voltage. Power supplies are to comply
with BS 3116: Part 4 and BS 5839: Part 1.
Power supplies are to be provided for the following items:
1. Main control and indication panel, including ancillary control and indication equipment.
2. Repeat indicator panels
3. Interface unit (where indicated by the manufacturer)
Provide fault monitoring and alarm indication for:
1. Mains power failure
2. Battery power failure
3. Charger output failure
3420 Mains power supplies

Provide a dedicated, lockable fused switch on the essential side of the main LV distribution panel, finished red in colour by the
manufacturers and labelled Fire Alarm - Do not switch off. This supply is to feed the main fire alarm control panel power supply section.
Connect the supply to equipment via an unswitched fuse connection unit, suitably labelled. Final connection to the equipment is to be
in heat-resistant LSF cable of a suitable rating enclosed within steel conduit. Label fuse connection units with details of equipment served
and include wording Fire Alarm - Do not switch off.
Ensure each supply is dedicated to particular equipment item (and does NOT feed any non-fire alarm device). The exception to this are
supplies to local disabled refuge panels and the pager system, although remote refuge panels and pager boosters will be derived from
remote distribution boards.
Label appropriate MCBs in distribution boards to emphasise supplies are serving fire alarm equipment.
3430 Battery and charger units

The secondary power supply is to comprise a fully encapsulated low maintenance type sealed lead acid battery to BS 6290. The battery
must be able to sustain full system operation for 24 hours in quiescent mode, and thereafter operate speakers in all zones for 30 minutes
continuously in the event of mains failure.
Battery impedance should be continually monitored by the control panel as per the requirements of EN54-4
Battery chargers to be high quality constant potential type, with temperature compensation. Charging voltages and currents are to be
checked and recorded during commissioning.
3500 Installation and wiring arrangement

Provide the fire alarm system installation with a totally independent, separated and segregated wiring system in accordance with
B.S. 5839: Part 1 2002 and B.S. 7671: 2008 (17th Edition IEE Wiring Regulations). The system shall use the same cable type throughout,
sourced from a single manufacturer. The cable manufacturer is to be BASEC approved. The cable type is to be LPCB approved.
Soft skinned cabling type
Utilise soft skinned cabling suitable for enhanced protection only between loop interface units and ancillary systems. Provide additional
steel conduit protection to this cable where used in plant rooms, within walls to protect against mechanical damage.
All cables associated with the fire alarm installation shall be of fire resistant 2 core 1.5mm2 screened type. Cables shall comply with
BS 7629: 1993 and BS 6387. The use of a 4 core cable for the addressable loop circuit must be specifically avoided.
The cable for use on the fire alarm addressable loop circuit shall be of the following type and specification, and shall typically not exceed
2 km per circuit:
The cable is to comply with BS 6387 having typically no more than 2 cores.
A maximum of 0.5F inter-core capacitance.
Each core having no less than 1.5mm2 cross sectional area with an inherent or thorough metal conduit screen for earth
continuity in order to produce electrical protection & screening and having protection from heat and mechanical damage.
The cable screen must be suitable for through termination at each system device whilst maintaining separation from
building earth.
Multi core cables having more than 2 cores shall not be allowed for loop wiring due to inadequate separation and likely
interference problems.
Provide all cabling for the complete system of the 600V mineral insulated copper covered (MICV) type with a red LSF outer sheath.
Provide minimum cable sizes of 1.5mm for detection, actuation and speaker circuits.
3512 Wiring arrangement

Where practical the two cables forming the loop are to follow separate routes to ensure integrity of the system in accordance with
BS 5839.
Ensure that the maximum number of addresses allowed to be connected on each loop is not exceeded, and allows a minimum of 20%
spare capacity.
Ensure that the routes of each leg of each loop cable are segregated from each other, in order to reduce loss of entire fire alarm loop
in the event of short or open circuit or earth fault occurring, and that only one cable leg can be affected by a fault.
4 core loop cables are not permitted.
3520 Installation
Install the cabling fixed to walls using dedicated cable systems. The installation arrangement is to allow a practical means for future rewir-
ing of the system.
Single or twin runs of cable in ceiling voids may be clipped direct to the structure. Where more than two cables follow a common route,
include for the installation of a cable tray spaced off the soffit by suitable galvanised brackets. Cable trays are not to be installed
inverted but where this is unachievable and subject to the agreement of the engineer, allow for supporting the cables through stainless
steel cable ties.
Adhere to the installation standards set down in Section Y of this specification for the installation of the wiring system.
Earth all fire alarm system cabling in accordance with the requirements of BS 7671 and Section Y of the specification.
Install the wiring system concealed/flush other than in plant areas. The installer is responsible for the final positioning and installation
co-ordination of all system cabling and components together with the marking out of all associated builders works.
Install all cables in a manner such that they are physically continuous throughout the length of each circuit other than where connection is
made at the terminations of a system component. No other cable connections or joints are to be used.
Provide the final connections to all the system components via suitable conduit boxes fixed flush with the underside of the ceiling or, flush
in the walls, except in plant areas where the installation shall be surface.
Provide all necessary cabling from the main fire alarm panels to the appropriate MCCs, lift control panels, etc. and liaise fully with the
installers of those systems to effect satisfactory connections and operation.
These services may either be wired directly from the fire alarm panels, or may utilise the appropriate detector/alarm circuit loops, via
suitable interface units, if required. Cabling shall be sized appropriate to the switching systems operation requirements.
3600 Automatic dial-out facility

The fire detection and alarm system is to be provided with an automatic facility for the automatic call out of the sites security team via
a speech dialler.
4000 Control requirements
4100 System operation

Provide cause and effect software control as follows and ensure operating latency / propagation delays do not exceed 10 seconds as
EN54 pt2 requirements.
In the event of a fire activation, the fire control panel should immediately initiate the evacuation sequence.
4200 Control interfaces
4210 Auxiliary systems control and monitoring

Provide all necessary relay and termination facilities within the respective control and indication panels to achieve the requirements
specified.
Ensure the fire alarm system contains a sufficient number of volt free contacts suitable for monitoring by other systems. Arrange for the
other systems to initiate the appropriate action in the event of fire or fault signals being initiated, as indicated by the cause and effect
schedule.
Ensure the volt free contacts are capable of switching the current and voltage of the auxiliary systems input.
Wire these services directly from the fire alarm panel, using cabling sized appropriately to the switching system operation requirements,
and liaise fully with the specialist installers of those systems to effect satisfactory connections and operations.
All relays to be powered from the fire detection system supply.
5000 Testing and commissioning
5100 General
Carry out, on completion of the installation works, together with the selected specialist equipment manufacturers, the complete testing,
commissioning and demonstration of the system operation as detailed below.
Make available suitable operatives, familiar with the fire detection system, as may be required to assist the manufacturer throughout
the commissioning period.
Ensure that CAD record drawings of fire alarm systems are completed and available on site to manufacturers prior to commissioning
commencement.
Provide all specialist equipment to test and demonstrate automatic operation of all items linked to the fire detection system.
Prepare a schedule of tests to be applied to the system to demonstrate that the fault diagnostic routines function as required. The tests to
be largely composed of simulated faults that are artificially imposed on the system. All visual units, alphanumeric displays, and printers to be
checked to establish that all programmed messages are displayed correctly.
5200 Tests to be conducted
5210 Prior to commissioning

Prior to commissioning the following tests are to be carried out:
1. A visual inspection of the whole of the installation, covering equipment and cabling in subways, walkways, crawl ways,
ceilings and floor voids where accessible.
2. Insulation resistance tests to cover all circuits forming part of the system and made between phases, phase to neutral,
phase to earth and neutral to earth. Ensure that the method of undertaking insulation resistance tests do not adversely
affect any sensitive system components, and if required, isolate sensitive devices prior to undertaking the tests.
3. Correct polarity of the alarm devices, bells sirens, klaxons etc., and all items where correctness of polarity is essential.
5220 During commissioning

During commissioning testing is to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS 5839 and is to include, but not be limited to,
the following:
1. The operation of all panels, accessories and items of equipment and a check for proper function, including such items as
may have been supplied by others but wired under the electrical installation. These tests are to be made under normal
operating conditions, including the discharge and recharging of the battery system, and the results noted.
2. Functional test of all manual break glasses.
3. Functional test of all smoke detectors by use of an approved smoke generator testing device.
4. Functional test of all fixed temperature or rate of rise heat detectors by an approved heat source testing device.
5. Simulated tests for fire or fault alarm at detectors and manual contacts as may be instructed by the Engineer, with all tests
agreed and recorded onto a system check list to be approved prior to any witness testing being carried out.
6. Testing of all sprinkler sensors and fusible link units.
7. Testing of all visual indicators under simulated operational conditions with speakers out of circuit.
8. Simulated operation of mechanical plant where such faults (if any) are required to operate fire alarm system (e.g. fire/
smoke dampers).

9. Five simulated faults, at randomly chosen locations on each loop circuit and speaker interface secondary circuit, for
each of the following type:-
1. Open circuit
2. Short circuit
3. Sensor removal/alarm device removal
4. Earth fault
10. Simulated charger and battery faults for all power supply units (panels, interface units, etc.), followed by a battery
discharge test (i.e. 24 hour quiescent detection of the full alarm system, followed by 30 minutes alarm operation).
Ensure that during routine fire alarm system test, certain functions are inhibited i.e. gas supply shut-off valve, smoke damper operation
etc. Provide suitable key switch facilities.
5300 Audibility and intelligibility tests

Carry out, prior to full commissioning of the rest of the system, the following tests:-
1. Fully test the fire alarm system audible alarm facility to ensure that the correct audibility levels are achieved as required
by the relevant Standards.
2. Conduct tests in the presence of the Engineer and Fire Officer.
3. Carry out tests on completion of the installation when all mechanical plant is fully functioning to ensure that realistic
results are obtained, including all normal background noise levels.
4. Measure and record the sound pressure level in each room, area or plant space. Carry out a number of tests and
record in each area to obtain average values.
5. Inform the Engineer, in writing, of any area where the required audibility or intelligibility levels are not achieved.
Arrange for the manufacturer to carry out the audibility tests twice. Carry out the first test on completion of the system when all
mechanical plant is fully functioning to ensure that realistic results are obtained. Carry out the second test approximately six months later
when the building is operating under normal conditions. Carry out both tests in the presence of the CA.
Include within the tender cost for the provision of any additional sounder and wiring required following audibility and intelligibility testing.
5400 Procedure
1. Carry out the full tests listed above. Thereafter, fully demonstrate the complete operation of the system to the satisfaction
of the client and fire officer.
2. Arrange presence on site of all specialist equipment (including smoke generation equipment) suitably calibrated, necessary
to simulate tests on fire alarm equipment and systems connected to same.
3. Ensure all test equipment instructions and instruments are available during installation and testing.
5500 Documentation
1. Provide the required fire alarm system test certificate(s), to be issued by the specialist manufacturer, in the forms, as
detailed in BS 5839 and other relevant standards.
2. Record all audibility and intelligibility test results and present in tabulated form.
3. Issue copies of all documentation including the above to the engineer for comment prior to inclusion in final handover
documentation.
4. Provide maintenance/instruction manuals in the form of hard cover binder detailing the whole operation of the fire alarm
systems, recommended regular testing and maintenance in accordance with the requirements of the specification.

5. Bind one set of fire alarm system record drawings in the manual, using clear plastic sleeves and in accordance with the
requirements of the specification.
6. Forward all above documents to the engineer for comment prior to handover.
7. Provide two copies (or the number specified in the Prelims) of final version of manual, incorporating copies of BS test
certificates, and test results, at final handover.
8. Provide a full set of zoning diagrams to depict the exact zoning arrangement as required by the British Standards. Frame,
glaze and mount adjacent to the main panel and repeater panel in agreed positions to facilitate clear recognition of alarm
condition location.
9. Programme the fire alarm system to ensure all detectors are in the correct zone. Base the zoning arrangement on the
arrangement shown on the drawings and/or as required by the BS. Allow for making minor adjustments to the zoning
arrangement to suit the final position of the fire doors and other zone boundaries. Agree all such adjustments with the
Architect.
5600 Fire alarm system instruction

1. Allow for the equipment manufacturers to provide a minimum of one full days instruction of the complete system for
the Employers representative after the contract completion date.
2. Include a practical demonstration of the installation and equipment. Arrange the required demonstration and agree the
time and dates with regard to the overall project programme works.
3. Ensure that As Fitted drawings and manuals are available before the demonstration and instructions.
5700 Spare components

Ensure the undernoted items are provided as SPARES, and handed over at completion of the project. Ensure all items are new, unused
and contained within the manufacturers standard packaging and suitably labelled as to type and use. Provide typewritten schedules
detailing the quantities supplied of each item. Handover all spares in one consignment. Obtain signature for receipt.
Ensure spares quantities are 10% (ten per cent) with a minimum of 5 (five) of any one type and or rating.
Ensure spares generally comprise:-

1. End of line resistors or diodes.
2. Smoke detectors (each type as installed).
3. Heat detectors (each type as installed).
4. Frangible elements or glasses for manual call points (minimum quantity 10).
5. Sounders (each type as installed).
6. Special keys for testing or operating equipment.
7. Fuses or other safety devices contained within the fire alarm panel(s).
8. Spare detection bases.
9. All similar necessary spares associated with any extinguishing system installed.
Agree all spares requirements for each particular project with the engineer.
7.2 Miscellaneous
VESDA aspirating system 7.2 Engineering specification VESDA 7.2

Design guidelines ...................................................................................................................7.2.1
HSLASD...................................................................................................................................7.2.2
VLC..........................................................................................................................................7.2.3
VLF-250....................................................................................................................................7.2.4
VLF-500....................................................................................................................................7.2.5
VLP..........................................................................................................................................7.2.6
VLS..........................................................................................................................................7.2.7
VSM4.......................................................................................................................................7.2.8
Model comparison chart..........................................................................................................7.2.9
Section 7. 2.1 VESDA - Air sampling smoke detection (ASD)
The following are guidelines only.

You should be fully aware of British Standards relating to correct fire system design.
EN54 Part 20
Product standard for Aspirating Systems.
Classification of systems:
Class A High Sensitivity Computer rooms/Telco Maximum Pipe Lengths

etc - VLP/VLS aggregate 200 m with single
Class B Enhanced Sensitivity Earlier detection pipes no more than 100 m. However,
for intervention/large open spaces/dilution of smoke consider longer pipes assuming transport
Class C Normal Sensitivity for maintenance/ time is met.
hostile/discrete apps. All VESDA products meet - VLC single pipe 80 m, two branches 50 m
EN54 Part 20 Class A, B and C. BS5839 1 : 2002 each
Fire detection and fi re alarm systems for buildings - VLF-250 25 m or two branches of 15 m
Maximum Fire Zone = 2000 sqm each
Maximum area of coverage of one VESDA Sample - VLF-500 50 m or two branches of 30 m
Hole = 100 sqm each
- 7.5 m from fi xed object - VFT-15 50 m each pipe. All pipes must be
- Grid Scheme 5m from walls, 10 m between the same length.
pipes and holes Maximum allowed transport time from last sampling
Maximum area coverage of VESDA detectors hole is 120 seconds
- VLP/VLS = 2000 sqm During design estimate at 1 m/s for transport time.
- VLC = 1000 sqm Design for FIA COP Smoke Pellet Test as the
- VLF-250 = 250 sqm performance test during hand over.
- VLF-500 = 500 sqm
- VFT-15 = 15 micro bore pipes for 15 points
of detection.

BS6266 2002 Code of practice for fire protection for electronic equipment installations
Maximum Fire Zone there is no specifi ed limit but Maximum allowed transport time from last sampling
aim for to of BS5839 Fire Zone hole is 120 seconds. However, for EN54:20 Class A
Maximum area of coverage of one VESDA Sample applications, we would advise 60 seconds or less.
Hole = 25 sqm based on general room protection. Anything more than this will impact on EN54:20
However, floor voids can be less check BS6266. compliance.
- Grid Scheme 2.5 m from walls, 5 m between During design estimate at 1 m/s for transport time.
pipes and holes AHU return air grille or Pressure Relief Vents should
Maximum area coverage of VESDA detectors. be protected to ensure highsensitivity detection.
Linked to bullet 1 - Typical AHU is 1.5 x 0.8 m
- VLP/VLS = 1000 sqm - Typical AHU would have 6 sample holes
- VLC = 500 sqm - Ideally one AHU per VESDA pipe
- VLF-250 = 125 sqm - Maximum 4 x AHU per LaserPLUS
- VLF-500 = 250 sqm - Allow for pipe removal if access required
- VFT-15 = 15 individual sample points ideal through grille
for cabinets etc. Design for FIA COP Wire Burn Test as the
Maximum Pipe Lengths. Linked to bullet 1 performance test during hand over.
- VLP/VLS aim for 60 m max. - 1 m for most computer rooms
- VLC aim for 50 m max
- VLF-250 25 m or two branches of 15 m
each
- VLF-500 50 m or two branches of 30 m
each
- VFT-15 15 pipes of 50 m each. Pipes must
be the same.

Section 7. 2.2 HSLASD - General engineering specification
Part 1
The control unit will continuously monitor for blockages and/or
General disconnection of tubes on an individual sector basis. The unit will
enable the user to normalize flow readings to a nominal 100% for
The HSLASD system will consist of a central housing with 15 micro- each sector. The unit will have default and configurable high and
bore pipes that are routed to the protected area. The minimum mi- low flow thresholds and configurable delays for each threshold.
cro-bore pipe length allowed by the system will be 50 m (164 ft),
covering a maximum of 1500 m2 (16150 ft2). The system will
actively sample air from this area into the housing where a la- Part 2
ser-based smoke detector is located, with a sensitivity to detect
smoke with a density of 0.001%Obs/m (0.0003%Obs/ft). The opti- Product specific
cal chamber will be field serviceable without need for recalibration
or speciality equipment. The removable chamber will include a The housing will be constructed of a robust metal and plastic
two-stage particle filter. materials meeting all relevant flammability requirements. The unit
will have tamper proof screws preventing unauthorised access.
Alarm states will be shown on the display panel and an audible
warning will be given. The unit will employ an in-line filter to remove dust particles from
the air sample and shall enable simple on-site filter replacement
The unit will be approved by VdS with EN54-20 compliance, without use of any speciality tools. The HSLASD will allow closed
approved by FM and listed by UL. loop sampling whereby the exhausted air will be completely
returned to the sampled area.
The unit will be placed at a convenient height for ease of use.
The unit will provide a programming facility through a display or PC
Principal of operation based software that may also be used for monitoring and
configuration procedures. The unit will provide an RS232 port to
The system will use a high performance vacuum pump with a download all the data that is logged within the unit. It will be
minimum pressure of 0.7 bar to sample air through micro-bore possible to view and retrieve all detector and user events or trends
flexible tubes at near-ambient pressure. The smoke detector will collected over a period of time and stored in the event log. The
be of an integrating mass particle detection nephelometer type event log will store at least 4000 events. When equipped with a
using a laser as the light source. TCP/IP module, the event log will store at least 20000 events.
The detector will provide a direct (absolute) measurement of Programming

obscuration, without attempting relative scaling or other
compensation for contamination of the chamber. The units will be programmed through a software package
connecting to the RS232 port or remotely through Ethernet or
Samples from all inlets (sectors) will be combined as an overall RS485.
sample in the inlet manifold, filtered, and fed to the smoke
detector. If smoke is detected and the obscuration is determined The software will allow at least the following actions and settings:
to exceed a preset nonalarm level of smoke density (TRACE
Perform flow normalization (when the detector is
threshold), the detector will sequentially scan the sectors using
not in alarm)
a rotary valve to determine the source of the event. If the smoke
level is then determined to exceed a preset alarm level, the Set Flow Fault delay period
detector will signal to the host panel or other monitoring equipment Set High and Low limits set for Flow Fault
after a configurable time delay. thresholds
Set Day sensitivity
There will be at least four stages of Alarm: ALERT, ACTION, FIRE1
and FIRE2 and another smoke density level, TRACE, set below the Reset and Isolate the detector
ALERT alarm level to initiate the scanning sequence. It will be Silence the sounder
possible to set different levels for TRACE, ALERT, ACTION, FIRE1 The unit will record engineering values during manufacture and
and FIRE2 Alarm levels and delay times. The respective relay operation such as:
outputs and indications can be set to latched or unlatched.
Software version
Calibration and ambient pollution compensation Sample flow through the detector
Log of flow changes
Unlike traditional point detectors, background compensation or Measurements of sample flow rates for each
floating background compensation algorithms within the sen- sector
sor will not be accepted; particularly as real events below 0.03
%Obs/m (0.009%Obs/ft) might otherwise be masked. % Obscuration
Flow monitoring Settings for a 4-20mA output module
Section 7. 2.2 HSLASD - Product specification

Inputs and outputs faults. Individual faults will also be shown by
specific fault indicators. The
The unit shall be externally powered at 24 VDC to be provided by an FAULT relay contacts will follow the state of this
EN54-4 or UL1481 or ULC 527 approved power supply. There will indicator.
be an Auxiliary 24 VDC output supply (fused to 1 A) for powering
an external devices. GENERAL FAULT (flash on/off) Detector EEP
ROM is faulty.
It will be possible to remotely reset the unit by applying 24 VDC to PROCESSOR RESET Processor has been reset
a dedicated input. FLOW FAULT Flow rate for any sector is outside
the bounds set by the High and Low flow limits.
The unit will provide an RS485 port for remote operation, as well
ASPIRATION FAULT Rotary valve is faulty.
as a RS232 connection for conducting Test/Configuration functions
and interrogation of the fault log data. DETECTOR FAULT Laser smoke detector has
developed a fault
The unit will provide an Ethernet connection for connecting to a COMMUNICATION FAULT Part of the internal
host computer. With this capability, the unit will support remote RS485 communication link is faulty.
monitoring and control of all detector functions. HOLD Unit has been set to sample from only
The unit will provide at least 5 relay outputs reflecting ALERT, one sector.
ACTION, FIRE1 and FIRE2 alarm status. There will be a common
fail-safe relay for fault signalling. UNLOCK An access code has been entered and
some functions for the detector are now enabled.
The system will support any mix of at least 2 self-declaring I/O ALERT, ACTION, FIRE 1 and FIRE 2 A smoke
modules. These can be of the following types, an 8-channel density exceeding the respective alarm level has
4-20mA-output module, or a 4-way SPDT relay module. been detected. The alarm LEDs will operate in
tandem with corresponding relays on the I/O board
The 8-channel 4-20mA-output module will have a minimum 16-bit to indicate progressive levels of smoke. They will
resolution. be programmable for both obscuration level and
time delay.
Display Smoke density bar graph
Status display Display for the smoke density
The display board will enable the following user functions as a
value and all SETUP and CONFIGURE procedures.
minimum:
Indication of the sector that is currently being
ACCEPT Switches the internal sounder off and monitored.
acknowledges all current alarm states while
leaving all other warning mechanisms to continue
Environmental
unchanged. New alarm events will cause the
sounder to revert to continuous operation.
The units will have an IP30 rating and operate at an ambient tempera-
SOUNDER SILENCE Switches the internal ture range of at least 0C to 39C (32 to 103 F) at a relative humidity
sounder off until one or more new alarm events of 10-95% RH (non-condensing). The detector will be tested to a tem-
occur. perature range of -10C to 55C (14 to 131 F) and be able to sample
RESET Clears all latched alarms and faults. air with a temperature ranging from -20C to 60C (4 to 140 F). Prod-
Current Alarms or Faults will remain. uct UL listed for use from 0 C to 38 C (32 F to 100 F).
ISOLATE Disables alarm relays so that Alarm
Accessories
and/or Fault conditions will not be reported back to
the Host Panel. It is intended for use when
All tubes, accessories and fittings will be supplied by the same
diagnosing faults, testing new installations etc.
manufacturer to guarantee optimum fitting.
TEST Scrolls through date, time and performs a
LED test where all LED segments are illuminated. Remote displays
Control and configuration buttons Enables all
local user-interface operations, which are also It will be possible to connect one Remote Display to each unit, and
accessible a software package. the Remote Display will mimic allcontrol functions of the main unit.
Pipe modeling software

The display board will have the following indicators as a minimum:
The system shall have adequate software to determine transport
SAMPLE, ALARM and FAULT indicators for each times for each sampling point.
sector.
POWER Power supply is ON
GENERAL FAULT Detector has one or more
Section 7. 2.3 VLC - Engineering specification
Scope Local codes and standards

System description
This document provides specification details of the VESDA VLC Air
sampling Smoke Detection (ASD) products to assist in their Design requirements
installation and commissioning.
1. Shall consist of a highly sensitive LASER-based
System information smoke detector, aspirator and filter.
2. It shall have a display featuring LEDs and a Reset/
General Isolate button. The system shall be configured by a
Programmer that is either portable or PC based.
A Very Early Warning Smoke Detection System similar to the
VESDA VLC System shall be installed throughout the areas The system shall allow programming of:
nominated on the drawings.
Up to three smoke threshold alarm levels;
The system shall consist of highly sensitive LASER-based Smoke
time delays;
Detectors with aspirators connected to networks of sampling pipes.
faults including airflow, detector, power, filter as
When required, an optional remote Display unit shall be provided well as an indication of the urgency of the fault;
to monitor each detector, and a Programmer shall be supplied to three relay outputs for remote indication of alarm
configure the system. and fault conditions.
Approvals 3. It shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to

transport air to the detection system, supported by
The Very Early Warning Smoke Detection System must be of a calculations from a computer-based design
type submitted to, tested, approved, and/or listed by a Nationally modelling tool.
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as follows: 4. Optional equipment may include intelligent remote
displays and/or a high level interface with the
UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc), USA building fire alarm system, or a dedicated Xtralis
ULC (Underwriters Laboratories Canada), Canada VSM graphics package.
FM (Factory Mutual)USA
5. Performance Requirements
FM approved for Hazardous Locations Class 1,
Shall be tested and approved to cover up to
Div.2, Groups A, B, C, D (3020906), USA
800m2 (8,000 sq.ft)
CSFM (California State Fire Marshall), USA
Shall be approved to provide very early warning
LPCB (Loss Prevention Certification Board), UK
smoke detection and provide up to three output
ActivFire, Australia levels corresponding to Alert (optional), Pre-Alarm
VdS (Verband der Sachversicherer e. V.), Germany and Fire. These levels shall be programmable and
AFNOR, France able to be set at sensitivities ranging from
VNIIPO, Russia 0.005-20% obs/m (0.00156% obs/ft). For
compliance to UL approval range is 0.0015-
CFE, China
4% obsc/ft.
KFI, Korea
Shall report any fault on the unit by using
configurable fault relay outputs or via VSM.
When used within the EU, the system shall be formally approved
by a notified body (such as VdS or LPCB) to EN54-20 Class A, Shall be self monitoring for filter contamination.
B and C and shall carry appropriate CE marking to confirm this ap- Shall incorporate a flow sensor in the pipe inlet
proval. port and provide staged airflow faults.
Codes, standards or regulations Submittals
The VLC smoke detector shall be installed to comply with one or Product data and site drawings shall be submitted and shall include
more of the following codes or standards: pipe layout, operational calculations (ASPIRE2) and performance
criteria.
AS 1670.1-2004, AS1603.8 1996, ASNZS 3000
Fire Industry Association (FIA), Code of Practice for A copy of the manufacturers installation, operation and
Design, Installation, Commissioning & Maintenance maintenance manuals shall be supplied upon completion of the
of Aspirating Smoke Detector (ASD) Systems installation.
NFPA Standards, US
System commissioning data shall be supplied (in a format
NEC Standards, US
recommended by the manufacturer and per the instructions
NZS 4512 : 2003 provided by the manufacturer) within 30 days of completion of the
installation.
Section 7. 2.3 VLC - Quality assurance

Qualifications
1. Manufacturer
The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years production experience in the manufacture and design of high
sensitivity air sampling smoke detection systems.
The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting ISO 9001:2008 for manufacturing.
2. Technology
Both Light Scattering and Particle Counting shall be utilized in this device as follows:
The Laser Detection Chamber shall be of the mass Light Scattering type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke
particle types of varying size. A particle counting method shall be employed for the purposes of:
preventing large particles from affecting the true smoke reading.
monitoring contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to automatically notify when maintenance is required.
Note: The particle counting circuitry shall not be used for the purpose of smoke density measurement.
The Laser Detection Chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary clean air feed from the filter; providing clean air barriers across criti-
cal detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination.
The detector shall not use adaptive algorithms to adjust the sensitivity from that set during commissioning. A learning tool shall be pro-
vided to ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm thresholds during the commissioning process.
3. Equipment supplier
The equipment supplier shall be authorized and trained by the manufacturer to calculate/design, install, test and maintain
the air sampling system and shall be able to produce a certificate stating such on request.
Section 7. 2.3 VLC - Products

Supplier Manufactured unit(s)
Cooper Lighting & Safety The VESDA VLC ASD system is available in the following
Wheatley Hall Road configurations:
Doncaster
DN2 4NB Part Number Description
UK VLC-500 Detector with relay interfacing (RO)
Telephone: +1302 303999 VLC-505 Detector with relay interfacing and VESDAnet
Fax: +1302 303332 capability (VN)
Detector assembly
1. The detector, filter, aspirator and relay outputs shall be housed in a mounting box and shall be arranged in such a way
that air is drawn from the fire risk area and a sample passed through the dual stage filter and detector by the aspirator.
2. The detector shall be LASER-based type and shall have an obscuration sensitivity range of 0.005-20% obs/m (0.0015
6% obs/ft).
3. The detector shall have up to three independent field programmable smoke alarm thresholds across its sensitivity
range with adjustable time delays for each threshold between 0-60 seconds.
4. The detector shall also incorporate the facility to transmit a fault either via VESDAnet or relay.
5. The detector shall have a single pipe inlet which must contain a flow sensor. Both minor and urgent flow faults for both
high and low shall be reported.
6. The filter must be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be capable of filtering particles in excess
of 20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultra-fine, removing more than 99% of contaminant
particles of 0.3microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detectors optics to prevent contamination
and increase service life.
7. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed rotary vane air pump. It shall be capable of allowing for multiple sampling pipe
runs up to 80m (260 ft) in total with a transport time per applicable local codes.
8. The Assembly must contain relays for alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall be software programmable (latching or
non-latching). The relays must be rated at 2 AMP at 30 VDC. Remote relays shall be offered as an option and either
configured to replicate those on the detector or programmed differently.
9. The assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions and
faults. The date and time of each even shall be recorded. Each detector (zone) shall be capable of storing up to 12,000 events.
Displays

1. The detector will be provided with LED indicators only.
2. Each detector shall provide the following features at a minimum:
Independent high intensity alarm indicators for pre-alarm and fire (alert indicated by the pre-alarm LED flashing)
corresponding to the alarm thresholds of the detector.
Fault indicator.
OK indicator.
Isolate indicator.
A single button supporting the following features:
a. Reset (a single push of the button) unlatches all latched alarm conditions on the assigned VLC zone.
b. Isolate (push and hold) Isolates the individual VLC zone (inhibits Alarm relay and initiates the Fault relay to
indicate the disabled state).
A remotely mounted display may be optionally equipped with 7 configurable relays for signalling alarm and fault
conditions.
The remote display shall be able to identify faults originating in the particular VLC zone (Zone Fault), those produced by the overall smoke
detection system or from those resulting from network wiring errors (Network Fault). LED indicators shall be provided for each fault category.
Programmers
1. When required, a programmer module may be in a remote mounting box, a 19 inch remote rack, or in a portable hand-held
unit (VN version). Alternatively, programming may be performed using a Windows application running on a PC connected
through a High Level Interfacing unit (PC-Link HLI) for VN.

2. Each programmer shall support the following features at a minimum:
Programming of any device on the VESDAnet Programmable energized or de-energized relays.
system. Programmable high and low flow settings for airflow
Viewing of the status of any device in the supervision.
system. Programmable aspirator speed control.
Adjustment of the alarm thresholds of a Programmable maintenance intervals.
nominated detector.
Facilities for referencing with time dilution compensation.
Initiation of AutoLearn, to automatically
configure the detectors alarm threshold Testing of relays assigned to a specific zone to aid
settings to suit the current environment. commissioning.
Multi-level password control.

Programmable latching or non-latching relay
operation.
Device networking requirements

1. The devices in the smoke detection system shall be capable of communicating with each other via twisted pair RS485
cable. The network shall be able to support up to 200 devices (detectors, displays and programmers), of which 100
detectors can be supported.
2. The network shall be capable of being configured in a fault tolerant loop for both short circuit and open circuit. Any
communication faults shall be reported unambiguously and shall be clearly attributable to an individual device or wire
link in the fault messages.
3. PC based configuration tools shall be available to configure and manage the network of detectors.
Digital communication port
Shall comply with EIA RS485 Protocol.
Application
Detection alarm levels
The laser based ASD system shall have four (4) independently programmable alarm thresholds.
The four alarm levels may be used as follows:
Alarm level 1 (Alert) Alarm level 2 (Action)

Activate a visual and audible alarm in the fire risk area. Activate the electrical/electronic equipment shutdown relay and
activate visual and audible alarms in the Security Office or other ap-
Alarm level 3 (Fire 1) propriate location.
Initiates an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control Panel to call
the Fire Brigade and activate all warning systems. Alarm level 4 (Fire 2)
Activate a suppression system and/or other suitable countermeasures.
Note: The alarm level functions as listed are possible scenarios. Consideration should be given to the best utilization of these facilities for each application
and the requirements of local authorities (e.g. Authorities Having Jurisdiction in the US).
Note: When used within the EU, alarm thresholds shall be configured to achieve the required sensitivity class (A, B or C).

Initial detection alarm settings Sampling pipe design
Initial settings for the alarm levels shall be determined by the Sampling pipe
requirements of the fire zone. However, the setting for Fire 1
(Alarm Level 3) shall always appear as 100% on the bar graph 1. The sampling pipe shall be smooth bore. Normally,
scale. Default settings of the unit shall be: pipe with an outside diameter (OD) of 25mm or
Alarm Level 1 (Alert) 0.08% obs/m (0.025% obs/ft) 1.05 and internal diameter (ID) of 21mm or
Alarm Level 2 (Action) 0.14% obs/m (0.0448% obs/ft) should be used.
Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1) 0.20% obs/m (0.0625% obs/ft)
2. The pipe material should be suitable for the
Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2) 2.0% obs/m (0.625% obs/ft) environment in which it is installed, or should be
the material as required by the specifying body
Initial (factory default) alarm delay thresholds (e.g. in the US, VESDA pipe material shall be
UL 1887 Plenum rated CPVC).
Initial (factory default) settings for the alarm delay threshold shall
be: 3. All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight and
Alarm Level 1 (Alert) 10 seconds made by using solvent cement, except at entry to
the detector.
Alarm Level 2 (Action) 10 seconds
Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1) 10 seconds 4. The pipe shall be identified as air sampling/
Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2) 10 seconds aspirating smoke detector pipe (or similar wording)
along its entire length at regular intervals not
Fault Alarm 5 seconds exceeding the manufacturers recommendation or
that of local codes and standards.
Fault alarms
5. All pipes should be supported at not less than
The detector fault relay shall be connected to the appropriate alarm 1.5m (5ft) centers, or that of the local codes or
zone on the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) in such a way that a standards.
detector fault would register a fault condition on the FACP. The
minor fault and Isolate relays shall also be connected to the 6. The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be
appropriate control system. fitted with an end-cap and made air-tight by using
solvent cement. Use of an end vent will be
(Check local codes, standards or regulations to determine whether dependent on ASPIRE2 calculations.
compliance with this set up is required).
Sampling holes
Power supply and batteries
1. Sampling holes shall not be separated by more
The system shall be powered from a regulated supply of nominally than the maximum distance allowed for
24V DC. The battery charger and battery shall comply with the conventional point detectors as specified in the
relevant codes, standards or regulations. Typically 24 hours local codes and standards. Intervals may vary
standby battery backup is required followed by 30 minutes in an according to calculations. For AS1670.1 -2004 the
alarm condition. maximum allowable distance is 10.2m. For FIA the
maximum allowable distance is 10.6m. For NFPA
Local power supply standards that may apply: the maximum allowable distance is 30ft.
UL 1481 listed -provided the power supply and standby batteries 2. Each sampling point port shall be identified in
have been appropriately sized / rated to accommodate the accordance with codes or standards.
systems power requirements.
3. Consideration shall be given to the manufacturers
US telecommunication central office power supply - the system recommendations and standards in relation to the
shall operate on negative 48 VDC (provided continuously from the number of sampling points and the distance of the
telephone central office power source) converted to 24VDC. sampling points from the ceiling or roof structure
and forced ventilation systems.
EN 54-4 approved power supply for use in Europe.
4. Sample port size shall be as specified by ASPIRE2
In accordance with AS 1670.1-2004 and NZS4512: 2003. calculations.
Section 7. 2.3 VLC - Installation

The detection system
The contractor shall install the system in accordance with the manufacturers system design manual.
The capillary sampling network
1. Where false ceilings are installed, the sampling pipe shall be installed above the ceiling, and capillary sampling points shall
be installed on the ceiling and connected by means of a capillary tube.
2. The typical internal diameter of the capillary tube shall be 5mm or 3/8, the maximum length of the capillary tube shall be
8m (26ft) unless the manufacturer in consultation with the engineer have specified otherwise.
3. The capillary tube shall terminate at a ceiling sampling point specifically designed and approved by the manufacturer. The
performance characteristics of the sampling points shall be taken into account during the system design.
Air sampling pipe network calculations

Air sampling pipe network calculations shall be provided by air sampling pipe network modelling program such as ASPIRE2. Pipe network
calculations shall be supplied with the proposed pipe layout design to indicate the following performance criteria:
Transport time System checks
Wherever possible the transport time (i.e. the time taken by smoke 1. Visually check all pipes to ensure that all joints,
sampled to reach the detector) for the least favourable sampling fittings, bends, sampling points, etc., comply with
point shall be less than 60 seconds for open hole sampling and the specification.
less than 90 seconds for capillary tubes. Longer transport times
may be tolerated where long pipe runs are required and where 2. Check the system to ensure the following features
local codes and standards permit. are operational and programmed in accordance
with the specification:
Local codes and standards may also apply. For example: Alarm threshold levels (for both day and night
settings),
AS1670, Part 1 Australia 90 Seconds Pipes in use,
FIA Code of Practice UK 120 Seconds Detector address,
NFPA 72 The Americas 120 Seconds Display address,
NFPA 76 The Americas 60 Second Clock and date,
Time delays,
When used within the EU the maximum transport times shall
be in accordance with the limits approved under EN54-20 i.e. Air flow fault thresholds,
VLP = 60 seconds for Class A, 90 seconds for Class B and 120 Display buttons operable (mode, silence,
seconds for Class C. reset, isolate),
Referencing
Balance %
Units set to U.S./S.I. (for US only) or metric for
The sample point balance for the pipe shall not be less than other regions
70% as indicated by ASPIRE2. That is, the volume of air drawn 3. Check to ensure that all ancillary warning devices
from the last sampling point shall not be less than 70% of the operate as specified.
average volume of air through the other holes.
4. Check interconnection with fire alarm control
Commissioning tests panel to ensure correct operation.
1. The contractor shall allow for the manufacturers Tests

representative to attend commissioning of the
entire installation in the presence of the owner 1. Introduce smoke into the detector assembly to
and/or its representative. provide a basic Go / No-Go functional test.
2. All necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials 2. Verify that transport time from farthest sampling
and labour shall be provided by the Contractor. port does not exceed the local code requirements.
3. The contractor shall record all tests and system
3. Activate the appropriate fire alarm zones and
configuration and a copy of these results shall be
advise all concerned that the system is fully
retained on site in the system log book.
operational. Fill out the logbook and commissioning
report accordingly
Section 7. 2.4 VLF - 250 - Engineering specification
Scope
This document provides specification details of the VESDA VLF-250 air sampling smoke detection (ASD) products to assist in their
System information
General
A very early warning smoke detection system similar to the VESDA VLF-250 System shall be installed throughout the areas nominated on
the drawings.
The system consists of highly sensitive laser based smoke detector using aspirated air sampling and is connected to sampling pipes. It
shall be provided with a single sample pipe inlet, internal flow monitoring, smoke detection and a facility for exhaust pipe connection.
Reset, disable, test and fault determination functions will be available via the field service access door. System configuration will be
provided through autoLearn smoke and flow functions, also available via the field service access door.
The system shall support pre-engineered sampling pipe network designs with verified calculations in addition to custom sampling pipe
network designs using a computer based design modeling tool. Sampling pipe material shall be UL 1887 approved for use in air sampling
smoke detection systems.
Approvals
The very early warning smoke detection system must be of a type submitted to, tested, approved, and/or listed by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory (NRTL) as follows:
UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc), USA
ULC (Underwriters Laboratories Canada), Canada
FM (Factory Mutual), USA
ActivFire, Australia
VdS (Verband der Sachversicherer e. V.), Germany
AFNOR, France
VNIIPO, Russia
CFE, China
KFI, Korea
When used within the EU, the system shall be formally approved by a notified body (such as VdS or LPCB) to EN54-20 Class A, B and C
and shall carry appropriate CE marking to confirm this approval.
Codes, standards or regulations
The VLS smoke detector shall be installed to comply with one or more of the following codes or standards:
AS 1670.1-2004, AS1603.8 1996, ASNZS 3000
Fire industry association (FIA), code of practice for design, installation,
Commissioning & maintenance of aspirating smoke detector (ASD) systems
NFPA standards, US
NEC standards, US
NZS 4512 : 2003
Local codes and standards
Section 7. 2.4 VLF - 250 - System description

Design requirements The detector shall provide fault indication on the
unit using the Instant Fault Finder function.
1. The detector shall consist of a highly sensitive laser
The detector shall be self monitoring for filter
based smoke detector, an aspirator, and a contamination.
dual-stage filter cartridge.
The detector shall provide staged airflow faults via
2. The detector shall have control switches for reset, the use of an ultrasonic flow sensor in the pipe
disable, test and restricted access switches for inlet port.
alarm setup and flow setup.
3. The detector shall have individual illuminated
indicators for:
Submittals
Four alarm levels (Alert, Action, Fire1 & Fire 2). Product data and site drawings shall be submitted and shall include
Fault, power & disabled. pipe layout, operational calculations (refer to the product guide for
simple pre-engineered designs, or use ASPIRE2) and performance
Alarm setup and flow setup.
criteria.
4. The detector shall have a front-panel, 10 segment,
illuminated, yellow coloured circular smoke dial for A copy of the manufacturers installation, operation and
the purpose of indicating current smoke level and maintenance manuals shall be supplied upon completion of the
detector status. installation.
5. The detector shall have individual relay outputs for System commissioning data shall be supplied (in a format
fault, action and fire 1. recommended by the manufacturer and per the instructions
6. The detector shall have an RS232-compatible serial provided by the manufacturer) within 30 days of completion of the
control port for the purpose of configuration, installation.
control, status monitoring, event log extraction and
upgrade.
Quality assurance
7. The detector shall provide for the addition of one
interface card. Qualifications
8. The detector shall provide a general-purpose input
to allow either: reset, disable, reset & disable, 1. Manufacturer
standby, external and night time thresholds.
The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years
9. The detector may also be configured by a PC and production experience in the manufacturer and design of
allow programming of four smoke threshold alarm high sensitivity air sampling smoke detection systems.
levels, time delays, faults including airflow, The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting
detector, power and filter as well as an indication ISO 9001:2008 for manufacturing.
of the urgency of the fault and three relay outputs
2. Technology
for remote indication of alarm and fault.
The laser detection chamber shall be of the mass light scattering
10. The detector shall consist of an air sampling pipe
type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types
network to transport air to the detection system
of varying size.
and support pre-engineered designs. Complex
designs are supported by calculations from a A smoke-hours method shall be used for the purpose of monitoring
computer-based design-modelling tool. contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to automatically notify
when maintenance is required.
11. The detector shall incorporate an ultrasonic flow
sensor in the pipe inlet port for airflow monitoring The laser detection chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary
purposes. clean air feed from the filter; providing clean air barriers across
critical detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination.
Performance requirements
The detector shall not use adaptive algorithms to adjust the
The detector shall be NRTL listed and approved to sensitivity from that set during commissioning. A learning tool
cover up to 250m2 (2,500 sq.ft). shall be provided to ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm
thresholds during the commissioning process.
The detector shall be approved to provide very
early warning smoke detection and provide up to 3. Equipment supplier
four output levels corresponding to alert, action, The equipment supplier shall be authorized and trained by the
fire 1 and fire 2. These levels shall be manufacturer to calculate/design, install, test and maintain the air
programmable and able to be set at sensitivities sampling system and shall be able to produce a certificate stating
ranging from 0.025-20% obs/m (0.0086.25% such on request.
obs/ft).
Section 7. 2.4 VLF - 250 - Products

Supplier Manufactured unit(s)
Cooper Lighting & Safety
The VESDA VLF-250 ASD system (Part Number VLF-250-XX).
Wheatley Hall Road Many configurations are possible; typical configurations are:
Doncaster
Part Number Description
DN2 4NB
VLF-250-00 English Display and Euro language set
UK
VLF-250-01 International Display and Euro language set
Telephone: +44 (0)1302 303999
VLF-250-02 International Display and Asian language set
Fax: +44 (0)1302 303332 VLF-250-03 International Display and Scandinavian language set
VLF-250-04 International Display and Russian language set
VLF-250-05 International Display and Eastern Euro language set
Detector assembly
1. The detector, filter, aspirator and relay outputs shall be housed in a mounting box and shall be arranged in such a
way that air is drawn from the fire risk area and a sample passed through the dual stage filter and detector by the
Aspirator.
2. The detector shall be LASER-based type and shall have an obscuration sensitivity range of 0.025-20% obs/m (0.008
6.25% obs/ft).
3. The detector shall have four independent field programmable smoke alarm thresholds across its sensitivity range with
adjustable time delays for each threshold between 0-60 seconds.
4. The detector shall also incorporate the facility to transmit a fault either via a relay or via a VESDAnet card as an option.
5. The detector shall have a single pipe inlet that must contain an ultrasonic flow sensor. High flow fault (urgent and non-
urgent) and low flow fault (urgent and non-urgent) can be reported.
6. The filter must be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be capable of filtering particles in excess
of 20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultra-fine, removing more than 99% of contaminant
particles of 0.3 microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detectors optics to prevent contamination
and increase service life.
7. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed aspirator assembly.
8. VESDA VLF-250 when using pre-engineered sampling pipe networks shall be capable of supporting a single pipe run
of 25m (80ft), or two pipe runs of 15m (50ft), with a transport time per applicable local codes. Custom sampling pipe
network designs shall be supported using ASPIRE2 calculation software.
9. The assembly must contain relays for basic alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall be software programmable
(latching or non-latching). The relays must be rated at 2 A at 30 VDC. Remote relays shall be offered as an option with
a VESDAnet interface card and either configured to replicate those on the detector or programmed differently.
10. The assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall have separate event log storage for smoke levels,
alarm conditions, operator actions and faults. The date and time of each event shall be recorded. Each detector (zone)
shall be capable of storing up to 18,000 events.
Displays
1. The detector will be provided with LED indicators

Alert, action, fire 1 and Fire 2 corresponding to the alarm thresholds of the detector.
Circular smoke dial display to represent the level of smoke present in protected area.
Fault indicator.
Power indicator.
Disabled indicator.
Buttons supporting the following features shall be accessible to authorized personnel:
a. Reset (press and release) un-latches all latched alarm and faults.

b. Disable (press and release) disables the fire relay outputs from actuating and indicates a fault.

c. Test (press and release) simulates a Fire 1 condition.
Device networking requirements (VESDAnet card required)
cable with the addition of a VESDAnet Interface card (VIC-010). The network shall be able to support up to 200 devices
(detectors, displays and programmers), of which 100 detectors can be supported.
2. Backward compatibility with VESDA Laser Product via VESDAnet card.
3. The unit shall be capable of being configured in a fault tolerant loop for both short circuit and open circuit.

1. An RS 232 compatible serial port will be provided on the detector for configuration, status monitoring, command input,
event log extraction and software upgrades. It shall comply with EIA RS232 Protocol.
2. The unit shall support an open detector control protocol (ODCP) for connection to 3rd party embedded devices. The
ODCP shall provide the following:
Alarm status for all VLF alarm levels
Current smoke level
Current flow level (% flow and litres/min)
VLF Detector state (running, disable & standby)
Fault status
Remaining days for filter life
Smoke threshold levels
Detectors product ID (serial number)
Reset
Disable
Standby
Normalise
Set smoke thresholds
Section 7. 2.4 VLF - 250 - Application

The standard laser based air sampling detection system is supplied with two alarm relay outputs (Alert and Fire 1). For four-relay alarm lev-
els use the optional relay interface card (VIC-020 or VIC-030).
The standard alarm outputs may be used as follows:
Alert (Alarm level 1) Fire (Alarm level 3)

Activate a visual and audible alarm in the fire risk area. Activate a visual and audible alarm in the fire risk area.
The additional alarm outputs, with the optional relay interface card may be used as follows:
Action (Alarm level 2) Fire 2 (Alarm level 4)

Activates the electrical/electronic equipment shutdown relay and Initiates an alarm condition in the fire alarm control panel to call
activates visual and audible alarms in the security office or other the fire brigade and activate all warning systems.
appropriate location.
Note: The alarm level functions as listed are possible scenarios. Consideration should be given to the best utilization of these facilities for each application and
the requirements of local authorities (e.g. Authorities Having Jurisdiction in the US).
Initial detection alarm settings
Initial settings for the alarm levels shall be determined by the requirements of the fire zone. Default settings of the unit shall be:

Alarm level 1 (Alert) 0.08% obs/m (0.025% obs/ft)

Alarm level 2 (Action) 0.14% obs/m (0.0448% obs/ft)

Alarm level 3 (Fire 1) 0.20% obs/m (0.0625% obs/ft)

Initial (factory default) alarm delay thresholds
Initial (factory default) settings for the alarm delay threshold shall be:

Alarm level 1 (Alert) 10 seconds

Alarm level 2 (Action) 10 seconds

Alarm level 3 (Fire 1) 10 seconds


Fault alarm 5 seconds
Fault alarms
The detector fault relay shall be connected to the appropriate alarm zone on the fire alarm control panel (FACP) in such a way that a
detector fault would register a fault condition on the FACP. The fault relay shall also be connected to the appropriate control system.
(Check local codes, standards or regulations to determine whether compliance with this set up is required).
The system shall be powered from a regulated supply of nominally 24V DC. The battery charger and battery shall comply with the relevant
Codes, standards or regulations. Typically 24 hours standby battery backup is required followed by 30 minutes in an alarm condition.
Local power supply standards that may apply:

UL 1481 listed -provided the power supply and standby batteries have been appropriately sized / rated to accommodate
the systems power requirements.
US Telecommunication central office power supply- the system shall operate on negative 48 VDC (provided continuously
from the telephone central office power source) converted to 24VDC.
In accordance with AS 1670.1-2004 and NZS4512: 2003
Sampling pipe design

Sampling pipe
1. The sampling pipe shall be smooth bore. Normally, pipe with an outside diameter (OD) of 25mm or 1.05 and internal
diameter (ID) of 21mm or should be used.
2. The pipe material should be suitable for the environment in which it is installed, or should be the material as required by
the specifying body (e.g. in the US, VESDA pipe material shall be UL 1887 Plenum rated CPVC).
3. All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight and made by using solvent cement, except at entry to the detector.
4. The pipe shall be identified as air sampling/aspirating smoke detector pipe (or similar wording) along its entire length at
regular intervals not exceeding the manufacturers recommendation or that of local codes and standards.
5. All pipes should be supported at not less than 1.5m (5ft) centers, or that of the local codes or standards.
6. The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be fitted with an end-cap and made air-tight by using solvent cement. Use of
an end-cap will be dependent on ASPIRE2 calculations.
Sampling holes
1. Sampling holes shall not be separated by more than the maximum distance allowed for conventional point detectors as
specified in the local codes and standards. Intervals may vary according to calculations. For AS1670.1 -2004 the maximum
allowable distance is 10.2m. For FIA the maximum allowable distance is 10.6m. For NFPA the maximum allowable distance is 30ft.
2. Each sampling point port shall be identified in accordance with codes or standards.
3. Consideration shall be given to the manufacturers recommendations and standards in relation to the number of sampling
points and the distance of the sampling points from the ceiling or roof structure and forced ventilation systems.
4. Sample port size shall be as specified by ASPIRE2 calculations.
Section 7. 2.4 VLF - 250 - Installation

The contractor shall install the system in accordance with the manufacturers System Design Manual.

8m (26 ft) unless the manufacturer in consultation with the engineer have specified otherwise.
performancene characteristics of the sampling points shall be taken into account during the system design.

Pre-engineered pipe network setups are provided in the VESDA VLF-250 product guide. For specific performance requirements that fall
outside the preengineered designs, a sampling pipe aspiration-modelling program such as ASPIRE2 shall provide air sampling pipe network
calculations. Pipe calculations shall be supplied with the proposed pipe layout design to indicate the following performance criteria:
Air sampling pipe network calculations continued

Transport time
Wherever possible the transport time (i.e. the time taken by smoke sampled to reach the detector) for the least favourable sampling point
shall be less than 60 seconds for open hole sampling and less than 90 seconds for capillary tubes.
Longer transport times may be tolerated where long pipe runs are required and where local codes and standards permit.
Local codes and standards may also apply. For example:

AS1670, Part 1 Australia 90 Seconds

FIA Code of Practice UK 120 Seconds

NFPA 72 The Americas 120 Seconds

When used within the EU the maximum transport times shall be in accordance with the limits approved under EN54-20 i.e. VLF-250 = 60
seconds for Class A, 60 seconds for Class B and 60 seconds for Class C.
Balance %
The sample point balance for the pipe shall not be less than 70% as indicated by ASPIRE2. That is, the volume of air drawn from the last
sampling point shall not be less than 70% of the average volume of air through the other holes.
Commissioning tests

1. The contractor shall allow for the manufacturers representative to attend commissioning of the entire installation in the
presence of the owner and/or its representative.
2. All necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials and labor shall be provided by the contractor.
3. The contractor shall record all tests and system calibrations and a copy of these results shall be retained on site in the
system log book.
System checks
1. Visually check all pipes to ensure that all joints, fittings, bends, sampling points, etc., comply with the specification.
2. Check the system to ensure the following features are operational and programmed in accordance with the specification.
Alarm threshold levels (for both day and night settings),
Detector address
Time and date,
Time delays,
Air flow fault thresholds,
External buttons operable (reset / disable / test / instant fault finder, autolearn smoke and autolearn flow),
Referencing (if VESDAnet card is used),

Units set to U.S./S.I. (for US only) or metric for other regions
3. Check to ensure that all ancillary warning devices operate as specified.
4. Check interconnection with fire alarm control panel to ensure correct operation.
Tests
1. Introduce smoke into the detector assembly to provide a basic Go / No-Go functional test.
2. Verify that transport time from farthest sampling port does not exceed the local code requirements.
3. Activate the appropriate fire alarm zones and advise all concerned that the system is fully operational. Fill out the logbook
and commissioning report accordingly.
Section 7. 2.5 VLF - 500 - Engineering specification
Scope
This document provides specification details of the VESDA VLF-500 Air Sampling Smoke Detection (ASD) products to assist in their
System information
General
A very early warning smoke detection system similar to the VESDA VLF-500 System shall be installed throughout the areas nominated on
the drawings.
The system consists of highly sensitive laser based smoke detector using aspirated air sampling and is connected to sampling pipes. It
shall be provided with a single sample pipe inlet, internal flow monitoring, smoke detection and a facility for exhaust pipe connection.
Reset, disable, test and fault determination functions will be available via the field service access door. System configuration will be
provided through auto learn smoke and flow functions, also available via the field service access door.
The system shall support pre-engineered sampling pipe network designs with verified calculations in addition to custom sampling pipe
network designs using a computer based design modeling tool. Sampling pipe material shall be UL 1887 approved for use in air sampling
smoke detection systems.
Approvals
The very early warning smoke detection system must be of a type submitted to, tested, approved, and/or listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as follows:

FM approved for Hazardous Locations, Class 1, Div.2, Groups A, B, C, D(3020906), USA
AFNOR, France
VNIIPO, Russia
CFE, China
KFI, Korea
The VLF-500 smoke detector shall be installed to comply with one or more of the following codes or standards:
AS 1670.1-2004, AS1603.8 1996, , ASNZS 3000

Fire Industry Association (FIA), Code of Practice for Design, Installation,
Commissioning & Maintenance of Aspirating Smoke Detector (ASD) Systems
NFPA Standards, US
NEC Standards, US
NZS 4512 : 2003
Section 7. 2.5 VLF - 500 - System description

Design requirements
1. The detector shall consist of a highly sensitive laser based smoke detector, an aspirator, and a dual-stage filter cartridge.
2. The detector shall have control switches for reset, disable, test and restricted access switches for alarm setup and flow setup.
3. The detector shall have individual illuminated indicators for:
Four alarm levels (alert, action, fire1 & fire 2).
Fault, power & disabled.
Alarm setup and flow setup.
4. The detector shall have a front-panel, 10 segment, illuminated, yellow colored circular smoke dial for the purpose of
indicating current smoke level and detector status.
5. The detector shall have individual relay outputs for fault, action and fire 1.
6. The detector shall have an RS232-compatible serial control port for the purpose of configuration, control, status
monitoring, event log extraction and upgrade.
7. The detector shall provide for the addition of one interface card.
8. The detector shall provide a general-purpose input to allow either: reset, disable, reset & disable, standby, external and
night time thresholds.
9. The detector may also be configured by a PC and allow programming of four smoke threshold alarm levels, time delays,
faults including airflow, detector, power and filter as well as an indication of the urgency of the fault and three relay
outputs for remote indication of alarm and fault.
10. The detector shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the detection system and support pre
engineered designs. Complex designs are supported by calculations from a computer-based design-modeling tool.
11. The detector shall incorporate an ultrasonic flow sensor in the pipe inlet port for airflow monitoring purposes.
The detector shall be NRTL listed and approved to cover up to 500m2 (5,000 sq.ft).
The detector shall be approved to provide very early warning smoke detection and provide up to four output levels
corresponding to Alert, Action, Fire 1 and Fire 2. These levels shall be programmable and able to be set at sensitivities
ranging from 0.025-20% obs/m (0.0086.25% obs/ft).
The detector shall provide fault indication on the unit using the Instant fault finder function.
The detector shall be self monitoring for filter contamination.
The detector shall provide staged airflow faults via the use of an ultrasonic flow sensor in the pipe inlet port.
Submittals
Product data and site drawings shall be submitted and shall include pipe layout, operational calculations (refer to the product guide for
simple pre-engineered designs, or use ASPIRE2) and performance criteria.
A copy of the manufacturers installation, operation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied upon completion of the installation.
System commissioning data shall be supplied (in a format recommended by the manufacturer and per the instructions provided by the
manufacturer) within 30 days of completion of the installation.
Quality assurance
1. Manufacturer The laser detection chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary
The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years production clean air feed from the filter; providing clean air barriers across
experience in the manufacturer and design of high sensitivity air critical detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination.
sampling smoke detection systems. The detector shall not use adaptive algorithms to adjust the
The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting ISO 9001:2008 for sensitivity from that set during commissioning. A learning tool
manufacturing. shall be provided to ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm
2. Technology
The laser detection chamber shall be of the mass light scattering 3. Equipment supplier
type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types The equipment supplier shall be authorized and trained by the man-
of varying size. ufacturer to calculate/design, install, test and maintain the air sam-
A smoke-hours method shall be used for the purpose of monitoring pling system and shall be able to produce a certificate stating such
contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to automatically notify on request.

Supplier

Wheatley Hall Road
Doncaster
DN2 4NB
UK
Telephone: +1302 303999
Fax: +1302 303332
Detector assembly
2. The detector shall be LASER-based type and shall have an obscuration sensitivity range of 0.025-20% obs/m (0.0086.25%
obs/ft).
4. The detector shall also incorporate the facility to transmit a fault either via a relay or via a VESDAnet card as an option.
5. The detector shall have a single pipe inlet that must contain an ultrasonic flow sensor. High flow fault (urgent and
non-urgent) and low flow fault (urgent and non-urgent) can be reported.
6. The filter must be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be capable of filtering particles in excess of
20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultra-fine, removing more than 99% of contaminant particles of
0.3 microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detectors optics to prevent contamination and increase
service life.
7. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed aspirator assembly.
8. VESDA VLF-500 when using pre-engineered sampling pipe networks shall be capable of supporting a single pipe run of
50m (150ft), or two pipe runs of 30m (90ft), with a transport time per applicable local codes. Custom sampling pipe
network designs shall be supported using ASPIRE2 calculation software.
9. The assembly must contain relays for basic alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall be software programmable
(latching or non-latching). The relays must be rated at 2A at 30 VDC. Remote relays shall be offered as an option with a
VESDAnet Interface card and either configured to replicate those on the detector or programmed differently.
10. The assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall have separate event log storage for smoke levels, alarm
conditions, operator actions and faults. The date and time of each event shall be recorded. Each detector (zone) shall be
capable of storing up to 18,000 events.g errors (network fault). LED indicators shall be provided for each fault category.
Displays
1. The detector will be provided with LED indicators.
Alert, action, fire 1 and fire 2 corresponding to the alarm thresholds of the detector.
Circular smoke dial display to represent the level of smoke present in protected area.
Fault indicator.
Power indicator.
Disabled indicator.
Buttons supporting the following features shall be accessible to authorized personnel:
a. Reset (press and release) un-latches all latched alarm and faults.

b. Disable (press and release) disables the fire relay outputs from actuating and indicates a fault.
c. Test (press and release) simulates a Fire 1 condition.

Device networking requirements (VESDAnet card required)
cable with the addition of a VESDAnet Interface card (VIC-010). The network shall be able to support up to 200 devices
(detectors, displays and programmers), of which 100 detectors can be supported.
2. Backward compatibility with VESDA laser product via VESDAnet card.
3. The unit shall be capable of being configured in a fault tolerant loop for both short circuit and open circuit.

1. An RS 232 compatible serial port will be provided on the detector for configuration, status monitoring, command input,
event log extraction and software upgrades. It shall comply with EIA RS232 Protocol.
2. The unit shall support an open detector control protocol (ODCP) for connection to 3rd party embedded devices. The
ODCP shall provide the following:
Alarm status for all VLF alarm levels
Current smoke level
Current flow level (% flow and litres/min)
VLF detector state (running, disable & standby)
Fault status
Remaining days for filter life
Smoke threshold levels
Detectors product ID (serial number)
Reset
Disable
Standby
Normalise
Set smoke thresholds

Detection Alarm Levels
The standard laser based air sampling detection system is supplied with two alarm relay outputs (Alert and Fire 1). For four-relay alarm
levels use the optional relay interface card (VIC-020 or VIC-030). The standard alarm outputs may be used as follows:

Activate a visual and audible alarm in the fire risk area. Activate an alarm condition in the fire alarm control panel to call
the Fire Brigade and activate all warning systems

Activates the electrical/electronic equipment shutdown relay and Activate a suppression system and/or other suitable
activates visual and audible alarms in the Security Office or other countermeasures (e.g. evacuation action or shutdown of sys-
appropriate location. tems).





Alarm level 1 (Alert) 10 seconds

Alarm level 2 (Action) 10 seconds



Fault alarms
(check local codes, standards or regulations to determine whether compliance with this set up is required).
codes, standards or regulations. Typically 24 hours standby battery backup is required followed by 30 minutes in an alarm condition.
UL 1481 Listed -provided the power supply and standby batteries have been appropriately sized/rated to accommodate the
US telecommunication central office power supply- the system shall operate on negative 48 VDC (provided continuously
Section 7. 2.5 VLF - 500 - products

Sampling pipe
4. The pipe shall be identified as Air Sampling/Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe (or similar wording) along its entire length at
Sampling holes
1. Sampling holes shall not be separated by more than the maximum distance allowed for conventional point detectors as
specified in the local codes and standards. Intervals may vary according to calculations. For AS1670.1 -2004 the maximum
allowable distance is 10.2m. For FIA the maximum allowable distance is 10.6m. For NFPA the maximum allowable distance is 30ft.
3. Consideration shall be given to the manufacturers recommendations and standards in relation to the number of
sampling points and the distance of the sampling points from the ceiling or roof structure and forced ventilation systems.


8m (26ft) unless the manufacturer in consultation with the engineer have specified otherwise
performancene characteristics of the sampling points shall be taken into account during the system design.

Pre-engineered pipe network setups are provided in the VESDA VLF-500 Product Guide. For specific performance requirements that fall
outside the preengineered designs, a sampling pipe aspiration-modelling program such as ASPIRE2 shall provide air sampling pipe network
calculations. Pipe calculations shall be supplied with the proposed pipe layout design to indicate the following performance criteria:

Transport time

When used within the EU the maximum transport times shall be in accordance with the limits approved under EN54-20 i.e. VLF-250 = 60
Balance %
Commissioning tests
system log book.
System checks
Detector address,
Time and date,
Time delays,
External buttons operable (Reset / Disable / Test / Instant Fault Finder, Autolearn Smoke and Autolearn Flow),
Tests
1. Introduce smoke into the detector assembly to provide a basic Go/No-Go functional test.
Section 7. 2.6 VLP - Specification
Scope
This document provides specification details of the VESDA VLP Air Sampling Smoke Detection (ASD) products to assist in their installation
and commissioning.
System information
General
A very early warning smoke detection system similar to the VESDA VLP System shall be installed throughout the areas nominated on the
drawings.
The system shall consist of highly sensitive LASER-based Smoke Detectors with aspirators connected to networks of sampling pipes.
When required, an optional display unit shall be provided to monitor eachdetector, and a programmer shall be supplied to configure the
system.
Approvals
The very early warning smoke detection system must be of a type submitted to, tested, approved, and/or listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as follows:

AFNOR, France
VNIIPO, Russia
CFE, China
KFI, Korea
The VLP smoke detector shall be installed to comply with one or more of the following codes or standards:
AS 1670.1-2004, AS1603.8 1996, , ASNZS 3000

NFPA Standards, US
NEC Standards, US
NZS 4512 : 2003
Section 7. 2.6 VLP - Description
System description
Design requirements
1. Shall consist of a highly sensitive LASER-based smoke detector, aspirator, and filter.
2. It shall be modular, with each detector optionally monitored by a display featuring LEDs and a sounder. The system shall be
configured by a programmer that is either integral to the system, portable or PC based.

The system shall allow programming of:
four smoke threshold alarm levels;
time delays;
faults including airflow, detector, power, filter and network as well as an indication of the urgency of the fault;
seven or more configurable relay outputs for remote indication of alarm and fault conditions.
3. It shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the detection system, supported by calculations from a
computer-based design modelling tool.
4. Optional equipment may include intelligent remote displays and/or a high level interface with the building fire alarm system,
or a dedicated Xtralis VSM graphics package.
Shall be tested and approved to cover up to 2,000m2 (20,000 sq.ft).

Shall be approved to provide very early warning smoke detection and provide four output levels corresponding to Alert,
Action, Fire 1 and Fire 2. These levels shall be programmable and able to be set at sensitivities ranging from 0.005-
20% obs/m (0.00156% obs/ft). For compliance to UL approval range is 0.0015-4% obsc/ft.
Shall report any fault on the unit by using configurable fault relay outputs or via VSM.
Shall be self monitoring for filter contamination.
Shall incorporate a flow sensor in each pipe and provide staged airflow faults.
Submittals
Product data and site drawings shall be submitted and shall include pipe layout, operational calculations (ASPIRE2) and performance criteria.
Quality assurance
1. Manufacturer The Laser Detection Chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary

The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years production clean air feed from the filter; providing clean air barriers across critical
experience in the manufacturer and design of high sensitivity air detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination.
The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting ISO 9001:2008 sensitivity from that set during commissioning. A learning tool
for manufacturing. shall be provided to ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm
2. Technology
The laser detection chamber shall be of the mass light scattering 3. Equipment supplier
type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types
of varying size. The equipment supplier shall be authorized and trained by the man-
ufacturer to calculate/design, install, test and maintain the air sam-
A smoke-hours method shall be used for the purpose of monitoring pling system and shall be able to produce a certificate stating such
contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to automatically notify on request.
Section 7. 2.6 VLP - Products

Supplier

Wheatley Hall Road
Doncaster
DN2 4NB
UK
Telephone: +1302 303999
Fax: +1302 303332
Detector assembly
2. The detector shall be LASER-based type and shall have an obscuration sensitivity range of 0.005-20% obs/m (0.00156%
obs/ft).
4. The detector shall also incorporate facilities to transmit the following faults
Detector
Air flow
Filter
System
Zone
Network
Power
5. Urgent and minor faults. Minor faults shall be considered as servicing or maintenance signals. Urgent faults indicate the
unit may not be able to detect smoke.
6. The detector shall have four in-line sample pipe inlets and must contain a flow sensor for each pipe inlet. Both minor and
urgent flow faults can be reported.
7. The filter shall be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be capable of filtering particles in excess of
20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultrafine, removing more than 99% of contaminant particles of
0.3microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detectors optics to prevent contamination and increase
service life.
runs up to 200m (650 ft) in total, (4 pipe runs per detector) with a transport time per applicable local codes.
9. The assembly must contain relays for alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall be software programmable to the
required functions. The relays must be rated at 2 AMP at 30 VDC. Remote relays shall be offered as an option and either
10. The assembly shall be able to be surface mounted to a wall or recessed in the wall cavity (the unit may be inverted in either
option).
11. The assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions
and faults. The date and time of each event shall be recorded. Each detector (zone) shall be capable of storing up to
18,000 events and does not require the presence of a display in order to do so.
Section 7. 2.6 VLP - Products
Displays

1. When required, a detector display module may be located within the detector, a remote mounting box or a 19 inch remote rack.
2. Each display shall provide the following features at a minimum:
A 20 segment bar graph display.
Four independent high intensity alarm indicators, alert, action, fire 1 and fire2, corresponding to the four alarm
thresholds of the detector.
Alarm threshold indicators for alert, action and fire 1.
Detector fault and airflow fault indicators.
Faults originating in the particular VLP zone (zone fault) shall be distinguished from those produced by the overall
smoke detection system and from those resulting from network wiring errors (network fault). LED indicators shall be
provided for each fault category.
Minor and urgent fault LED indicators.
A remotely mounted display may be optionally equipped with 7 or 12configurable relays for signalling alarm and fault
conditions.
Four buttons supporting the following features:
a. Mode/Test - Scrolls through the information on the displays digital display: Sensitivity (fire 1 threshold setting),
current smoke level and VLP zone number. When pressed and held initiates a lamp test on the individual display module.
b. Silence - Silences all devices on the system
c. Reset - Unlatches all latched alarm conditions on the assigned VLP zone.
d. Isolate - Isolates the individual VLP zone (inhibits alarm and fault relays and initiates Isolate relay).
Programmers
1. When required, a programmer module may be located within the detector, a remote mounting box, a 19 inch remote rack,
or in a portable hand-held unit. Alternatively, programming may be performed using a Windows application running on a
PC connected through a High Level Interfacing unit (PC-Link HLI).
Programming of any device on the VESDAnet system.
Viewing of the status of any device in the system.
Adjustment of the alarm thresholds of a nominated detector.
Setting of day/night, weekend and holiday sensitivity threshold settings.
Initiation of AutoLearn, to automatically configure the detectors alarm threshold settings to suit the current
environment.
Programmable latching or non-latching relay operation.
Programmable energized or de-energized relays.
Programmable high and low flow settings for airflow supervision.
Programmable aspirator speed control.
Programmable maintenance intervals.
Testing of relays assigned to a specific zone to aid commissioning.
communication faults shall be reported unambiguously and shall be clearly attributable to an individual device or wire link in
the fault messages.

Shall comply with EIA RS485 Protocol.
Section 7. 2.6 VLP - Application

The laser based ASD system shall have four (4) independently programmable alarm thresholds. The four alarm levels may be used as
follows:

the fire brigade and activate all warning systems

activates visual and audible alarms in the Security Office or other countermeasures.
Alarm Level 1 (Alert) 0.08% obs/m (0.025% obs/ft)
Alarm Level 2 (Action) 0.14% obs/m (0.0448% obs/ft)
Alarm Level 1 (Alert) 10 seconds
Alarm Level 2 (Action) 10 seconds
Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1) 10 seconds
Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2) 10 seconds
Fault Alarm 5 seconds
Fault alarms
(check local codes, standards or regulations to determine whether compliance with this set up is required).

UL 1481 Listed -provided the power supply and standby batteries have been appropriately sized / rated to accommodate the
US telecommunication central office power supply- the system shall operate on negative 48 VDC (provided continuously
Section 7. 2.6 VLP - Application

Sampling pipe

4. The pipe shall be identified as air sampling/aspirating smoke detector pipe (or similar wording) along its entire length at
6. The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be fitted with an end-cap and made air-tight by using solvent cement. Use
of an end-cap will be dependent on ASPIRE2 calculations.
Sampling holes
1. Sampling holes shall not be separated by more than the maximum distance allowed for conventional point detectors
as specified in the local codes and standards. Intervals may vary according to calculations. For AS1670.1 -2004 the
maximum allowable distance is 10.2m. For FIA the maximum allowable distance is 10.6m. For NFPA the maximum allowable
distance is 30ft.
3. Consideration shall be given to the manufacturers recommendations and standards in relation to the number of sampling
points and the distance of the sampling points from the ceiling or roof structure and forced ventilation systems.
Section 7. 2.6 VLP - Installation


1. Where false ceilings are installed, the sampling pipe shall be installed above the ceiling, and capillary sampling points
shall be installed on the ceiling and connected by means of a capillary tube.
3. The capillary tube shall terminate at a ceiling sampling point specifically designed and approved by the manufacturer.
The performancene characteristics of the sampling points shall be taken into account during the system design.

Section 7. 2.6 VLP - Installation

Transport time

When used within the EU the maximum transport times shall be in accordance with the limits approved under EN54-20 i.e. VLP = 60
Balance %
Commissioning tests
2. All necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials and labor shall be provided by the Contractor.
system log book.
System checks
Detector address,
Time and date,
Time delays,
External buttons operable (reset / disable / test / instant fault finder, autolearn smoke and autolearn flow),
Tests
3. Activate the appropriate fire alarm zones and advise all concerned that the system is fully operational. Fill out the
logbook and commissioning report accordingly.
Section 7. 2.7 VLS - Information
Scope
This document provides specification details of the VESDA VLS Air sampling Smoke Detection (ASD) products to assist in their installation
and commissioning.
System information
General
A very early warning smoke detection system similar to the VESDA VLS System shall be installed throughout the areas nominated on the
drawings.
The system shall consist of highly sensitive LASER-based Smoke Detectors with spirators connected to networks of sampling pipes.
The detector will be able to identify which pipe is carrying smoke.
When required, an optional display unit shall be provided to monitor each detector, and a programmer shall be supplied to configure the
system.
Approvals
The very early warning smoke detection system must be of a type submitted to, tested, approved, and/or listed by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory (NRTL) as follows:
AFNOR, France
VNIIPO, Russia
CFE, China
KFI, Korea
The VLS smoke detector shall be installed to comply with one or more of the following codes or standards:
AS 1670.1-2004, AS1603.8 1996, , ASNZS 3000
NFPA Standards, US
NEC Standards, US
NZS 4512 : 2003
Section 7. 2.7 VLS - Description
System Description
Design requirements
1. Shall consist of a highly sensitive LASER-based smoke detector, aspirator, and filter. The detection unit shall also include
a scanning valve mechanism to identify which sampling pipe is carrying smoke.
2. It shall be modular, with each detector optionally monitored by a display featuring LEDs and a sounder. The system shall
be configured by a programmer that is either integral to the system, portable or PC based.
The system shall allow programming of:
four smoke threshold alarm levels;
time delays;
faults including airflow, detector, power, filter and network as well as an indication of the urgency of the fault;
seven or twelve configurable relay outputs for remote indication of alarm and fault conditions.
3. It shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the detection system, supported by calculations from
a computer-based design modelling tool.
4. Optional equipment may include intelligent remote displays and/or a high level interface with the building fire alarm
system, or a dedicated Xtralis VSM graphics package.

Shall be tested and approved to cover up to 2,000m2 (20,000 sq.ft).
Shall be approved to provide very early warning smoke detection and provide four output levels corresponding to Alert,
Action, Fire 1 and Fire 2. These levels shall be programmable and able to be set at sensitivities ranging from 0.005-20%
obs/m (0.00156% obs/ft). For compliance to UL approval range is 0.0015-4% obsc/ft.

Shall report any fault on the unit by using configurable fault relay outputs or via VSM.

Shall be self monitoring for filter contamination.

Shall incorporate a flow sensor in each pipe and provide staged airflow faults.
Submittals
Product data and site drawings shall be submitted and shall include pipe layout, operational calculations (ASPIRE2) and performance criteria.
Quality assurance
1. Manufacturer The Laser Detection Chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary

The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years production clean air feed from the filter; providing clean air barriers across critical
experience in the manufacturer and design of high sensitivity air detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination.
The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting ISO 9001:2008 for sensitivity from that set during commissioning. A learning tool
manufacturing. shall be provided to ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm
2. Technology
3. Equipment supplier
The laser detection chamber shall be of the mass light scattering
type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types The equipment supplier shall be authorized and trained by the man-
of varying size. ufacturer to calculate/design, install, test and maintain the air sam-
pling system and shall be able to produce a certificate stating such
A smoke-hours method shall be used for the purpose of monitoring on request.
contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to automatically notify
Section 7. 2.7 VLS - Products

Supplier

Wheatley Hall Road
Doncaster
DN2 4NB
UK
Telephone: +1302 303999
Fax: +1302 303332
Detector assembly
2. The detection unit shall also include a scanning valve mechanism to identify which sampling pipe is carrying smoke.

The valve mechanism shall:
be integrated into the detector
begin to sample each pipe individually upon detection of smoke
be used to identify the level of smoke in each pipe
be used to indicate in which pipe an alarm was first detected
operate upon manual activation of the scan button on the VLS display
be automatically tested fortnightly to ensure uninterrupted protection
3. The system shall utilise the principle of sampling all sectors simultaneously. When a scan smoke level is reached, an
automatic sequence shall be initiated to sample each sector individually. If an alarm threshold level is reached a first alarm
sector is indicated and signalled. The unit shall then continue its sequence monitoring until the smoke level signal reduces
below the scan level.
4.
The detector shall be LASER-based type and shall have an obscuration sensitivity range of 0.005-20% obs/m (0.00156% obs/ft).
5. The detector shall have four independent field programmable smoke alarm thresholds per pipe (sector) and a programmable
scan time delay.
6. The Detector shall also incorporate facilities to transmit the following faults:
Detector
Air flow
Filter
System
Zone
Network
Power
7. Urgent and minor faults. Minor faults shall be considered as servicing or maintenance signals. Urgent faults indicate the
unit may not be able to detect smoke.
8. The detector shall have four in-line sample pipe inlets and must contain a flow sensorfor each pipe inlet. Both minor and
urgent flow faults can be reported.
Detector assembly continued

9. The filter shall be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be capable of filtering particles in excess of
20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultrafine, removing more than 99% of contaminant particles of
0.3 microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detectors optics to prevent contamination and increase service
life.
runs up to 200m (650 ft) in total, (4 pipe runs per detector) with a transport time per applicable local codes.
11. The assembly must contain relays for alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall be software programmable to the
required functions. The relays must be rated at 2 AMP at 30 VDC. Remote relays shall be offered as an option and either
12. The assembly shall be able to be surface mounted to a wall or recessed in the wall cavity (the unit may be inverted ineither
option).
13. The assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions
and faults. The date and time of each event shall be recorded. Each detector (zone) shall be capable of storing up to
18,000 events and does not require the presence of a display in order to do so.
Displays
1. When required, a detector display module may be located within the detector, a remote mounting box or a 19 inch remote
rack.
2. Each Display shall provide the following features at a minimum:
A 20 segment bar graph display.
Four independent high intensity alarm indicators, alert, action, fire 1 and fire 2, corresponding to the four alarm
thresholds of the indicated sector.
Alarm threshold indicators for alert, action and fire 1.
LED indication that the first alarm sector is established.
LED indication of which pipe(s) is carrying smoke.
Detector fault and airflow fault indicators.
Faults originating in the particular VLS zone (Zone Fault) shall be distinguished from those produced by the overall
smoke detection system and from those resulting from network wiring errors (Network Fault). LED indicators shall be
provided for each fault category.
Minor and urgent fault LED indicators.
A remotely mounted display may be optionally equipped with 7 or 12 configurable relays for signalling alarm and fault
conditions.
Four buttons supporting the following features:
a. Mode/Test - Scrolls through the information on the displays digital display:
Sensitivity (fire 1 threshold setting), current smoke level, VLS Zone number and first alarm sector. When pressed
and held initiates a lamp test on the individual display module.
b. Silence/Scan - Silences all devices on the system. When pressed and held initiates a manual scan test.
c. Reset - Unlatches all latched alarm conditions on the assigned VLS zone.
d. Isolate - Isolates the individual VLS zone (inhibits alarm and fault relays and initiates Isolate relay).
Programmers
1. When required, a programmer module may be located within the detector, a remote mounting box, a 19 inch remote rack,
or in a portable hand-held unit. Alternatively, programming may be performed using a Windows application running on a
PC connected through a High Level Interfacing unit (PC-Link HLI).
Programming of any device on the VESDAnet system.
Viewing of the status of any device in the system.
Adjustment of the alarm thresholds for each pipe (sector).
Software configuration for either 7 or 12 relays
Setting of Day/Night, weekend and holiday sensitivity threshold settings.
Initiation of AutoLearn, to automatically configure the detectors alarm
threshold settings to suit the current environment.
Programmable latching or non-latching relay operation.
Programmable energized or de-energized relays.
Programmable high and low flow settings for airflow supervision.
Programmable aspirator speed control.
Programmable maintenance intervals.
Testing of relays assigned to a specific zone to aid commissioning.
Device networking requirements

communication faults shall be reported unambiguously and shall be clearly attributable to an individual device or wire link in
the fault messages.

Shall comply with EIA RS485 protocol.
Section 7. 2.7 VLS - Application

The laser based ASD system shall have four (4) independently programmable alarm thresholds. The four alarm levels may be used as
follows:

the fire brigade and activate all warning systems

activates visual and audible alarms in the security office or other countermeasures.
the requirements of local authorities (e.g. authorities having jurisdiction in the US).



Each pipe (sector) shall have its alarm thresholds set by a sector factor. The sector factor range shall be between 0.5 and 2.0 (where 2.0
doubles the normal alarm threshold settings).
Initial (factory default) delay
Initial (factory default) settings shall be:

Scan delay 10 seconds

Sector time 10 seconds

Fault alarms
The detector fault relay shall be connected to the appropriate alarm zone on the fire alarm control Panel (FACP) in such a way that a
detector fault would register a fault condition on the FACP. The minor fault and Isolate relays shall also be connected to the appropriate
control system.
(Check local codes, standards or regulations to determine whether compliance with this set up is required).
local power supply standards that may apply:
UL 1481 Listed -provided the power supply and standby batteries have been appropriately sized / rated to accommodate
the systems power requirements.
US Telecommunication central office power supply- the system shall operate on negative 48 VDC (provided continuously
Section 7. 2.7 VLS - Application

Sampling pipe
4. The pipe shall be identified as air aampling/Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe (or similar wording) along its entire length at
Sampling holes
1. Sampling holes shall not be separated by more than the maximum distance allowed for conventional point detectors
as specified in the local codes and standards. Intervals may vary according to calculations. For AS1670.1 -2004 the
maximum allowable distance is 10.2m. For FIA the maximum allowable distance is 10.6m. For NFPA the maximum allowable
distance is 30ft.
3. Consideration shall be given to the manufacturers recommendations and standards in relation to the number of
sampling points and the distance of the sampling points from the ceiling or roof structure and forced ventilation systems.
Section 7. 2.7 VLS - Installation

The contractor shall install the system in accordance with the manufacturers System Design Manual.

1. Where false ceilings are installed, the sampling pipe shall be installed above the ceiling, and capillary sampling points
shall be installed on the ceiling and connected by means of a capillary tube.
3. The capillary tube shall terminate at a ceiling sampling point specifically designed and approved by the manufacturer.
The performancene characteristics of the sampling points shall be taken into account during the system design.

Section 7. 2.7 VLS - Installation

Transport time
When used within the EU the maximum transport times shall be in accordance with the limits approved under EN54-20 i.e. VLP = 60
Balance %
Commissioning tests
System Log Book.
System checks
Pipes in use,
Detector address,
Display address,
Clock and date,
Time delays,
Display buttons operable (mode, silence, reset, isolate),
Referencing
Tests
Section 7. 2.8 VSM4 - Information
Scope
This document provides specification details for a software product that is able to remotely monitor and configure smoke detection and
fire protection systems in multiple locations.
System information
General
1. The software package shall centrally monitor and configure very early warning smoke detection and fire protection
systems in multiple local or remote locations.
2. The software package shall be compatible with smoke detection and fire protection systems that are approved by global
approvals bodies and meet all local codes, standards and regulations. VESDA is an example of such a system.
3. The software shall consist of monitoring and configuration components:
The configuration component shall allow users to configure VESDA detectors remotely by using a connected PC.
The monitoring component shall allow users to monitor individual detectors, multiple detectors
connected via a HLI and VESDAnet, and/or multiple HLIs and VESDAnets.
Approvals
The smoke detectors and fire protection systems which the monitoring software supports must be of a type submitted to, tested,
approved, and/or listed by:


AFNOR, France

UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc), US

FM (Factory Mutual), US



CCCF and CCCf, China
No specific approvals are required for the monitoring software.
System description
Access and usability
1. The software shall support local and remote password-based access control:
Three local password-protected levels of software access: designer, user and administrator.
Multiple user accounts with unique user-ID and password based access control.
Remote password-management of remote fire networks
2. The software shall have a user-friendly graphics user interface.
3. The software shall support cut and paste functionality for common tasks.
4. The software shall provide support for multiple languages including English, German, Spanish, French, Italian, Russian,
Polish, Korean, Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese.
5. The software shall support translations of messages from one supported language to another.
6. The software shall support disk space monitoring.
Section 7. 2.8 VSM4 - System description
Monitoring functionality
1. The software shall have the capacity to monitor multiple connections:
The software shall enable one or more workstations to monitor and configure multiple VESDA systems in multiple
buildings and multiple sites.
The software shall provide an event list that provides a single integrated view of all events (faults/troubles and alarms)
across multiple sites.
The software shall prioritize all events presented in the event list according to logical precedence rules.
The software shall allow management of all events from the event list including acknowledgement of events and re
setting of devices.
The software shall allow colors to be assigned to different event types.
The software shall allow printing of event lists.
2. The software shall be able to connect directly to all VESDAnet, VESDAlink and VESDAtalk connections, thereby providing
an all-in-one monitoring solution:
Using standard RS232 ports (or Ethernet) on existing and future monitoring and control systems, PCs using the
software shall connect to and interpret status change data transmitted from the ports and provide graphic annunciation,
control, history logging and reporting as specified herein.
Network systems that cannot interface to VESDAnet systems or systems requiring the use of a dry contact or volt
age monitoring interfaces to connect to VESDAnet shall not be accepted.
3. The software shall be able to connect to multiple remote sites via IP-based LAN or WAN using virtual serial port emulation.
4. The software shall communicate with one or more VESDA LaserFOCUS detectors via an RS232 connection using either a
DB9 connector or dedicated screw-terminal wiring to the detector displays Tx/Rx terminals natively using the VESDAtalk
protocol without the necessity for using protocol translation or other communications equipment.
5. The software shall communicate with one or more VESDA LaserCOMPACT (RO) detectors via an RS232 connection, using
a DB9 connector, to the detector natively using the VESDAlink protocol without the necessity for using protocol translation
or other communications equipment.
6. The software shall communicate with one or more VESDAnet-compliant VESDA LaserPLUS, VESDA LaserSCANNER,
VESDA LaserCOMPACT and/or VESDA LaserFOCUS detectors via a VESDA high level interface (HLI) natively using the
VESDAnet protocol without the necessity for using protocol translation or other communications equipment.
7. The software shall be able to monitor up to 255 VESDA devices or VESDA networks.
8. The software shall be compatible with 4 alarm levels:
Alert (Alarm Level 1) may be used to activate a visual and audible alarm in the fire risk area.
Action (Alarm Level 2) may be used to activate the electrical/electronic equipment shutdown relay and activate visual
and audible alarms in the Security Office or other appropriate location.
Fire 1 (Alarm Level 3) may be used to activate an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control Panel to call the Fire
Brigade and activate all warning systems.
Fire 2 (Alarm Level 4) may be used to activate a suppression system and/or other suitable countermeasures (e.g.
evacuation action or shutdown of systems).
9. The software shall allow importation of .wav files for event notification.
10. The software shall have a text-to-speech option to allow natural language annunciation of all faults and alarms:
The text-to-speech component of the software shall use Nuances (formerly ScanSofts) RealSpeak speech engine.
The text-to-speech functionality shall be available in a number of different languages.
11. The software shall support sophisticated floor plan development and management functionality:
The software shall enable floor plan drawings to be used in the software to graphically notify users where a smoke
event is occurring in their monitored system.
The software shall allow development of multiple levels of interconnected floor plans.
The software shall allow importation of AutoCAD, jpg, bmp and other common image files
The software shall include software to allow designers to create and manipulate CAD images for incorporation in
meaningful context-sensitive multi-level floorplans
12. The software shall allow for multiple device smoke trending on a single graph.
13. The software shall support printing on a printer such as a line printer that supports Unicode.3.2.16.
Section 7. 2.8 VSM4 - System description
Monitoring functionality continued

14. The software shall support sophisticated event log management functionality:
Event logs from all networked detectors shall be able to be retrieved and viewed.
Event logs for each monitored site and/or combined event logs for multiple sites.
Event logs shall be able to be archived and sorted
Total event integration, consolidation and archiving across multiple VESDAnets shall be provided. All system, network
and device events shall be stored in an ODBC-compliant database.
15. A remote notification facility shall enable the use of email (or SMS) to provide immediate and up-to-date information the
systems operational status irrespective of location.
16. The software shall enable presentation of unique customised corporate response procedures upon occurrence of specific
events in defined parts of the facility.
Configuration functionality
The software shall allow configuration of all VESDA LaserPLUS, LaserSCANNER, LaserCOMPACT, LaserFOCUS model detectors:
Full remote programming of all detector functions.
Saving of detector configurations for safe storage.
The software shall allow creation of off-line configurations for all such VESDA detectors and allow a merge and compare
of off-line configuration with on-line configurations.
1. The software shall operate on either Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional.
2. The software shall function on the following minimum PC specifications:
Processor Pentium. Minimum configuration: P4 2.8Ghz 1MB cache RAM 2 GB
Hard Disk 1 by 80 GB system disk; 2 by 80 GB if connected to raid storage
Display Preferred: Dual monitor AGP Card with 256 MB memory. Minimum: Single monitor 128 MB memory.
Network Minimum: 10/100/1000 Mbps
Submittals
General
1. Three copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the architect, engineer, and owner for review.
2. A copy of the manufacturers product manual shall be supplied to the end users upon completion of the installation
3. System commissioning data shall be supplied (in a format recommended by the manufacturer and per the instructions
provided by the manufacturer) within 30 days of completion of the installation.
4. Substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein shall meet or exceed the minimum specified
standard. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals
or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment.
Shop drawings
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate all wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections between the items of equipment.
3. Include manufacturers name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement,
complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts.
Manuals
1. Complete operating manuals and technical data sheets are to be submitted simultaneously with the shop drawings &
other submittals.
A clear and concise description of product operation shall be provided, and it shall include, in detail, the information
required to properly operate the equipment and system.
2. Approvals shall be based on complete submissions of manuals together with shop drawings.
Section 7. 2.8 VSM4 - Installation
Quality assurance
Manufacturer qualifications
1. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years production experience in the design and production of design and
monitoring software for smoke detection and fire protection systems.
2. The manufacturer shall be certified as meeting ISO 9001:2000 for manufacturing.
Equipment supplier
1. The equipment supplier shall be authorized and trained by the manufacturer to calculate, design, install, test and maintain
the smoke detection and fire protection systems, and shall be able to produce a certificate stating such on request.
Installation & configuration

Installing the software
The contractor shall install the product in accordance with the manufacturers system design manual.
Configuring the software
1. The contractor shall configure the software in accordance with the manufacturers system design manual.
2. Configuration of the software shall include:
establishing network connections to all installed smoke detectors on all sites
establishing IP connections from the monitoring site to all monitored sites
associating all detectors with designated floor plan zones
setting up a hierarchical floor plan system that ranges from a detector zone up to a regional or global level
Commissioning tests
2. The contractor shall provide all necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials and labor.
system log book.
System checks
When the system is checked, all of the following steps must be undertaken:
1. Visually check all pipes to ensure that all joints, fittings, bends, sampling holes, etc., comply with the specification.
Alarm threshold levels,
Detector address,
Time and date,
Time delays,
External button operable (Reset / Disable),
Referencing
Units set to U.S./S.I.
4. Check interconnection with fire aarm control panel to ensure correct operation.
Section 7. 2.8 VSM4 - Installation

VFT - 15 VFT - 15 VFT - 15 VFT - 15 VFT - 15 VFT - 15
Worldwide approvals Vds LPC, VdS, AFNOR, UL, ULC, UL268A (in-duct application), FM, NY-MEA, CSFM, ActivFire, CFE.
Hazardous area approval NO NO YES YES YES YES

(FM class 1, Div 2, groups A,B, C, D)
Sensitivity range 0.001 to 20% 0.001 to 20% 0.001 to 20%

obs/m obs/m obs/m
(0.0003 to 6.0% (0.0003 to 6.0% (0.0003 to 6.0%
obs/ft) obs/ft) obs/ft)
Two stage filter YES YES YES YES YES YES
Area coverage (maximum) 1500 m2 (across 2000 m2 (across 2000 m2 800 m2 800 m2 250/500 m2
15 sectors) 4 sectors) (20000 sq. ft) (8000 sq. ft) (8000 sq. ft) (2500/5000 sq.ft)
Multiple pipe addressability Up to 15 Up to 4 NO NO NO NO
Total number of alarm thresholds 120 (Day/Night) 32 (Day/Night) 8 (Day/Night) 3 3 8 (Day/Night)
Relay outputs 5 7 or 12 relays 7 3 3 3

(Expandable to 21) (Expandable to 6)
On-board memory (max. events) Up to 20000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000
Flow sensor circuit (one per pipe inlet) 1 + 1 in chamber 4 4 1 1 1
AutoLearn (Automatically adjusts NO YES YES YES YES AutoLear Smoke

system to environment) AutoLearn Flow
Supported by ASPIRE2 pipe Yes YES YES YES YES YES

modelling software (transport times
only)
Predefined
networks
Maximum No. of holes 15 60 100 40 40 12 / 24
Bar graph/indicator LED Yes Local or Remote Local or Remote Local Local Local
(20 segment (20 segment (5 on-board (5 on-board (7 on-board
bargraph display) bargraph LEDs). Remote LEDs) LEDs 10
display) (20 segment Segment Circular
bargraph display) Display)
Programming Tools On-board YES YES YES Programmed via Programmed via
- On-board Programming module programmer and RS232 direct RS232 direct
- Portable Programmer PC Software connection to PC connection to PC
- PC Software (VSC, VSM) (VSC/VSM4) using VSC using VSC
Via VESDAnet (when the detectors
are connected on the VESDA network)
VESDAnet
Max. No. of devices/detectors N/A 200/100 200/100 200/100 N/A 200/100

per loop (with VN Card)
Max. distance between devices N/A 1300 m 1300 m 1300 m N/A 1300 m
(4000 ft) (4000 ft) (4000 ft) (with VN Card)
Computer-based management YES YES YES YES NO Yes

via VSM (with VN Card)
Remote relay modules N/A (Part No.)

- 7 relay version VRT-501 VRT-500 VRT-500 N/A VRT-500
- 12 relay version VRT-900 N/A N/A N/A
Compatible remote bargraph displays N/A (Part No.)

- Display, 7 relays VRT-400 VRT-200 VRT-J00 N/A VRT-V00
- Display, 12 relays VRT-800 N/A N/A N/A N/A
- Display, no relays VRT-700 VRT-600 VRT-K00 N/A VRT-W00
7.3 Miscellaneous
Optical beam detector 7.3 Optical beam smoke detectors 7.3

Product Guide .........................................................................................................................7.3.1
FIRERAY detectors..............................................................................................................7.3.2
Choosing the right optical beam..............................................................................................7.3.3
Getting the most from modern beams....................................................................................7.3.4
Getting the best from the beams............................................................................................7.3.5
Section 7. 3
Optical beam smoke detectors
7.3.1. Introduction to this guide

The aim of this guide is to offer information on the proper use of
infrared (IR) / optical beam smoke detectors to protect lives,
equipment and property.
This guide summarises the design requirements, the principles of

operations and practical applications for their incorporation as a
component of an automatic fire detection and alarm system.
For specific applications, optical beam smoke detectors can be

important links in a wellengineered automatic fire alarm system.
Thanks to their own capabilities, optical beam smoke detectors
can overcome the problems and limitations of point-type smoke
detectors.
Fire fighting enterprises limited has created this guide as an aid to

fire protection engineers, mechanical and electrical engineers, fire
service personnel, fire detection and alarm designers and installers
to gain a full understanding of the optical beam smoke detectors
capabilities, and how they differ from point-type smoke detectors.
Everyone who has responsibility for specifying, designing,

installing, commissioning and maintaining systems with optical
beam smoke detectors will find this guide both informative and
educational; it is intended as a guide to good practice but does not
aim to be an exhaustive guide to fire standards and codes..
Section 7. 3.1 - Optical beam & smoke detectors
Glossary of terms
Addressable optical beam smoke detector: Optical beam smoke detector, which, in addition to providing alarm and trouble indications
to a control unit, are capable of communicating a unique identification (address) in order to show the exact location of a fire.
Analogue optical beam smoke detector: Optical beam smoke detector that communicates a unique identification (address) along with
an analogue (data) signal, that indicates the level of smoke at its location.
Automatic fire alarm system: A system of controls, initiating devices and alarm signals in which some or all of the initiating circuits are
activated by automatic devices such as optical beam smoke detectors.
Automatic gain control (AGC): The ability of an optical beam smoke detector to compensate for light signal degradation due to dust or
dirt and/or building movement. The rate of compensation is limited to ensure that the detector is still sensitive to slow, smouldering fires.
False alarms: An unwanted alarm generated by a cause(s) other than fire.
Fire: A chemical reaction between oxygen and a combustible material where rapid oxidation results in the release of heat, light, flame
and/or smoke.
Listed/approved: The inclusion of a device in a list published by a recognised testing organisation, indicating that the device has been
successfully tested to meet the applicable standards.
Obscuration (cumulative obscuration): The reduction of the ability of light to travel from one point to another due to the presence of
solids, liquids, gases, or aerosols. CUMULATIVE OBSCURATION is a combination of the density of these light-blocking particles per metre
and the linear distance, which these particles occupy, i.e., smoke density times the linear distance of the smoke field;
it is usually expressed in % / m.
Optical beam smoke detector: A device that monitors the amount of infrared light transmitted between a light source and a
photosensitive receiver. When smoke particles enter the infrared light beam path, some of the light is scattered and some absorbed,
thereby reducing the light reaching the Receiver. If this obscuration exceeds a set value, the optical beam smoke detector responds and
communicates its status to a fire panel. Optical beam smoke detector coverage: The area in which an optical beam smoke detector is
considered to effectively sense smoke. This area is limited by applicable standards and codes.
Optical beam smoke detector range: The distance between the transmitter and the receiver/reflector (prism).
Reflector (prism): The device that returns the infrared light back to the transceiver unit. A reflector may utilise prism(s) so that the
reflected beam path is along the transmitted path even if the reflector (prism) is misaligned.
Sensitivity: The ability of an optical beam smoke detector to respond to a given level/threshold of smoke obscuration.
Smoke: The gaseous and solid airborne results of combustion.
Smoke colour: The relative lightness or darkness of smoke, ranging from invisible to white to grey to black.
Point-type smoke detector: A device that senses smoke at its particular location only. Point-type detectors have a defined range of coverage.
Stratification: An effect that occurs when the air containing smoke particles is heated by smouldering or burning material and, becoming
less dense than the surrounding cooler air, rises until it reaches a level at which there is no longer a difference in temperature between it
and the surrounding air. Stratification can also be caused by forced ventilation.
Transmitter/receiver/control unit: The transmitter projects a modulated infrared light beam over an area to a receiver (directly or via a
reflector). The receiver forwards the signal to a control unit for analysis (this can be a separate or integrated unit depending on the
detector type). The control unit informs the fire panel on the status of the equipment.
Transceiver: A unit combining the transmitter and the receiver is called a transceiver.
Transparencies (Filters): A panel of plastic having a known level of obscuration, which can be used to test the proper sensitivity threshold
of an optical beam smoke detector.
Trouble (Fault) Condition: The status of a device or system that impair its proper operation, i.e., open circuit on an initiation loop. The
notification of a trouble condition indicated on a control panel or annunciator is a TROUBLE SIGNAL, also called FAULT.
What is an optical beam smoke detector?

Definition
An optical beam smoke detector comprises a transmitter, a receiver and a control unit:
The transmitter is an infrared light source tha tgenerates and projects a modulated infrared (invisible) light beam over an area to the
receiver.
The receiver is a photosensitive sensor that forwards the signal to a control unit;
The control unit, which can be a separate or integrated unit (depending on the type of optical beam smoke detector) analyses the signal
information and communicates with the fire panel on the status of the optical beam smoke detector
Core: The effective region corresponds to the core area, which will connect the transmitter with the receiver / reflector. The core
region contains sufficient IR energy to operate the system.
Scattered The energy in the scattered region is not sufficient to ensure reliable operation of the system.
region:
Edge: The transition area between the core and the scattered region.
The optical beam smoke detector works on the principle of light Since the sudden and total obscuration of the light beam is not a
obscuration. The photosensitive element of the optical beam typical smoke signature, the optical beam smoke detector will see
smoke detector sees light produced by the Transmitter in a normal this as a trouble condition, not an alarm. This threshold is
condition. The Receiver is calibrated to a preset sensitivity level typically set by the manufacturer at a specified sensitivity level.
based on a percentage of total obscuration. Fire fighting
enterprises optical beam smoke detectors offer various sensitivity This minimizes the possibility of an unwanted alarm due to the
settings to choose from. blockage of the beam by a solid object, such as a sign or a ladder,
being inadvertently placed in the beam path. Very small, slow
Unlike point-type photoelectric smoke detectors, optical beam changes in the obscuration of the light source are also not typical
smoke detectors are generally less sensitive to the colour of of a smoke signature. These changes may occur because of
smoke. Therefore, an optical beam smoke detector may be well environmental conditions such as dust or dirt accumulation on the
suited to applications unsuitable for point-type photoelectric optical beam smoke detectors optical assemblies or on the
detectors, such as applications where the anticipated fire would reflector surface. Small, slow changes may also occur due to
produce black smoke. Optical beam smoke detectors do require building movement.
visible smoke and therefore may not be as sensitive as ion
detectors in some applications. Changes caused by environmental conditions are typically
compensated for by an automatic gain control (AGC). When the
Optical beam smoke detectors are sensitive to the cumulative beam smoke detector is first turned on and put through its setup
obscuration presented by smoke field. A combination of smoke program, it assumes the light signal level at that time as a
density and the linear distance of the smoke field create this reference point for a normal condition.
cumulative obscuration across the projected light beam.
Cumulative obscuration is therefore a measure of the percentage As the quality of the light signal degrades overtime, the AGC will
of light blockage. compensate for this change. The rate of compensation is limited
to ensure that the optical beam smoke detector will maintain its
Note: condensation can be considered as an obscuration set sensitivity and will also still be sensitive to smouldering or slow
phenomenon. building fires.
When the AGC can no longer compensate for the loss of signal (as
with an excessive accumulation of dust or dirt or building
movement) the optical beam smoke detector will signal a trouble
condition, so that maintenance can take place.
With a motorised optical beam smoke detector, it is also possible

to steer and reposition the unit to retain good alignment after
building movement.
Optical beam smoke detector types

There are currently two main types of optical beam smoke
detectors:
1.3.1. Projected
The transmitter (T) and the receiver (R) are installed at each end of
the area to be protected, up to 100metres apart. The Receiver is
electrically connected to a control unit, the later being installed at
the ground level.
1.3.2. Reflected
The transmitter (T) and the receiver (R) are contained within one
unit: the transceiver (TR). The transmitted infrared light beam is
reflected back by a reflector (prism) mounted directly opposite this
unit, up to 100metres away. The Receiver is connected to a
control unit that can be either integrated into the transceiver or
installed at ground level.
Application of projected and reflected optical beam smoke detectors
The type of optical beam smoke detector used will be dictated by the installation and environment conditions and constraints.
Projected optical beam smoke detectors are less susceptible to

stray reflection asreflections go back to the transmitter. As a
result, projected optical beam smoke detectors can operate within
narrower gaps left in the operating environment.
In addition, projected optical beam smoke detector transmitter and

receiver units are generally compact and easily adopted into
aesthetic architectural designs.
Reflected optical beam smoke detectors utilise less wiring for

reduced installation costs (power and wiring are only required
at the transceiver end) and only requires the transceiver to be
aligned. However the reflected optical beam smoke detector can
be vulnerable to reflective items close to the IR beam path.
As the reflector has a wide acceptance angle, it does not need to

be aligned as accurately as both ends of a projected optical beam
smoke detector.
New optical beam smoke detector technology

The latest optical beam smoke detectors generation can also
encompass a motor. In conjunction with a control unit installed at
ground level, the user can benefit from being able to steer the
motorised units without the need to perform most of the setting
up, commissioning and maintaining activities from heights. With a
motorised optical beam smoke detector, it is also possible to
include software algorithms that automatically align the unit and
can accommodate building movements.
Where is an optical beam smoke detector used?

Traditional applications Some examples of common applications:
Optical beam smoke detectors are used to provide wide area - Atriums
smoke detection. These are usually used in situations where it is - Conference / Exhibition Centres
either impractical, inappropriate or not cost effective (installation, - Shopping Malls
wiring and maintenance) to use traditional point-type detectors. It - Historic Buildings
also enables coverage of a large area, at minimal cost. - Churches / Mosques
- Museums
Optical beam smoke detectors are also ideally suited for situations - Hangers
that might include high ceilings, dusty and dirty environments, or - Manufacturing Plants
environments that experience temperature extremes. - Warehouses
- Airports
- Stables
- Sport / Leisure Centres
Special applications Hazardous areas require a flame / explosion proof optical

beam smoke detector, ATEX approved:
Like point-type detectors, optical beam smoke detectors are
inappropriate for outdoor applications. - Zone1 Environments
- Refineries
Outdoor conditions make smoke behaviour impossible to predict. - Mills
Environmental conditions such as temperature extremes, rain, - Munitions Factories and Stores
snow, sleet, fog and dew can interfere with the proper operation - Flammable Liquid Stores
of the optical beam smoke detector. - Flammable Gas Stores
- Flammable Powder Stores
- Industrial Plants and Warehouses
- Power Stations
Specify an optical beam smoke detector

Standards Location, spacing and positioning
The following guidelines are provided to give a general summary It is important that the optical beam smoke detector is positioned
of common situations in which optical beam smoke detectors are correctly to minimise the detection time.
used.
Experiments have shown that smoke from a fire does not rise
Coverage/ceiling height directly upwards, but fans out as a plume due to dilution with cool
air and heat layering effects.
Optical beam smoke detectors generally have an operating range
of up to 100 metres. However, the optical concept means that the The time to signal a fire condition depends on the location of the
infrared light beam doesnt suddenly drop at 100 metres, but optical beam smoke detector within the premises, the volume and
carries on, fading away progressively. With regards to the density of smoke produced, construction of the roof, ventilation
reflected optical beam smoke detectors, the infrared light beam arrangements and airflow within the detection area.
actually travels up to 100 metres and back the same distance.
High ceiling applications such as atriums, lobbies, gymnasiums,
sports arenas, museums, factories and warehouses are areas where
Optical beam smoke detectors are ideally suited for optical beam smoke detectors are not only acceptable, but are the
high ceiling applications, where their infrared light detector of choice.
beam path is less likely to be obstructed.
Smoke layering, where smoke does not reach the ceiling level due
to layers of static hot air, is overcome by mounting the optical beam
smoke detector / reflector at the recommended height below the
ceiling of between 0.3m and 0.6m. This brings the
infrared light beam below the heat layer and into the smoke layer.
However, if there are objects below the ceiling that could obscure
the beam path, the detector heads / reflector positioning may need
to be adjusted (this can be determined by smoke tests). The
effects of stratification should also be considered when locating
optical beam smoke detectors (see 3.4.3. Stratification).
Hence an Optical Beam Smoke Detector can protect a wide area up to: 1,500 m2
Optical beam smoke detector positioning

There are several models for positioning optical beam smoke detectors.
The most common ones are described over the coming pages.
Flat ceiling
Single optical smoke detector: Multiple optical beam smoke detectors:
Apex ceiling - shed type
A ceiling or roof with a slope in excess of 4.5 degrees should be regarded as an APEX ceiling / roof.

Apex ceiling peaked type
A ceiling or roof with a slope in excess of 4.5 degrees should be The lateral coverage can be increased to 9m either side of the
regarded as an APEX ceiling / roof. infrared light beam axis.

When optical beam smoke detectors are mounted in an APEX, the This only applies for:
lateral coverage either side of the beam axis can be increased in
relation to the angle () of the pitch, using the following formula: - Optical beam smoke detectors positioned in the
APEX. For all other optical beam smoke
X = 7.5 + (7.5 x /100) metres detectors, the calculations remain the same;
- Pitch angles up to and including 25. Hence the
For example: maximum increase in lateral coverage can be:
If the pitch angle () is 20, the lateral coverage can be increased
from 7.5m either side of the infrared light beam axis to: X = 7.5 + (7.5 x 25/100) metres

X = 7.5 + (7.5 x 20/100) metres X = 9.375 metres
X = 7.5 + (1.5) metres Pitch angles over 25 must use the maximum lateral figure of
X = 9 metres 9.375m either side of the infrared light beam axis.

Atrium
The purpose of this approach is to detect the rising plume rather

than the smoke layer. For this approach, supplementary detection
using optical beam smoke detectors close enough to each other
to assure intersection of the plume is installed at a level below the
lowest expected stratification level.
The spacing (X4) between optical beam smoke detectors is based

on the narrowest potential width of the plume at the level of
detection (X5), typically X4 is 25% of X5.
If the optical beam smoke detector is to be placed in an atrium, or

near glass / polished surfaces, the receiver / reflector should be
offset from the central line of sight, and angled back to the
transmitter.
This can be either on the vertical or on the horizontal axis, or a

combination of both. In the instance of a reflected optical beam
smoke detector, the reflected infrared light beam from the
reflector will be returned to the Receiver in the normal way.
Capability to critical environments

High air velocity
High air movement does not have as great as an effect on optical beam smoke detectors as other detector types. An optical beam smoke
detectors sensing range can be as long as a football field (maximum beam range is typically 100m). It is therefore less likely that smoke
will be blown out of the optical beam smoke detectors sensing range. Although reduced spacing is not required in high airflow areas,
attention should be given to the anticipated behaviour of smoke in these applications.
Hostile environment
Optical beam smoke detectors are not as limited as point-type detectors to hostile environments, eg. temperature extremes, dirt, and
corrosive gases.
In addition, flame / explosion proof optical beam smoke detectors have been designed for protection of large hazardous (with potentially
explosive atmospheres) areas, such as:
Zone1 Environments
Refineries
Mills
Munitions Factories and Stores
Flammable Liquid Stores
Flammable Gas Stores
Flammable Powder Stores
Industrial Plants and Warehouses
Power Stations
This version provides an early warning of smouldering or strongly smoke-generative fires, which may not be picked up by flame detectors
installed in these hazardous areas.
Flame / explosion proof optical beam smoke detectors are ATEX approved.

Stratification
Stratification occurs when smoke is heated by smouldering of burning materials and becomes less dense than surrounding cooler air.
The smoke rises until there is no longer a difference in temperature between the smoke and the surrounding air. Therefore, stratification
may occur in areas where the air temperature may be elevated at the ceiling level, but especially where there is a lack of ventilation.
On smooth ceilings, optical beam smoke detectors should generally be mounted between 0.3m to 0.6m from the ceiling.
In many cases, however, the location and sensitivity of the detectors shall be the result of an engineering evaluation that includes the
following:
Structural features
Size and shape of the room and bays
Occupancy and uses of the area
Ceiling height and shape
Surface and obstructions
Ventilation
Ambient environment
Burning characteristics of the combustible materials present
Configuration of the contents in the area to be protected.
The results of an engineering evaluation may require an installation at a reduced height to defeat the effects of stratification or other
obstructions.
(A) This plume is narrow at the ground level and expands at higher levels; it can be detected readily at these levels.
(B) This fire is slow to develop; the temperature of the plume cools around 10m to 15m causing it to stratify at this level.
(C) This plume develops at lower levels and doesnt cool until it reaches higher elevations. Due to the high temperature, its size is equal
from floor to ceiling.

There is no sure way of identifying what condition will be present at the start of a fire. Any of the
following detection schemes can provide for prompt detection regardless of the condition present at the
time of fire initiation:
Upward optical beam smoke detectors Horizontal optical beam smoke Horizontal optical beam smoke
to detect the smoke Layer: detectors to detect the smoke layer at detectors to detect the smoke plume:
various Levels:
The purpose of this approach is to quickly The purpose of this approach is to quickly The purpose of this approach is to detect
detect the development of a smoke layer detect the development of a smoke layer the rising plume rather than the smoke
at whatever temperature condition exists. at whatever temperature condition exists. layer. For this approach, an arrangement of
One or more optical beam smoke One or more optical beam smoke optical beam smoke detectors close
detectors are aimed at an upward angle to detectors are located at the ceiling. enough to each other to assure
intersect the smoke layer regardless of the Additional optical beam smoke detectors intersection of the plume is installed at a
level of smoke stratification. For redundancy are located at other levels lower in the level below the lowest expected
when using this approach, more than one volume. The exact positioning of the stratification level. The spacing between
optical beam smoke detector is optical beam smoke detectors is a optical beam smoke detectors is based on
recommended. function of the specific design but should the narrowest potential width of the plume
include optical beam smoke detectors at at the level of detection.
the bottom of any identified unconditioned
(dead-air) spaces and at / or near the
design smoke level with several
intermediate optical beam smoke
detectors positions at other levels.
Comparison with point-type detectors

Point-type detector Optical beam smoke detector
High air velocity: High air movement does not have as great as an effect on optical
High air velocity may blow smoke out of the sensing chamber; beam smoke detector. An optical beam smoke detectors
thus reducing the point-type detectors performance. sensing range can be typically as long as 100m. It is therefore
less likely that smoke will be blown out of the optical beam smoke
Coverage / spacing: detectors sensing range.
Radius = 7.5 metres
Lateral coverage = 7.5 metres either side
Distance between detectors = 10 metres
Distance between detectors = 15 metres
Qty required to cover 1,500 m2 = 15 units min
Qty required to cover 1,500 m2 = 1 unit
Installation / maintenance in wide areas:
Along the end walls only.
To all detectors situated across the ceiling, which require
individual connection / testing.
Optical beam and point-type smoke detectors have their own applications.
Fewer devices = lower installation and maintenance costs.
Interface to fire panels

3.6.1. Conventional optical beam smoke detector
Conventional optical beam smoke detectors are very versatile;

they are compatible with any conventional control panel and by
using them in conjunction with a suitable interface control module,
they can be added to any intelligent system irrespective of the
communication protocol between the control panel and detectors.

Zone powered optical beam smoke detector
Zone optical beam smoke detectors are zone powered (lower

current consumption) because they are designed to be interfaced
directly onto the zone without the need for a separate power
supply.
Addressable optical beam smoke detector
Addressable optical beam smoke detectors are loop powered

(lower current consumption) and designed to be individually
recognised within an intelligent system. This can be achieved
either from the control panel (soft addressing) or from the device
itself (hard addressing).
Install an optical beam smoke detector

Structure
Optical beam smoke detectors must be mounted on stable In cases where only one stable mounting surface as defined above
stationary surfaces for proper operation: to prevent movement can be used, and a reflected optical beam smoke detector has
and subsequent misalignment. A surface that moves, shifts, been chosen, the transceiver should be mounted to the stable
vibrates, or warps over time will cause false alarm or trouble surface and the reflector should be mounted to the less stable
conditions. Initial selection of a proper mounting surface will surface. The reflector has a much greater tolerance for the
eliminate false alarms and nuisance trouble signals. unstable mounting locations defined above.
Mount the optical beam smoke detector on a stable mounting DO NOT MOUNT the optical beam smoke detector on corrugated
surface, such as brick, concrete, a sturdy load-bearing wall, metal walls, sheet metal walls, external building sheathing,
support column, structural beam or other surface that is not external siding, suspended ceilings, steel web trusses, rafters,
expected to experience vibration or movement over time. non-structural beam, joists or other such surfaces.
Reflections and obscurations
Reflective objects too near to the line of sight can reflect the
infrared light beam from the transmitter. If this occurs, the whole
area may not be protected or movement of these reflective
objects can cause false alarms.
There must be a permanent clear line of sight between the Any object in the infrared light beam path could cause a reduction
transmitter and the receiver / reflector. in signal and ultimately may prevent the system from operating
correctly.
Optical cross talk

Optical beam smoke detectors should be positioned adequately to
avoid the infrared light beam from other optical beam smoke
detectors falling on the detector, either directly or indirectly.
Mounting receivers or reflectors back to back creates a high

possibility for infrared light overspill.
If a pair of optical beam smoke detectors is to be used to cover a

long jump, then Transmitters should be positioned back to back.
Sensitivity Sunlight / artificial lights
Sensitivity is the smoke obscuration (% / metres) over a distance Light sources of extreme intensity such as sunlight and artificial
(metres). lamps, if directed to the receiver, can cause a dramatic signal
change resulting in fault and alarm signals.
The optical beam smoke detectors working environment (dust,
humidity, etc.) is an element to be considered whilst selecting the Pointing the receiver to the rising or setting sun should be avoided.
sensitivity level.
If possible, the exposure should be North/South.
If the sunlight cannot be avoided, the receiver should be mounted

slightly higher than the transmitter or reflector, causing the
receiver to look below the horizon.
Heat sources
Sources of high heat level can affect the line of sight between the Transmitter and the Receiver, and may have an adverse effect on the
performance of the optical beam smoke detector.
If possible, heat sources need to be placed as far as possible to the line of sight in order to avoid the potential of the heat haze distorting
and attenuating the infrared light beam.
Testing procedures
After successful installation and alignment (see manufacturers specific alignment procedure), the optical beam smoke detectors
will require testing for both fire and trouble conditions.
Smoke test Trouble test
Taking into account the sensitivity threshold set during the The receiver optics (for the projected type optical beam smoke
installation, the optical beam smoke detector can be smoke tested detector) and the reflector (for the reflected type) should be
by progressively obscuring approximately half the receiver optics covered totally. The reflector should be covered with a
(for the projected type optical beam smoke detector) or half the non-reflective material.
reflector (for the reflected type) with non-reflective material. The
transmitter optics must remain uncovered during the smoke test. The optical beam smoke detector should indicate a trouble
condition after a defined time by activating the trouble indicator.
The optical beam smoke detector will indicate a fire within a
defined time (typically 10 seconds) by activating the fire indicator Once the obstruction has been removed, the optical beam smoke
and closing the fire relay. detector will automatically return in the conditions prior to the
trouble, within a defined time.
Once the environment is back to satisfactory levels and if the
optical beam smoke detector is not latched, the device will
automatically return in the conditions prior to the fire, within a
defined time. If the optical beam smoke detector is latched, the
device will have to be reset manually.
There must be a permanent clear line of sight between the Any object in the infrared light beam path could cause a reduction
Transmitter and the receiver / reflector. in signal and ultimately may prevent the system from operating
correctly.
Commission an optical beam smoke detector

Once optical beam smoke detectors are installed, as part of an The commissioning of optical beam smoke detectors need to
automatic fire alarm system, it needs to be commissioned and set encompass at least the following checks:
to work before it can be formally handed over to the purchaser.
Have the optical beam smoke detectors been
Commissioning is a process that involves thorough testing of the
installed suitably? (structurally, electrically)
system. Every optical beam smoke detector (and all other devices
of the system) must be activated in order to establish that the Are the optical beam smoke detectors aligned
system operates correctly and in accordance with the adequately? (no obstructions, reflections)
recommendations of the locally used standards and codes. Are the optical beam smoke detectors
responding accordingly to trouble and fire
alarm tests?
Are the trouble and fire alarm tests reported at
the fire panel?
Have the optical beam smoke detectors been
properly connected to the fire panel?
Maintain an optical beam smoke detector

Before starting any maintenance on optical beam smoke detectors, the proper authorities need to be notified that the optical beam smoke
detectors will be temporarily out of service. The zone or whole system managing the optical beam smoke detectors that are undergoing
maintenance is disabled to prevent unwanted alarms and possible dispatch of fire services personnel.
Optical beam smoke detectors are designed to be as maintenance-free as possible. However, it is essential that routine checks (such
as regular tests and scheduled service visits) and the special servicing are carried out in order for the optical beam smoke detectors to
remain fully operational and to function effectively in an alarm condition.
Remember to advise the authorities notified at the beginning of the maintenance activities that it has been completed and the whole
system is operational again.
Routine checks should consist of: Special servicing will be required under special
circumstances:
Visual inspection of all devices for physical
damages and any other condition that might impair
After a fire
proper operation If an unacceptable rate of false alarms is
The installation remains mechanically (fixture) and experienced
electrically (wiring) optimal When a new maintenance organisation is
No major changes to the environment: the line of contracted
sight is respected and reflections or obstructions Following long period of disconnection
have not been added
Trouble and aire alarm tests
If necessary, the lenses and / or the reflector can be cleaned with

a damp soft cloth. Washing liquid, alcohol or detergent must not
be used.
In both circumstances, if any actions need to be undertaken, the installation and alignment criteria need
to be fulfilled and the testing procedure must subsequently be carried out again.
7. FIRERAY optical beam smoke detectors

FIRERAY range of optical beam smoke detectors is the widest in the world, offering a complete solution:
Projected = FIRERAY 2000 range

Reflected = FIRERAY 50R/100R range
Reflected & Motorised = FIRERAY 5000 range
There are also a number of accessories that have been specially engineered to suit specific applications and the variation of standards /
codes requirements.
Approvals
All FIRERAY optical beam smoke detectors are being sold and installed across 80 countries on all continents, thus carrying an
extensive range of approvals.
7. FIRERAY optical beam smoke detectors
Projected range
FIRERAY 2000 Explosion proof (EExd)
The FIRERAY 2000 a projected optical beam smoke The FIRERAY 2000EExd is an explosion / flame proof optical
detector. beam smoke detector and is ATEX approved.
Its greatest attribute is its small dimension combined with its

cosmetic appearance, making the FIRERAY 2000 the optical
beam smoke detector of choice for aesthetically demanding
applications (historic buildings, museums, churches, mosques) and
environments prone to reflections.
Specifications are listed on the products data sheets.
The multiway version enables management of 3 or 4 sets of Transmitter and Receiver heads (either standard or explosion proof) from only
one control unit.
Accessories Surface mount wall
Obscuration test filter Bracket (EExd)

To perform a sensitivity test It eases the alignment procedure
of 25% to 100% obstruction. by pivoting horizontally
and vertically.
Alignment Tool
To assist in the alignment

of the Receiver at the Protective Cage
installed location. This allows
one person to set up, test and To protect the FIRERAY 2000
maintain the FIRERAY 2000. from damage leading to
misalignment and trouble alarms.
FIRERAY reflected range

FIRERAY 50R / 100R
The FIRERAY 50R / 100R is a modern designresulting primarily

from the desire to reduce the installation costs: the wiring is only
required to the single transceiver unit whilst the Reflector is only
mechanically installed.
FIRERAY 50R covers an area up to 50 metres in length, using

one Reflector.
FIRERAY 100R covers an area beyond 50 metres and up to 100

metres, using 4 Reflectors.
Accessories
LLT remote test station Surface mount wall bracket
Allows testing of the optical

For optical beam smoke
beam smoke detector from
detector and reflector, it
ground level. Device is
can be mounted horizontally
compatible with FIRERAY
or vertically and generate
50RU and FIRERAY 100RU
angles up to 45 degree.
(RU are UL listed variant).
Data link cable:

Surface mount back box
A pre-wired 2-conductor cable
assembly used to send data
Includes 2 x - conduit
from the optical beam smoke
knockouts on each side and a
detectors (UL listed only) to the
termination block.
LLT station.
Reflector (prism)
Replacement unit for

FIRERAY 50 and 100R Protective cage
To protect the FIRERAY

2000 from damage leading to
misalignment and trouble
alarms.
FIRERAY reflected range

FIRERAY 5000
The FIRERAY 5000 is the latest in optical beam smoke detector

technology.
Its design has been inspired by the advantages of the existing

FIRERAY projected and reflected units supported by the concept
of addressing the needs during installation, setting-up,
commissioning and operation.
FIRERAY 5000 combines a ground level system controller and

reflective technology, with a motorised transceiver detector head.
The installation is simplified with both the detector head and the
system controller using an easifit first fix system.
The setting-up and commissioning procedures are faster and

easier thanks to a number of groundbreaking features that make
FIRERAY 5000 the industry leading optical beam smoke
detector.
LASER assisted alignment: once the detector During operation,

head is connected, an integral LASER can be FIRERAY 5000 LCD
activated. This allows the reflector to be sighted display allows full user
quickly and with confidence. interaction with the unit.
The system can be fully
customised, according
Auto beam alignment: once the lLaser has been
to local conditions.
used to coarsely align the IR beam, the auto
beam alignment process takes over and, thanks to
the built-in motor, automatically steers the IR
beam into the optimum position.
The auto-optimise function automatically steers the detector head
Multi-detector wiring: subject to local installation by moving its built-in motor, and maintains an optimum beam
guidelines up to 4 detector heads can be wired alignment, particularly in the event of building movement.
into one controller, thus saving on wiring and FIRERAY 5000 covers range 8-50 metres using one reflector and
power supply requirement. 50-100 metres using 4 Reflectors.
Specifications are listed on the products data sheet.
Accessories
Reflector (prism) System controller semi
flush trim plate
Replacement unit for
FIRERAY 5000. Mounts on system controller
back box for semi flush
installation.
Long range reflector kit
Three additional reflectors for

use when the installation is Detector head back box
between 50 and 100 metres
from detector head. Back box includes knock-outs
on all four sides. Will mount
over single gang, double gang
or 4 square box.
Universal mounting bracket
Bracket pivots for accurate

alignment of FIRERAY 5000 or
reflector. Detector head cover plate
Use with detector head back

box. Pre-drilled to mount the
detector head.
Single reflector alignment
adaptor
Comes pre-drilled to mount one

reflector. Designed to mount on
the universal mounting bracket.
Ceiling pendant mount bracket
Comes pre-drilled to mount

detector head. Supplied with
1-2 long nipple. Can be used
4 reflectors alignment for single or bi-directional
adaptor applications. Includes 2 mounting
plates and one blank cover.
Comes pre-drilled to mount 4
reflectors. Designed to mount on
the universal mounting bracket.
reflector
Protective cage
To protect the FIRERAY 5000

Wall bracket from damage leading to
misalignment and trouble
Comes pre-drilled to mount one alarms.
(up to 50 metres) or 4 (from 50
to 100 metres) reflectors. Hole
pattern on side mounting flange
similar to unistrut.
System controller back box
Includes conduit knock-outs on

top and bottom. Surface or flush
mount. Will mount to single
gang, double gang or 4 square
box.
FIRERAY Reference List

Fire Fighting Enterprises Ltd (FFE) is the world leader in the
manufacture of optical beam smoke detectors and has
established an excellent reputation for the supply of fire detection
products within the global fire industry.
In the past twenty-five years, more than 600,000 FIRERAY

optical beam smoke detectors have been produced from the
manufacturing site in the UK, despatched and installed in
applications across all continents and over 80 countries.
FFE offers the widest range of optical beam smoke detectors to

protect lives, equipment and properties. The projects are
numerous; a selection has been listed hereafter:
UK: Scottish Exhibition Centre, Glasgow Middle

West Ham Football Stadium East: Dubai Airport, UAE
London Heathrow Airport Qatar Petroleum, Qatar
Gateshead Metro Centre Financial Centre, Bahrain
Buckingham Palace Khafji Project, Saudi Arabia
New Tate Gallery Saudi Aramco, Saudi Arabia
Portcullis House World Trade Centre, Bahrain
Blenheim Palace Amman Shopping Mall, Jordan
British Museum New Doha International Airport, Qatar
The Sage SAAD Health Science Centre, Saudi
Arabia
USA: US Capitol Abu Dhabi Pension & Retirement Fund
Jacksonville Arena HQ, UAE
MGM Grand Hotel
Griffith Observatory Asia: Museum and Esplanade MRT Stations,
Boston Opera House Singapore
University of Texas, Austin LongTan Hydropower Station, China
Tropicana Resort & Casino Bangkok King Power Mall, Thailand
Bryant St Pump - DCWASA SPP Shipbuilding, South Korea
White House Visitor Centre FusionPolis, Singapore
Chicago Bears Training Ground Dewan Majilis Parliament House, Brunei
Mando - Iksan division, South Korea
Europe: Mercedes Benz, Rastatt factory Chek Lap Kok Airport, Hong Kong
2004 Athens Olympic Centres, Greece KLIA Low Cost Terminal, Malaysia
Westpoort Rotterdam, Netherlands Festive Walk, Hong Kong
Neuschwanstein Castle, Germany
Sofia National Theatre, Bulgaria
Bilbao Exhibition Centre, Spain
Palace of Parliament, Romania
Pushkino Warehouse, Russia
Kaleom Salt Mine, Belarus
Riga Airport, Latvia
Conclusion to this guide

Recognising the capabilities and limitations of all types of smoke
detectors is essential to the proper design of an automatic fire
alarm system. Optical beam smoke detectors should be
considered and might be the smoke detector of choice before
selecting other types.
Optical beam smoke detectors are an efficient and economical

way of protecting lives, equipment and properties where:
- areas are wide

- ceilings are high
- architecture cosmetic / aesthetic is important
- cost of installation and servicing is low
All the information is given in good faith but

Cooper Safety Fire Systems cannot be held
responsible for any errors or omissions. We are
grateful to readers who notify us in the event of
any need for corrections.
Section 7. 3.3 - Choosing the right optical beam & smoke detectors
Wide area detection - choosing the right optical beam smoke detector
You have a large indoor area to protect, so beam detection is the obvious choice here we look at how
to make sure you get the right beam system for the job
So remind me, what is beam detection?
Infrared beam smoke detection uses invisible Infrared (IR) light beams to detect the presence of smoke particles between two points,
typically on opposite walls of an internal space. Because these points can be up to 100m apart, it can be a very efficient way of providing
fire protection for large indoor areas.The result is that one single beam system can protect an area up to 1500m2 (BS5839) or
19,800 sq ft (NFPA 72) - offering drastically reduced wiring and installation requirements compared to other fire detection methods for
covering such a space.
A beam detection system is composed of three main parts: a transmitter, a receiver, and a controller unit. The transmitter projects the
beam, the receiver measures the intensity of light reaching it with a photosensitive sensor, and the control unit processes the data and
interfaces with a fire control panel. The beam heads containing the transmitter and receiver are typically installed on vertical, opposing
walls, just below ceiling level. The controller unit will usually be at ground level for ease of access - without this any maintenance or
adjustment would be a lot more difficult!
Various configurations of these fundamental elements are possible depending on the product chosen, typically falling into two main types
of beam detector system: end to end or reflective.
What are my options?
A reflective system has the beam transmitter (Tx) and receiver (Rx) housed in the same transceiver head (TR), with the beam reflected
back across the protected area by a prismatic reflector plate mounted on the opposing surface (fig1).
Figure 1 The prismatic reflector plate bounces the IR light back to the transceiver unit
An end to end system has separate detector heads for the transmitter and receiver components, mounted so they are facing each other
across the protected area, one on each side (fig2).
Figure 2 An end to end system has the transmitter and receiver in separate detector heads
The controller unit is connected to the single transceiver head in a reflective system and to the receiver head only in an end to end system,
though the transmitter head still requires wiring for power.
Why wouldnt I always want a reflective system then
Because reflective systems only require wiring on one side, they require less wiring than an end to end system. For this reason, reflective
detector systems are often the default choice to minimise installation time and therefore cost, however there are other factors to consider
when choosing a beam detector system.
Ceiling furniture
With the receiver and transmitter housed in the same unit, reflective beam detectors can be affected by objects that are situated very near
to the beam path. The sensor cannot tell if the light it is receiving is being bounced off the prismatic plate as intended, or off acloser surface
(fig 3).
Figure 3 reflective objects very near the beam path could return a signal to the transceiver
This could potentially be dangerous, as any smoke entering the It is important to note, however, that this is only ever an issue with
beam path behind the obstruction would not affect the total objects that are very close to the beams path: a clear line of sight
received signal as strongly as it should, because a portion of that of at least 1m diameter around a reflective beam path is typically
signal is coming from the obstructions reflection. Because of the recommended, though it is possible that a smaller aperture would
relationship between signal strength and distance (due to fall off be sufficient depending upon the specific circumstances of the
as per the inverse-square law), only a small amount of reflected situation.
light from a nearby obstruction could easily outweigh the signal
from the far-away prismatic plate; thus smoke obscuring that Because an end to end system has separate transmitter and
section of the beam path would not reduce the signal enough to receiver heads, there is no danger of reflected light entering the
trigger a fire status. system. Any light bouncing back from reflective surfaces would
only hit the transmitter not affecting the signal strength. The
receiver will still only getting the light it is meant to, and so the
system will retain complete stability and reliability (fig 4).
Figure 4 reflections
have no effect on the
transmitter in an end to
end system, which can
operate effectively with
only a small aperture
With the correct setup and positioning of an end to end system, a path the same width of the receiver
is sufficient for effective and reliable operation; in practice a 0.6m diameter line of sight is typically
recommended. Evidently, this means that end to end beams are better suited for installations where
there is only a narrow gap for the beam, or lots of objects near to the beam path that could cause reflec-
tions.
In image 1, we can see that the supporting structure of the warehouse presents only a narrow
uninterrupted column of space between the opposing walls near the ceiling. Although it is be possible to image 1 although this
set up a reflective system to work without issue across that space, it would be easier to specify, installation actually used a
install and set up an end to end system. reflective beam system, an
end to end one would be
The struts and girders wouldnt interfere much with smoke particle distribution, but obviously have the much easier to set up and
potential to obstruct or reflect the infrared beam and being aware of these things before they are prob- install
lems could save a lot of time in the long run.
Sunbathing
Beam detector systems are designed to be highly tolerant to ambient light sources, using electronics and software to filter out unwanted
light frequencies. Just like the human eye though, a beam receiver is not immune to very strong, direct light. If a beam receiver or
transceiver can see the sun in its field of view near to the beam path, its photoelectric sensor may become saturated by the intensity of
the light. This field of view is relatively narrow, so it is not a common situation, however it is best to be aware of the fact and that it can be
easily avoided.
Just like with stray reflections, the transmitter head in an end to end system is unaffected by direct light of any intensity. Intelligent
positioning of an end to end system can therefore solve the issues that might be caused by sunlight, simply by pointing the receiver away
from the sun (fig 5).
Figure 5 Even direct sunlight has no effect on the transmitter head in an end to end system
By contrast, a reflective system needs both ends of the beam to be effectively shaded, as light added to either end will affect the signal:
whether shining directly onto the transceiver or firstbouncing off the prismatic reflector on the other side, the light still enters the system.
It is also worth noting that buildings or environments with a lot of glasswork can also be problematic - anyone whos been blinded by the
Gherkin building in London on a sunny day knows how brightly that kind of architecture can shine.
The atrium in image 2 is an ideal space to protect with beam detection, as the area to be covered and the height of the ceiling means that
point detectors may not only be prohibitively expensive, but also ultimately less effective than beams.
With one wall completely windowed though, there is obviously the potential for large amounts of direct sunlight to enter the building. Use
of a reflective beam system here would then not be advised, unless both ends of the system could be safely shaded. An end to end
system however could easily be positioned with the transmitter facing the sun, largely solving the problem from the start and making the
whole process much easier.
Hiding in plain sight
Historical buildings, highly-designed modern architecture and

ornately-decorated interiors have also all made good use of beam
detectors unique advantages. For example, it would be a terrible
shame to punctuate a spectacular frescoed ceiling in a grand ca-
thedral with a dozen of the finest white plastic smoke detectors,
and though it could do wonders for modesty it would hardly
preserve the work as the artist intended even if the wiring could
be done without damaging the surface.
Image 2 an end to end system was specified for this installa-

tion to easily keep the receiver safely shaded from sunlight
In image 3, even without considering aesthetics it would be
unacceptable if not impossible to mount a detector on the vaulted
ceiling.Because beam systems are wall mounted this would not
be a problem, and a single one could span the whole length of the
hallway.
In order to really minimise the visual footprint of the fire detection

system in a place like this though, it would certainly be worth
considering the use of an end to end system rather than a
reflective one. Despite a reflective system only needing one head
unit, because it is housing both the transmitter and receiver this
head is substantially larger than the separate units found on an
end to end system. The prismatic reflector is also quite a lot bigger
than a single head unit, and could look very out of place in such
classical surroundings.
Image 3 the ornate ceiling of this historic building poses no

problems to beam detector systems
Image 4, depicts two of the leadingand most modern infrared beam

detector products available today: on the left is the FIRERAY 3000
end to end system, and on the right is the FIRERAY 5000 reflective
system. Clearly, the end to end system has a much less obtrusive
presence, and with thenarrower beam path needed there is scope
to better hide the detector heads in and amongst any ornate
decorations. Of course, in some historical buildings wiring is the
most difficult challenge to overcome; in which case the reflective
system makes more sense as all necessary wiring can be on one
wall only, connecting both the transceiver head and the controller.
Image 4 FIRERAY 3000 end to end system
Best in class
One of the best things about beam detection is that the principle behind it is beautifully simple and effective. This means that it can be all
too easy to think that a beam is just a beam, and there is no more to it than that the key, however, is in maximising the efficiency,
effectiveness and ease of use of the underlying principle with the right technology and features.
For example, the inclusion of a low-level controller unit instantly makes the initial setup and continued maintenance of the system much
easier, cutting out much of the need for work at height. Much innovation and many advances have also been made in recent years to ease
and speed the installation and setup process for beam detectors.In conjunction with better information, training and increased awareness,
this has meantthat not only is commissioningquicker and smoother than ever before, but there is also a lower incidence of issues thereaf-
ter.
As already mentioned, the FIRERAY 5000 and 3000 models are at the forefront of infrared beam smoke detection, representing the most
technologically advanced and fully-featured systems available. As well as a low-level controller unit, these products both incorporate first-
fix base plates, two-core cabling requirements, a visible laser for initial targeting and automatic gain compensation (AGC) to maximise
signal strength and stability over time. In addition to these features, the reflective 5000 model also has a motorised auto-alignment
capability to automatically point and keep the beam precisely on-target, even in the event of building shift.
Making the right choice

The aim of this article was to further examine the potential uses, advantages and limitations of the different types of beam detection
system available on the market to dispel the myth that a beam is just a beam and that all beams are alike, so that when choosing a
wide area smoke detection system the best decision can be reached by taking into account all the situational factors involved.
Primary factors tend to be ease of installation, ease of use, reliability and, of course, cost. Typically, reflective beam systems will offer the
best balance of these, and therefore should usually be the default choice. When, however, there are issues with objects near the beam
path, the potential for direct sunlight on the receiver head, or aesthetic considerations, it is highly recommended to look at the use of an
end to end system instead as this may offer considerable savings to time and cost, as well as fewer headaches down the line.
If you have any questions about wide area smoke detection that havent been answered here, please dont hesitate to contact us - as the
largest independent manufacturer specifically of infrared beam detection systems, we can offer the expert guidance needed to safely and
correctly choose and install the right detector for any situation.
Section 7. 3.4 - Getting the best from optical beam & smoke detectors
Getting the most from modern beam detection

The groundwork
Modern optical beam smoke detectors provide a simple and effective solution
for detecting smoke in large indoor areas. Part of this effectiveness comes
from their versatility, and it is well worth remembering that there is more to
beams than just sitting under a ceiling.
This article will explain some additional uses for beam detection, and in
particular how they can be used when waiting for the smoke to hit the roof is
not good enough.
A recap of the basics
In my previous article, Getting The Best From Beam Detection, we looked at

how the challenge of smoke detection in large indoor spaces sometimes
addressed by complex networks of multiple, overlapping point sensors can
often be more easily solved by the use of
optical beam smoke detection systems.
Beam detectors are specifically designed for this sort of situation, and have a wide area of coverage per beam of up to 1500m2 (BS5839)
or 19,800 sq ft (NFPA 72). The large area of coverage per beam is supported by a low cost of installation, simple maintenance, and re-
duced aesthetic intrusion to offer a tailor-made fire protection package for spacious indoor areas.
Modern beam detectors come with a control unit mounted at the operators eye-level. Using the control unit display, the user can easily
adjust beam settings, view system parameters and, with certain newer detectors, perform initial beam alignment using the integrated
visible alignment lasers.
A new technology that recently came to the market enables multiple detector heads to run on one single
control unit, providing even more efficient protection of larger areas. One controller for multiple heads
means less wiring, easier installation, and easier management particularly for effective coverage of
more unorthodox or complex indoor spaces.
In a fire as the smoke plume rises, it becomes less dense. Typically this therefore means that the higher
the ceiling, the lower the particle density at the height of detection at some point falling even lower
than the alarm threshold for point detectors. Due to these facts, there are limitations on the maximum
height of point detectors use, in some installation codes. By contrast, the same physics actually make
beam detectors more effective at height: as the smoke plume rises and widens, it affects a greater area
and subsequently involves more of the beam. This advantage also carries over into situations where
building airflows tend to disperse smoke around the ceiling, having less effect on the long, wide
detection pattern of a beam detector than the comparatively tiny sensor chamber of a point detector.
High sensitivity smoke detection (HSSD) or aspirating systems, which are also typically ceiling-mounted, are another option for large indoor
spaces, however they suffer from their complexity and time-consuming installation. A network of end-caps, sampling pipes, brackets,
elbows and labels must be designed, fitted and maintained, which can be costly and inconvenient depending on the specifics and
requirements of the situation. The aspirating pipe itself can also be quite obtrusive, and hiding it requires yet further work installing capil-
lary tubes and drilling into the ceiling. Also, as with point detectors, aspirating detectors are also constrained to lower heights in the instal-
lation codes.
Another level
Smoke detection systems rely on the hot gases and smoke from a fire rising to the ceiling to reach the detectors installed there. The
principle is that the ceiling acts as a trap for the products of the fire, collecting smoke and gas as the heat causes them to rise, thus
activating ceiling-level detectors. As we have already discussed, beam detectors are effective at greater heights than other methods, due
to the massively increased size of thesensing area essentially counteracting the problem of plume expansion and subsequent density
reduction with height. Typically however, they still benefit to a certain extent from the build-up effect caused by the ceiling. So, what if, for
whatever reason, not enough smoke reaches the ceiling to activate an alarm?
Layers of protection
An additional use of beam detectors, apart from traditional ceil-

ing-level sensing, is being mounted for a supplementary detec-
tion layer part way between the source of fire (usually the ground)
and the ceiling. When beams are mounted in such an additional
layer, the object is to actually detect the plume of smoke itself. In
this configuration they are spaced more closely and often set to a
higher sensitivity than when at height, since the plume itself may
be quite narrow at this level, and no ceiling means no build up of
smoke concentration. If mounted sufficiently low (whilst still
avoiding interference from normal activity in the building), they can
also see the fires flaming region or the heat haze to sound the
alarm.
A third potential detection application for beams is to detect smoke

in a stratification layer. Smoke particles are heavier than air and
would naturally fall to the ground, but for the heat and the hot air
that accompanies them, causing them to rise in a plume through
the colder surrounding air. As the plume rises, it draws in some of
this cool air, gradually cooling the plume itself. At a certain height,
depending on both the fire and environmental characteristics, the
plume can eventually become cooler than the air above it, and so
will stop rising.
In this situation, most commonly seen in high-ceilinged spaces, the smoke spreads out below the layer of warm air, as though trapped
under an invisible ceiling of its own. This obviously renders ceiling-mounted detectors (i.e. point and aspirating) less effective unless
and until the smoke breaks through the stratification layer. One solution to this problem is wall-mounted beam detectors, typically sited up
to 600mm (BS5839) or 24 (NFPA) below ceiling level, which are less likely to be in the clear air above the invisible ceiling. Some
installation codes such as NFPA 92B Smoke Control even allow beams to be angled so that they are not parallel to the ceiling, enabling
them to see through the stratification layer. This also allows the placement of the beam detector for easier access for installation and
maintenance. Of course, adding a supplementary beam layer as discussed above would also be a viable option to aid timely detection.
Another application that is not commonly known for beams is their use in sensitive electronic equipment rooms. Some standards of
practice specifically include beams as a potentially suitable detector type for exactly that environment.
Ultimately, the choice of detector and configuration depend upon the situation: the building geometry, the nature of the environment, the
speed of detection required based on an evaluation of risk, and the nature of combustible materials present and resulting likely smoke
energy and density. One of the key benefits of beam detectors is the versatility they inherently carry due to the relative lack of limitations
on their detection area and mounting position.
Top of the line
The constant process of innovation, development and refinement means that the modern optical beam smoke detector is well-equipped
and features more than just basic smoke detection.
We have the technology
One of the major advances on the actual detection side of things is the increased ability of some of the latest detectors to recognise the
differences between smoke and other sources of interference, reducing the potential for false alarms and protecting against things that
may impair fire protection efficacy.
For example, dust or dirt can easily build up over time on the beams active surfaces (lenses and reflector), resulting obviously in reduced
signal reception. This tends to be very gradual and follow a predictable pattern, so intelligent beam detectors recognise this for what it is
and adjust the beams gain (essentially amplification) to automatically compensate for this gradual drop in received signal, retaining an
optimal level for safe detection.The current Automatic Gain Compensation (AGC) value can also be checked on the low-level controller to
give an indication of when maintenance may be necessary.
Moving from the long-term to the short, sudden and very high beam obscuration is typical of solid objects blocking the beam path. Modern
beams are programmed to account for this, and know that it is not characteristic of smoke, so do not trigger an immediate alarm. If the
obstruction is present for more than a set time, the intelligent beam will indicate this as a fault, alerting the user so that appropriate
remedial action can be taken to restore full detection capability.
Some beam detectors now even feature motors inside the housing
to easily adjust the lens position and hence beam direction. In a
motorised beam detector, the user benefits from the rapid,
automatic and reliable alignment of such a system, letting the
software and hardware carry the burden of accurate alignment. This
technology also means that, in addition to the aforementioned
compensation for dust and dirt build-up, motorised beams can also
compensate for the misalignment that could be caused by building
shift. Using data over time, the beam automatically adjusts its
direction and sensitivity to keep the beam accurately targeted at the
reflector and the signal at an optimum level. This automatic self-
correction can even play a role if inadvertent impacts on the beam
move it out of alignment. This is helpful for busy areas like sports
halls, and even greater protection can be achieved by enclosing the
detectors in protective wire cage accessories.
These features make the modern beam less vulnerable to false

alarms and enable the beam to perform accurately and effectively
over a long period of time and, crucially, with minimal manual
maintenance. This gives it a lead in most large indoor areas
compared to the more complex, expensive and highly sensitive
alternatives.
End of the line
This article has explained some advantageous uses of beam

detectors, particularly in ways beyond the obvious ceiling-level
installation. It has also expanded on the impressive features of
modern and intelligent beam detectors, and how technological
advancements have made them more useful and versatile than
ever before. When installed and used properly, suitable beam
systems can find great use in a wide range of different projects,
with a variety of detection options available depending on the
variables of cost, wiring and space.
In short, beam detectors are an effective and simple choice for

smoke detection in almost any large indoor space, covering as
they do much larger areas than point-type smoke detectors and
with minimal installation, wiring and maintenance requirements
when compared to either point or smoke aspirating systems. By
keeping this information in mind, any user will be well positioned
to start getting the most from modern beam detection.
One last thing
The information in this article may only be applicable to certain

installations due to particular circumstances and regulations.
Standards such as EN54-12 and UL268 dictate the design and
construction of optical beam smoke detectors. Although the
operating range (linear distance) for a beam is dictated by the
manufacturers design and the approval gained for each beam
detector product, it is important to note that beam installation is
governed by the relevant national code of practice. Codes can vary
by territory in their definition of the accepted width of coverage
of a beam, its allowable height from the ceiling and positioning of
supplementary detectors.
Section 7. 3.5 - Getting the best from beams

Efficient and effective wide-area fire detection Large, wide-area
indoor areas can present a challenge to traditional fire safety
systems: in order to effectively detect smoke over such spaces,
complex networks of multiple overlapping sensors will be required.
Optical beam smoke detectors, on the other hand, are designed
exactly for such situations one single unit installed on a wall can
detect smoke over an area of up to 1500m2 (BS5839) . More
coverage per detector means fewer detectors, with associated
reductions to the time and cost of installation and wiring, as well
as a reduced aesthetic intrusion. Mounting on the wall as opposed
to the ceiling can allow more convenient access for maintenance,
and a low-level controller further speeds and eases the process.
A space which might need as many as 15 point detectors could
therefore be maintained from one single low-level controller, as
opposed to organising height access to 15 different spots.
There is already a lively debate about the relative merits and

drawbacks of different detection systems. A common theme is
that beam detection may not be as reliable or trouble-free as other
methods; however this is almost always due to incorrect
installation. Beams, in fact, can be much more suitable for some
situations than other detection systems, and this article will explain
how to get the best from beams.
How it all works
An optical beam smoke detector works on the principle of smoke

particles interfering with the transmission and reception of a beam
of infra-red (IR) light. A transmitter sends out a beam of IR light,
and a receiver a set distance away measures the amount of IR
light received. When smoke enters the beams path, the intensity
of IR received is reduced; when this reduction reaches a pre-
defined limit the alarm signal is triggered and sent to a fire control
panel. Most beam detector systems consist of a transmitter,
receiver and control unit. The transmitter projects the beam, the
receiver at the end of the beam measures its intensity with a
photosensitive sensor, and the control unit analyses and interprets
the signal before communicating the detectors status to a fire
control panel. These three elements can either be entirely separate
or completely integrated, depending on the system chosen. When
the transmitter and receiver are in the same unit, a prismatic panel
is fitted to the opposite wall where the receiver would normally
go, reflecting the beam back to the source and further reducing Beam smoke detectors are available for hazardous areas.
wiring requirements.
A good visual analogy is a torch beam of visible light: the beam expands outwards in a cone, its intensity dropping with distance from the
central axis. Beam detectors essentially detect how much darker the end of the beam has become due to smoke interference. In a torch
light, as with IR, beams can cross without scattering, which is what allows reflective beam systems to function. IR light is used as it is
significantly affected by both smoke particles and the heat haze of a fire, and is invisible to the human eye somewhat less intrusive than
an actual torch beam.

Combating common problems
A minor, gradual increase in obscuration is not typical of smoke interference, but might well be due to dust and dirt build-up on the active
surfaces. Software in more advanced beam detectors can detect this slow change, and increase the gain (a form of signal amplification)
to automatically compensate for this. By contrast, sudden and very high beam obscuration is almost certainly a solid object in the beams
path, and will trigger a Fault status so that the path can be cleared. In this way, intelligent beam detector systems are able to perform
accurately and effectively over a long period of time and with minimal manual maintenance.
Beam detector types
As their names suggest, and has been touched upon already, there
are two fundamental types of beam detectors. End-to-end systems
have the transmitter and receiver on opposite sides of the area to
be protected. They can be up to 100m apart, and the receiver can
be connected to a control unit installed at ground level for easy
maintenance. Reflective systems have the beam transmitter and
receiver in the same housing (a transceiver), with a reflective plate
on the opposite wall. This can still be up to 100m away, and the
plate is prismatic so that it will reflect the beam straight back, even
if it is not mounted perpendicularly to the transmission path.
End-to-end systems are relatively unaffected by stray reflections

from surrounding surfaces andobstructions near the beam path. A
reflective system, although potentially susceptible to objects near
its line of sight, is easier to install and requires less wiring as power
is only needed by the single transceiver unit. Essentially, end-to-end
beam detectors can operate ffectively through narrower gaps,
and will often be more suitable in more confined areas or those
with many obstructions (busy roof spaces for example). For spaces
where this is not an issue, reflective systems will usually be more
convenient.
Very recently, technology was also developed that allows the use of multiple transceiver heads running on one single controller. This
enables cost-effective protection for larger areas, and improved coverage options for unorthodox indoor spaces.
Motorised & manual adjustment
New developments in beam detection technology have led to a choice between inexpensive simplicity and intelligent automation.
Traditionally, adjusting the beams power and direction would have to be performed manually at the time of installation, and then
maintained over time to compensate for dust build-up and building shift. This is where building elements can gradually move in very slight
increments, affecting the beams aim and effectiveness.
Recently, the option has become available to choose automated, motorised beam adjustment. This technology uses data from the unit
over time to automatically adjust its direction and sensitivity to keep the beam accurately aligned and the signal at an optimum level. This
is fast, reliable, and eases installation, as well as reducing both the need and time taken for continued maintenance.
As already mentioned, by their nature beam detectors cover a huge area, and thus require fewer units and wiring than other detector
types, but there are other things to consider as well. Beams are less affected than other types of detector by high ceilings, harsh
environments and airflow blowing smoke away. As a smoke plume rises it becomes less dense, which leads to a maximum operating
height for point detectors since the particle density can fall below the alarm threshold. Since a beam operates over a linear path, the
density of the plume has no effect only the total number of smoke particles in the beam path. As the plume widens, it involves more of
the beam, making beam detectors more effective as height increases compared to other detectors.

Blowing smoke
Similarly, airflows that might blow smoke away from point

detectors tiny sensor chambers are going to have less effect on
the long, wide detection pattern of a beam system. Dust and
dirt build-up is taken care of by automatic beam signal strength
compensation, and extreme temperatures have relatively little
effect on the technology there are even beam detectors suitable
for use in explosive atmospheres.
A related, but separate problem can occur when a rising smoke

plume draws in surrounding air and cools rapidly as it rises,
sometimes actually becoming colder than the air above it. In this
situation, most commonly seen in high-ceilinged spaces, the
smoke spreads out below the layer of warm air, as though trapped
under an invisible ceiling of its own. This is known as stratification,
and it can render ceiling-mounted detectors ineffective due to the
lack of smoke particles reaching them. A typical solution to this
problem involves installing supplementary detection at lower levels
to detect the stratified layer or even the plume itself. Beam
detectors are wall-mounted, typically up to 600mm below ceiling
level, thereby giving them a significant advantage in detecting
stratification layers.
Breathe easy
High sensitivity smoke detection (HSSD) or aspirating systems are

another option for large indoor spaces, however they suffer from
their complexity and installation requirements. A network of
end-caps, sampling pipes, brackets, elbows and labels must be
designed, fitted and maintained, which can be costly and
inconvenient. The aspirating pipe itself can also be quite obtrusive,
and hiding it requires yet further cost and complexity from
installing capillary tubes and drilling into the ceiling.

As with almost all technology, an optical beam detector will work much better if it is properly installed and maintained. Most reported and
common knowledge problems with beam detection actually stem from improper installation and usage, but can be easily avoided by fol-
lowing some basic rules coupled with common sense.
A stable base
Beam detector elements must be mounted on rigid, stable surface

to limit the risk of misalignment: as with a torch, a tiny change in
the transmitters angle will cause a large movement at the other
end of the beam. Common problems come from mounting beams
on potentially flexible building surfaces such as cladded walls or on
free-hanging assemblies. Even building purlins can move,
particularly subject to ambient temperature changes causing
contractions and expansions, so are not recommended as stable
fixing points. So, if direct mounting onto brick or block walls is not
possible, it is recommended that beam components be installed
onto secure, rigid metalframe assemblies suspended from RSJs
(rigid steel joists).
A good stable fixing

surface
Reflection perfection
Reflective optical beam detectors can be affected by objects or

surfaces close to the line of sight between the beam and reflector.
Obstructions will not only interfere with the received signal,
cutting the IR intensity, but could leave areas hidden by their
shadow. If an obstructive surface were mistakenly used for
alignment during initial installation, it would leave the area behind it
completely unprotected. Confirming correct alignment is therefore
vital, with cover-up tests of the reflector a sound method for
ensuring that the whole area is properly protected.
Obstructions can im-

pair reflective beam systems
IR interference
Beam receivers should always be positioned to avoid other

sources of IR light. In the first instance, where multiple beam
detectors are in effect, each receiver should only have its
associated transmitters beam falling on it. If it is within the beam
of another detector system, crosstalk can occur producing false
Fire and Fault conditions. If two systems must be daisy-chained
to cover a long distance, the transmitters should be mounted
back-to-back rather than the reflectors or receivers, so as to
minimise interference. Other strong IR light sources, such as
direct sunlight, can cause IR saturation whereby much as with
the human eye it will be too bright to function properly. Normal
fluorescent lights emit very little IR light, though incandescent
bulbs, sodium lamps and camera flashes emit more; beams should
be positioned to avoid such stray light falling directly onto the
receiver.
Correct back-to-
back transmitter placement

Spacing
Standards such as EN54-12 dictate the design and construction of

optical beam smoke detectors. It is important to note, however,
that beam installation is governed by the relevant national Code of
Practice. Codes can vary by territory in their definition of the
accepted width of coverage of a beam, and its allowable height
from the ceiling. The operating range (linear distance) for a beam is
dictated by the manufacturers design and the approval gained for
each beam detector product.
Things that go bump in the night
One last, occasional concern is that various creatures of the night

bats and owls, usually might set off false alarms by flying along
the apex of a gabled or pitched roof. Although this could
conceivably be a problem, some beam detection systems can have
a delay timing set. This would then only send a fault or fire signal
after that condition had been registered for a certain time long
enough for any flying trespassers to flit away again.
Conclusion
This article has explained the mystery of optical beam smoke

detection, its viability and benefits, and how to get the best out of
it. In short, beam detectors are an excellent option for wide-area
smoke detection, covering much larger areas than point-type
smoke detectors and with minimal wiring requirements compared
to smoke aspirating systems. Different beam systems are
available to suit different projects, depending on issues of cost,
wiring and space. Possibly the most important point, though, is
that even the best technology in the world is worth nothing if it is
not used correctly, so following the golden rules for installation is
vital for safety and success. Bearing this information in mind,
optical beam smoke detection can and should be considered a
leading light in fire protection systems for large indoor areas.
Jon Ben is technical director at Fire Fighting Enterprises Ltd. His
role includes responsibility for all product development, technical
support and product training in the field of optical beam smoke
detection.
7.4 Miscellaneous
EVCs Type A outstation 7.4 Facilities for the disabled: Emergency voice communication system (EVCS) 7.4
Performance objectives ..........................................................................................................7.4.1
Design parameters..................................................................................................................7.4.2
System design.........................................................................................................................7.4.3
System components ..............................................................................................................7.4.4
Installation...............................................................................................................................7.4.5
Testing and commissioning.....................................................................................................7.4.6
Submissions............................................................................................................................7.4.7
Section 7. 4 - Performance and design
7.4.1 Performance objectives

To provide a secure and maintained two way communication system within the building for the functions of fire telephone, stewards
communication system, disabled refuge communication and disabled toilet alarm signalling.
All functions shall be combined in a single system, manageable from multiple locations where appropriate, to prevent miscommunication.
A single master handset shall take control during an emergency, and all communication between outstations, including conference calling
shall be controlled from that Master Handset.
7.4.2 Design parameters

The EVC system installation will comply fully with the edition (including amendments) of each of the following, current at the time of tender:
Building regulations approved document B

Building regulations approved document M
The fire precautions (sub-surface railway stations) regulations
The fire safety and safety of places of sport act
BS 31 Specification. Steel conduit and fittings for electrical wiring

BS 9999 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of buildings
BS 5839 Part 9 - Code of practice for the design, installation, commissioning and maintenance of
emergency voice communication systems
BS 7594 Code of practice for audio-frequency induction-loop systems (AFILS).
BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations: IEE wiring regulations.
BS 7807 Code of practice for design, installation and servicing of integrated systems incorporating fire
detection and alarm systems and/ or other security systems for buildings other than dwellings.
BS 7827 Code of practice for design, installation and servicing of sound systems for sports stadia
BS 8300 Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of disabled people. Code of practice
BS EN 54-4 Fire detection and fire alarm systems. Power supply equipment
BS EN 50086 Specification for conduit systems for cable management
BS EN 60118-4 Hearing aids. Magnetic field strength in audio-frequency induction loops for hearing aid purposes
BS EN 60702 Mineral insulated cables and their terminations with a rated voltage not exceeding 750V
Section 7. 4 - W15 Performance and design
7.4.3 System design

An EVC system enables communication between strategic points throughout the building or site and the central control point(s). EVC
systems are needed in the following situations:
In any building or sports or similar venues where there are disabled people or people who may have difficulty
negotiating the evacuation route.
In buildings with phased evacuation and/or fire-fighting lifts where it facilitates secure communications for building
managers, fire wardens and attending fire officers.
At sports venues and in similar complexes, where it will assist stewards in controlling the evacuation of the area in an
emergency.
In some buildings it might be necessary to take into consideration that the EVC system will address multiple uses and the outstation
design will reflect its intended use.
Design Guidance
The following should be consulted when determining the type and function of an EVC system:\
Approved document B (fire safety) Volume 2: buildings other than dwelling houses
BS 9999;
Guide to safety at sports grounds, fifth edition, 2008
Fire safety guide No 3, phased evacuation from office buildings. London district surveyors association
Guidance documents that support fire safety legislation;
Any authority responsible for enforcing fire safety legislation that applies to the premises.
Outstation choice
In general the following rules can be applied to outstation choices:
Type A For all uses by the fire service or fire wardens, and in all fire fighting lift lobbies
Type B In locations primarily used by the public, a refuge point shall be supplied in all designated refuge areas
Duo units Areas such as fire fighting lobbies which contain both a fire-fighting lift and a refuge area
Emergency assist call points In disabled toilets or shower areas, where attention is sought, but conversation is not
required
Outstation position
For the position of type A, B and duo outstations building regulations document B should be consulted, for the location of emergency
assist alarms building regulations document M should be consulted.
Documentation
Issue design certificate as required by BS5839 part 9 :2011.
Section 7. 4 - W15 System components
7.4.4 system components

The system shall comprise of three functional elements:
Master handsets (master controllers)

Exchange units (slave controllers)
Outstations (type A, type B, combined units or emergency assist call points)
On smaller systems items a and b may be combined into a single unit such as the VCC5 Compact or VCCM9 compact controllers
Master Handsets
Master Handsets shall be positioned at the main point(s) of attendance within the building or complex, and shall be used to control all
functions of the EVCS.
Master controls and indication
As a minimum the following LED Indications shall be provided on all systems:
Supply present (energised) - A green LED denoting presence of power

Supply fault A yellow LED denoting a fault in either the mains or battery supply
General fault A yellow LED denoting any fault on the system
System (CPU) fault A yellow LED denoting a code checksum fail or watchdog event
For systems of five outstations or less, control shall be by use of a single button per line with RED LED call and yellow LED fault indication
per line.
For all other systems control and indication shall be by a clear high contrast white backlit four line, twenty characters LCD with a high
contrast blue diffuser, giving clear indication of:
Current calls
Faults and logs
System status
Outstation directory
System menus
Control of the LCD shall be by a three button navigation system with the following functions:
Left (down) - scroll down a menu or decrement a value

Centre (accept) - accept currently highlighted value
Right (up) - scroll up a menu or increment a value
Slave exchanges
1. Slave exchange units interface outstations to the EVCS controller, in smaller systems this will be combined within
the master controller, in larger systems these will be distributed enclosures.
2. The slave exchange shall be housed in a metal enclosure with sufficient 20mm gland knockouts for all required
cables and suitable for mounting in a riser cupboard.
3. The slave exchange shall house a power supply for its own operation and the supply of current to master handsets as
required including:
A battery and charger to meet the requirements of EN54-4.
Ensuring the battery support has sufficient capacity to maintain the system operation for up to 24 hours in a quiescent
mode and 3 hour operation.
Ensure the battery charger is capable of re-charging discharged batteries to 100% of their rated capacity within a 24
hour period and more than 80% within 12 hours.
Ensure the power supply in the battery charger has a constant voltage output with compensation for variation in
battery temperature. Check batteries are protected from discharge by a solid state switch which disconnects the
negative terminal.
Design the power supply and supervisory board to maintain the batteries, on float charge and in good condition, for
ten years at an ambient temperature of 25 degrees C. Ensure the charger compensates for ambient temperature
changes in order to maximise the battery life and minimise the recharge time.
Section 7. 4 - W15 system components

Type A outstations
1. These outstations shall comprise a solid metal enclosure with a push door, and provided in either RAL3000 with a white
screen print or in a brushed stainless steel finish with a red screen print.
2. The enclosure shall contain a robust red handset on an extendable coiled cable.
3. The answering of a call, or the initiation of a call shall be by the lifting of the handset alone, no other actions shall be required
4. The enclosure should contain a red confidence LED which should light solidly when the handset is on hook, and flash
when the outstation is being called.
5. A sounder shall be present in the enclosure and ring when the outstation is being called.
Type B outstations
1. These outstations shall comprise a solid metal enclosure and provided with a green screen print with a white detail, or in a
brushed stainless steel finish with a red etched print.
2. The outstation shall be hands free in operation.
3. The answering of a call, or the initiation of a call shall be by pressing the call button, no other actions shall be required
4. The unit shall contain a red confidence LEDs which flash every three seconds to locate the call point in low light conditions,
and light solidly when a call is connected.
5. A sounder shall be present in the enclosure and ring when the outstation is being called.
Tactile braille shall be applied to the unit to identify the operation and raised edges shall be applied to the label to identify
operational buttons.
Duo outstations
1. These outstations shall comprise a solid metal enclosure with a push door, and provided in either RAL3000 with a white
screen print or in a brushed stainless steel finish with a red screen print.
2. The enclosure shall contain a robust red handset on an extendable coiled cable behind a push door, and a green hands-free
type B outstation on the front of the unit
3. The answering of a call, or the initiation of a call shall be by either pressing the call button on the hands free unit or the
lifting of the handset. The handset shall always over-ride the handsfree operation.
4. The unit shall contain a red confidence LED which should light solidly when the handset is on hook, and flash when the
outstation is being called.
5. A sounder shall be present and ring when the outstation is being called.
Emergency call outstations
1. The emergency call outstation comprises three components, the pull cord, the over door indicator and the cancel
point.
2. The disabled call system shall receive all power from the EVCS system and not require a local supply unit.
3. The interconnection for this unit shall be monitored by the EVCS by use of a 10K resistor in the pull cord unit
4. The cancel point shall be white with a blue label showing the word CANCEL in white text and Braille, it shall have a blue
halo which lights when the pull cord is operated
5. The over door indicator shall comprise a blue indicator on a white plate and a high level sounder, which illuminate/sound
when the pull cord is activated
Section 7. 4 - W15 Installations
7.4.5 Installation
Responsibilities
The EVCS installer shall coordinate with other installers to ensure correct inter-operability with other systems (including but not limited to
BMS, electrical, ceiling contractor) and to achieve proper spatial control of equipment and components. Install all equipment in the
locations as indicated on the design drawings. Ensure all equipment (except portable equipment) is firmly held in place. Check fastenings
and supports are adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three. If attachment to roof truss members is required to
lift equipment into place, only attach by permanent lifting eyelets provided in the roof truss. Do not weld or drill the steel roof truss, use
approved clamping arrangements employing neoprene or similar bearing pads for permanent attachment to trusses, protecting the truss
finish. Use multi-pin connectors or terminals to mechanically and electrically interconnect various items of equipment.
Cabling
Earth EVC cabling in accordance with BS 7671.
All wiring for type A and duo outstations and all network cables shall be in enhanced type fire resisting cables.
Type B outstations shall be wired in standard rated fired cables, except where they are at increased risk of exposure to
fire in adjoining fire compartments.
Disabled call units shall be wired in two core LSF cables as a minimum.
Lay the cabling on the dedicated fire alarm system/ EVC cable tray throughout the complex. Where cables are installed
on tray, fix the cables using fire rated clips.
Documentation
Issue an installation certificate as required by BS5839 part 9 :2011.
7.4.6 Testing and commissioning

Following the installation of the system, it shall be fully tested, commissioned and demonstrated to the client in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations and those of the standards listed in clause W15.200 of this specification. Liaise with manufacturers of
the interfaced systems to ensure all tests and demonstrations are fully co-ordinated.
Tests
1. Fully test calling from all outstations to master handset or handsets
2. Test calling from all master handsets to each outstation
3. Report any excessive noise on communication links
4. Measure the background noise at each of the master handset locations and ensure this is below 45dBA
5. Ensure no sounder or voice alarm speakers are in refuge locations
Procedure
1. Fully demonstrate the complete operation of the system to the satisfaction of the engineer.
2. Prepare a fully detailed method statement for the test, commissioning and demonstration stating exactly how these are to
be carried out including interface with the fire alarm system. Submit the statement to the engineer for comment one
month in advance of the test.
3. Fully test the EVCS to ensure the correct operation of all master handsets and outstations.
4. Provide three hard copies of the results on A1 or A0 layout drawings and include in the O&M instruction manuals.
Provide electronic copies of the drawings in AutoCAD 2000 format on a CDROM.
Documentation
1. Issue a system test certificate detailing compliance with all the relevant british standards and this specification.
2. Issue two hard copies of all documentation immediately to the engineer for comment prior to inclusion in the handover
documentation.
3. Following receipt of comments, amend all documentation (including as fitted drawings, O&M manual documentation and
system instruction drawings & manuals) and issue three hard copies and three electronic copies of all documentation.
Provide electronic text documents in either Microsoft Word or Excel format, and all drawings in AutoCAD format.
System instruction
1. Instruct the employers representatives on the operation of the system.
2. Include a practical demonstration of the installation and equipment. Arrange the required demonstration and agree the
times and dates with regard to the overall contract programme works.
3. Ensure that the as fitted manuals and drawings are made available for the employers demonstration and instruction.
Section 7. 4 - W15 submissions
Installers submissions
Operating and maintenance instructions for all items of equipment including: -

Master handsets
Exchange units
Outstations as appropriate
As wired drawings
BS5839pt9:2011 design certificate
BS5839pt9:2011 installation certificate
BS5839pt9:2011 commissioning certificate
Details of all system testing
Prepare all installations and record drawings, supply proper operating and maintenance instructions and provide adequate demonstration to
and training of the clients representatives, for the system in accordance with the standards listed in clause W15.200 and the relevant
sections of this specification.
'Fire Installer's Mate'

cc2478 Fire Systems & VADs Design Guide.qxp_Layout 1 12/02/2014 09:37 Page 1 cc2478 Fire Systems & VADs Design Guide.qxp_Layout 1 12/02/2014 09:45 Page 10 cc2478 Fire Systems & VADs Design Guide.qxp_Layout 1 12/02/2014 09:45 Page 17 cc2478 Fire Systems & VADs Design Guide.qxp_Layout 1 12/02/2014 09:48 Page 21
Fire Systems Design Pocket Guide Wall Mounted Devices - W-x-y
BS5839 Clause 16.2.1

BS 5839 Part 1:2013 and CoP 0001 for Visual Alarm Devices
BS5839 Clause 22.2c

W Wall Mounted Device
Lift Shaft Lift Shaft
Fire Installers Mate

75dB(A)
CoP 0001 Clause 4.6.3

1.5m
A guide to re system design y

x
For areas where people are sleeping, sounder devices should produce a Vertical shafts, such as lift shafts and open stairways, should have a device
minimum 75dB(A) at the bed-head with all doors shut. In buildings likely to mounted within 1.5m of any opening.
provide sleeping accommodation for the hearing impaired, consideration should y
be given to the incorporation of both audio and visual devices.
x The maximum height of the device on the wall in metres, with a
BS5839 Clause 20.2h

BS5839 Clause 22.2d
minimum value of 2.4m
y The width in metres of the square volume covered (to a minimum
level of 0.4 lux) when the device is mounted to the wall at a height x
>800mm
Example:
W-2.4-7.5 corresponds to a wall-mounted device giving a coverage
1.4m cuboid volume of 2.4m x 7.5m x 7.5m, when mounted at a height of
(+/-200mm) 2.4m.
3 TopTip
If the area to be covered is not square, use the larger of either the length
Voids less than 800mm in height are required to have a risk assessment to The centre of the element of the manual callpoint should be positioned or width to ensure that the whole area is covered.
determine if AFD is required. Voids in excess of 800mm require 1.4m (+/-200mm) from oor level (unless a wheelchair user is likely to be
If the distance (y) measured above is greater than the VADs rated
independent coverage. the rst person to raise the alarm, when this is applicable it should be
coverage, then several devices will be required to cover the area.
noted on any certication).
10 17 21
The 'Installer's Mate' is a handy pocket sized guide to

fire systems design, referring to BS5839 Part 1:2013.
The Installer's Mate also includes guidance on the new
EN-54-23 European standard and placement of VADs.
(Part code CFS-CC2478-FIM)
LX Range VADs and beacons Full fire product catalogue
From 31st December 2013 a new beacon standard, The new Eaton branded catalogue is designed to bring
EN 54-23 became mandatory across Europe where together the full range of fire safety products we have
Construction Product Regulation (CPR) applies. available - including intelligent addressable systems,
conventional systems, UL listed addressable systems,
Eatons LX range has been designed to comply with the
emergency voice communications and voice alarm
new EN 54-23 standard - three years in the making, the
systems.
LX range features a number of patented technologies
including an innovative lens and flash pattern. (Part code CF-CC2556)
(Part code CFS-LX2013CAT-V1)
All of our literature is also available electronically from our website: www.cooperfire.com
Contact
Eaton Sales Service Online Resources

Cooper Lighting and Safety Ltd T: +44 (0)1302 303 999 T: +44 (0)1302 303 352 Visit www.cooperfire.com for
Wheatley Hall Road F: +44 (0)1302 303 333 F: +44 (0)1302 303 332 the following resources:
Doncaster E: sales@cooperfire.com E: service@cooperfire.com
South Yorkshire 24/7 online product support
DN2 4NB Catalogue and literature
United Kingdom Technical and Quotations Export
Product profiles
www.cooperfire.com Datasheets, installation and
T: +44 (0)1302 303 350 T: +44 (0)1302 303 344
F: +44 (0)1302 303 332 F: +44 (0)1302 303 345 user manuals
E: techsupport@cooperfire.com E: export@cooperfire.com
Product code cross reference
Description Cooper Code Menvier Code JSB Code
2 Loop Control Panel CF2000GCPD DF2000GCPD FX2000GCPD
Passive Repeater Panel CF3000PRG DF6000PRG FX6000PR
Fire Alarm System Log Book MFALOG MFALOG MFALOG
1 Loop Control Panel CF1100VDS DF6100VDS FX6100VDS
2 Loop Control Panel CF1200VDS DF61002VDS FX61002VDS
Add to end of product code if network card required NC NC NC
Network kit (for retro fit) DF61NETKIT DF61NETKIT DF61NETKIT
Passive Repeater Panel CF3000PRG DF6000PR FX6000PR
Touch-Screen Repeater Panel CTPR3000 DTPR6000 DTPR6000
Fire routing equipment PCB ZPCB2187FRE ZPCB2187FRE ZPCB2187FRE
1 Loop Control Panel CF30001G DF60001 FX60001
1 Loop Control Panel, Integral Printer CF30001GP DF60001P DF60001P
2 Loop Control Panel, Integral Printer CF30002GP DF60002P FX60002P
2 Loop Control Panel, Extended Battery CF30002GEB DF60002EB DF60002EB
2 Loop Control Panel, Integral Printer, Extended Battery CF30002GPEB DF60002PEB DF60002PEB
4 Loop Control Panel, Integral Printer CF30004GP DF60004P FX60004-P
4 Loop Control Panel, Extended Battery CF30004GEB DF60004EB DF60004EB
4 Loop Control Panel, Integral Printer, Extended Battery CF30004GPEB DF60004PEB DF60004PEB
Add to end of product code if network card required NC NC NC
Touch-Screen Repeater Panel CTPR3000 DTPR6000 DTPR6000
Hinged Protective Cover Kit CF3000COV DF6000COV DF6000COV
Network kit (for retro fit) DF6000NETKIT DF6000NETKIT DF6000NETKIT
Printer kit (for retro fit) CF3000PKIT DF6000PKIT DF6000PKIT
Optical Smoke Sensor CAP320 MAP820 FXN723
Photo-Thermal Sensor CAPT340 MAOH850 FXN722
Heat Sensor CAH330 MAH830 FXN725
Loop connected remote indicator MRIAD MRIAD MRIAD
Standard remote indicator CIR301 FX251D FX251D
Weather resistant standard remote indicator CIR301WP CIR301WP CIR301WP
Staff warning device CAB382 MAB870 MAB870
Standard base CAB300 MAB800 FXN720
Sounder base CAS380 MAS850 FXN538
VAD Sounder beacon base CASBB394 CASBB394 CASBB394
Cover plate CASC CASC CASC
Bell tone sounder base CAS380B CAS380B CAS380B
Australian sounder base (Only for Australian Market) CAS380AU CAS380AU CAS380AU
Addressable relay base MAB800R MAB800R MAB800R
Base shroud BAR3000 BAR3000 BAR3000
Surface/Flush Callpoint CBG370S MBG813 FXN501
Weatherproof Callpoint CBG370WP MBG817 FXN503
Protective Hinged Cover (pack of 10) CXPC CXPC CXPC
Spacer Plates (pack of 10) MBGSP MBGSP MBGSP
Recessing Bezels (pack of 10) MBGBEZ MBGBEZ MBGBEZ
Resettable Element Kit (pack of 10) MBGREKIT MBGREKIT MBGREKIT
Spare Break Glasses (pack of 5) UBSG MBG118 FX5G
Callpoint Keys (pack of 10) MFBGKEY3 MFBGKEY3 MFBGKEY3
Internal Wall Sounder CAS381 MAS850LPS FXN538LPS
Weatherproof Wall Sounder CAS381WP MAS850LPSWP FXN538LPSWP
VAD Wall Sounder Beacon CASB393 FXN559LPS MASB880
Weatherproof VAD Wall Sounder Beacon CASB393WP FXN559LPSWP MASB880WP
Internal wall sounder bell tone CAS381B CAS381B CAS381B
Weatherproof wall sounder bell tone CAS381WPB CAS381WPB CAS381WPB
Australian internal wall sounder CAS381AU CAS381AU CAS381AU
Australian weatherproof wall sounder CAS381WPAU CAS381WPAU CAS381WPAU
VAD wall sounder beacon bell tone CASB393B CASB393B CASB393B
Weatherproof VAD wall sounder beacon bell tone CASB393WPB CASB393WPB CASB393WPB
Reflective Beam Detector (50m range) MAB50R MAB50R MAB50R
Reflective Beam Detector (100m range) MAB100R MAB100R MAB100R
Mounting Bracket MRBFP MRBFP MRBFP
Spare reflector MABR MABR MABR
Duct Probe Unit MDP201 MDP201 MDP201
Zone Monitor Unit CZMU352 MIU871 FXN512
Shop Monitor Unit CSUM355 MSU840 FXN516
Spur Isolator Unit CSI350 MSI850 FXN513
3 Channel Input/Output Unit Resets on reset CIO351 MIO324 FXN510

(recognised as 1 address)
3 Channel Input/Output Unit Resets on reset CIO351T MIO324T FXN510T

(recognised as 3 addresses)
3 Channel Input/Output Unit Rests on silence alarms CIO351S MIO324S FXN510S
230V ac Relay Unit CMIO353 MIO1240 FXN511
Fan Controller Unit (surface mount) FC6 FC6 FC6
Fan Controller Unit (rack mount) FC18 FC18 FC18
Fan Controller Unit FC6-AU FC6-AU FC6-AU

(Australia standard - supplied w/o back box)
Technical Input/Output Unit CFC301 CFC301 CFC301
4 Way Mimic Relay Board, 4 Inputs, 4 Outputs CIOP4 CIOP4 CIOP4
8 Way Mimic Relay Board, 8 Inputs, 8 Outputs CIOP8 CIOP8 CIOP8
4 to 20mA Interface CGI420 CGI420 CGI420
4 to 20mA Interface (relay output) CGI420R CGI420R CGI420R
Micro Zone Monitor Unit MIU872 MIU872 MIU872
Micro Single Channel Output Unit MCOM MCOM MCOM

(recognised as output unit)
Micro Single Channel Output Unit (recognised as sounder) MCOM-S MCOM-S MCOM-S
Micro Single Channel Output Unit (5 second reset pulse) MCOM-R MCOM-R MCOM-R
Micro Single Channel Input Unit MCIM MCIM MCIM
Mini module box unit (empty box) ULBU ULBU ULBU
Dual-channel LonWorks BMS Interface (non handshake) EC200 EC200 EC200
Dual-channel LonWorks BMS Interface (handshaking) EC200H EC200H EC200H
Dual-channel LonWorks BMS Interface EC200S EC200S EC200S

(self configuring for use with EC700)
Lon to RS232 Adapter EC0232 EC0232 EC0232
Lon to RS232 Adapter EC0232PAVA EC0232PAVA EC0232PAVA

(for HMX PA/VA system - no handshake)
Lon to RS232 Adapter EC0232PAVA3D EC0232PAVA3D EC0232PAVA3D

(for HMX PA/VA system - 3 min time delay)
TCP/IP Interface EC400 EC400 EC400
Lon Network Booster EC540 EC540 EC540
BACnet Gateway EC650B EC650B EC650B
Modbus Gateway EC700 EC700 EC700
Single Mode Lon to Fibre Optic Adaptor CFSFL01 CFSFL01 CFSFL01
Dual Channel Lon to Fibre Optic Adaptor CFSFL02 CFSFL02 CFSFL02
Loop Splitter Unit ZPCB2222 ZPCB2222 ZPCB2222
Mimic PCB (master) ZPCB2252-MML ZPCB2252-MML ZPCB2252-MML
Mimic PCB (slave) ZPCB2252-MSL ZPCB2252-MSL ZPCB2252-MSL
24V 1.5A PSU P CASE FX1-5ABP FX1-5ABP FX1-5ABP
24V 1.5A PSU G CASE FX1-5ABG FX1-5ABG FX1-5ABG
Graph pack software (lite) GRAPHPACK1-2LITE GRAPHPACK1-2LITE GRAPHPACK1-2LITE
Graph pack software (1 panel) GRAPHPACK1 GRAPHPACK1 GRAPHPACK1
Graph pack software (2-5 panels) GRAPHPACK2-5 GRAPHPACK2-5 GRAPHPACK2-5
Site monitor + EC0232 GRAPHSITEMON GRAPHSITEMON GRAPHSITEMON
Site monitor / webserver software SITEMONITOR SITEMONITOR SITEMONITOR
Loop Tester Kit LP800KIT LP800KIT LP800KIT
Addressable Device Programmer CF800PROG CF800PROG CF800PROG
USB panel interface USBINT2 USBINT2 USBINT2
UL Approved
2 Loop Panel ULCF30002G ULDF60002G ULFX60002G
2 Loop Panel, Integral Printer ULCF30002GP ULDF60002GP ULFX60002GP
2 Loop Panel, Network Card ULCF30002GNC ULDF60002GNC ULFX60002GNC
2 Loop Panel, Red Metal Box ULCF30002GRM ULDF60002RM ULFX60002RM
2 Loop Panel, Integral Printer, Network Card ULCF30002GPNC ULDF60002GPNC ULFX60002GPNC
2 Loop Panel, Integral Printer, Red Metal Box ULCF30002GPRM ULDF60002PRM ULFX60002PRM
2 Loop Panel, Network Card, Red Metal Box ULCF30002GNCRM ULDF60002NCRM ULFX60002NCRM
2 Loop Panel, Integral Printer, Network Card, Red Metal Box ULCF30002GPNCRM ULDF60002PNCRM ULFX60002PNCRM
4 Loop Panel ULCF30004G ULDF60004G ULFX60004G
4 Loop Panel, Integral Printer ULCF30004GP ULDF60004GP ULFX60004GP
4 Loop Panel, Network Card ULCF30004GNC ULDF60004GNC ULFX60004GNC
4 Loop Panel, Red Metal Box ULCF30004GRM ULDF60004RM ULFX60004RM
4 Loop Panel, Integral Printer, Network Card ULCF30004GPNC ULDF60004GPNC ULFX60004GPNC
4 Loop Panel, Integral Printer, Red Metal Box ULCF30004GPRM ULDF60004PRM ULFX60004PRM
4 Loop Panel, Network Card, Red Metal Box ULCF30004GNCRM ULDF60004NCRM ULFX60004NCRM
4 Loop Panel, Integral Printer, Network Card, Red Metal Box ULCF30004GPNCRM ULDF60004PNCRM ULFX60004PNCRM
Rack Mounted 2 Loop Panel ULR3000L2 ULR3000L2 ULR3000L2
Rack Mounted 2 Loop Panel c/w Network Card ULR3000L2NC ULR3000L2NC ULR3000L2NC
Rack Mounted 4 Loop Panel ULR3000L4 ULR3000L4 ULR3000L4
Rack Mounted 4 Loop Panel c/w Network Card ULR3000L4NC ULR3000L4NC ULR3000L4NC
Loop repeater panel ULCF3000PRG ULDF6000PRG ULFX6000PRG
Network touchscreen repeater panel ULCTPR3000 ULDPTR6000 ULFPTR6000
Addressable Sensor Base UCAB300 UCAB300 UCAB300
Optical Smoke Sensor UCAP320 UCAP320 UCAP320
Photo-Thermal Sensor UCAPT340 UCAPT340 UCAPT340
Heat Sensor UCAH330 UCAH330 UCAH330
2 Wire Detector, Optical UCPD-2W UCPD-2W UCPD-2W
2 Wire Detector, Opto-Heat UCPT-2W UCPT-2W UCPT-2W
2 Wire Detector, Fixed Heat 135F UCHT-2W UCHT-2W UCHT-2W
2 Wire Detector, Fixed Heat 194F UCHTI-2W UCHTI-2W UCHTI-2W
2 Wire Detector, Rate of Rise and Fixed Heat 135F UCHR-2W UCHR-2W UCHR-2W
2 Wire Detector, Rate of Rise and Fixed Heat 194F UCHRI-2W UCHRI-2W UCHRI-2W
Standard Detector Base CB2E CB2E CB2E
Wall Mount Horn HNR HNR HNR
Ceiling Mount Horn HNWC HNWC HNWC
Wall Mount Horn Strobe HSR HSR HSR
Wall Mount Synchronised Strobe STR STR STR
Ceiling Mount Horn Strobe HSWC HSWC HSWC
Ceiling Mounted Synchronised Strobe STWC STWC STWC
Wall Mount Outdoor Synchronised Strobe RSSWP-2475W-FR RSSWP-2475W-FR RSSWP-2475W-FR
Ceiling Mount Outdoor Synchronised Strobe RSSWP-2475C-FW RSSWP-2475C-FW RSSWP-2475C-FW
Exposed Conduit, Surface Mount Back Box (RED) WPSBB WPSBB WPSBB
Concealed Conduit Surface Mount Back Box (RED) WPSBB + WPKIT WPSBB + WPKIT WPSBB + WPKIT
Single Action Pull Station (addressable) UMPS-100 UMPS-100 UMPS-100
Weatherpoof Single Action Pull Station UMPS-100WP UMPS-100WP UMPS-100WP
Double Action Pull Station UMPS-200 UMPS-200 UMPS-200
Conventional single action pull station (back box ordered seperately) SG42BK2 SG42BK2 SG42BK2
Conventional double action pull station (back box ordered seper- SG42BK1 SG42BK1 SG42BK1
ately)
Back box for conventional, surface mounting SGB32S SGB32S SGB32S
Back box for conventional, weatherproof SGB-32C SGB-32C SGB-32C
4 Way Sounder Controller Unit ULCSC354 ULCSC354 ULCSC354
Zone Monitor Unit ULCZMU352 ULCZMU352 ULCZMU352
Shop Monitor Unit ULCSUM355 ULCSUM355 ULCSUM355
Spur Isolator Unit ULCSI350 ULCSI350 ULCSI350
3 Channel Input/Output Unit Resets on reset ULCIO351 ULCIO351 ULCIO351
3 Channel Input/Output Unit Resets on silence alarms ULCIO351S ULCIO351S ULCIO351S
120V/230V ac Relay Unit ULCMIO353 ULCMIO353 ULCMIO353
Micro Zone Monitor Unit ULMIU872 ULMIU872 ULMIU872
Micro Single Channel Output Unit (recognised as output unit) ULMCOM ULMCOM ULMCOM
Micro Single Channel Output Unit (recognised as sounder) ULMCOM-S ULMCOM-S ULMCOM-S
Micro Single Channel Input Unit (recognised as input unit) ULMCIM ULMCIM ULMCIM
Micro Single Channel Input Unit (recognised as callpoint) ULMCIM-C ULMCIM-C ULMCIM-C
Mini Module Box Unit (Empty box) ULBU ULBU ULBU
Conventional
2 Zone Control Panel CFP4002 MFP4002 FXP4002
Repeater Panel (only compatible with 8 zone panel) CFPRP4000 MFPRP4000 FXPRP4000
Steel Back Box FX22003300 MB FX22003300 MB FX22003300 MB
8 Zone Control Panel CF5008 MF5008 FXP5008
16 Zone Control Panel CF50016 MF50016 FXP50016
Repeater Panel CF5000RP MF5000RP FXP5000RP
5 in 1 Multi-Mode Detector FXN922 FXN922 FXN922
Optical Smoke detector CPD321 MPD821 FXN533
Photo-Thermal detector CPT341 MPT951 FXN632
Rate of rise heat detector CFR330 MFR830 FXN525
Fixed Heat detector 77C CMT360 MMT860 FXN524
Fixed Heat detector 92C CMT390 MHT890 FXN526
Remote Indicator CIR301 FX251D FX251D
Weatherproof Remote Indicator CIR301WP CIR301WP CIR301WP
Standard Base CDBB300 MDB800 FXN520
Relay Base FXN520R MDB800R FXN520R
Reflective Beam Detector (50m range) MBD50R MBD50R MBD50R
Reflective Beam Detector (100m range) MBD100R MBD100R MBD100R
Mounting Bracket MRBFP MRBFP MRBFP
Duct Probe MDP201 MDP201 MDP201
Surface/Flush Callpoint CX201 MBG914 FX201
Weatherproof Callpoint CX203 MBG917 FX203
Protective Hinged Cover (pack of 10) CXPC CXPC CXPC
Spacer Plates (pack of 10) MBGSP MBGSP MBGSP
Recessing Bezels (ack of 10) MBGBEZ MBGBEZ MBGBEZ
Resettable Element Kit (pack of 10) MBGREKIT MBGREKIT MBGREKIT
Spare Break Glasses (pack of 5) FX5G FX5G FX5G
Earth Continuity Links (pack of 5) MBG119 MBG119 MBG119
Callpoint Keys (pack of 10) MFBGKEY3 MFBGKEY3 MFBGKEY3
Internal 6 Inch Bell FX006 MBM246 FX006
Weatherproof 8 Inch Bell MWB824 MWB824 MWB824
Flush Sounder, Red FX003 MFS324 FX003
Flush Sounder, White FX003W MFS324W FX003W
Back Box For FX003, Red MFSSBB MFSSBB MFSSBB
Low Profile Surface Sounder, Red FX002SB FX002SB FX002SB
Weatherproof Surface Sounder, Red FX002DB FX002DB FX002DB
High Output Wall Sounder FX007 FX007 FX007
Low Current Wall Sounder MLC624 MLC624 MLC624
Base Mountable Sounder MDS824 MDS824 FXN824
Blanking Plate for MDS824 (pack of 5) MDS824COV MDS824COV MDS824COV
Solista Wall Red Body Shallow Base FXSOLWRS FXSOLWRS FXSOLWRS
Solista Wall Red Body Deep Base FXSOLWRD FXSOLWRD FXSOLWRD
Solista LX Ceiling FXSOLCWS FXSOLCWS FXSOLCWS
RoLP Wall Red Body Base & Sounder FXROLPWR FXROLPWR FXROLPWR
RoLP Wall Red Body Base FXROLPWR-B FXROLPWR-B FXROLPWR-B
Symphoni LX Wall Red Body FXSYG1WR FXSYG1WR FXSYG1WR
Symphoni LX Wall Base Red Body FXSYR-B FXSYR-B FXSYR-B
Symphoni LX Wall Weatherproof Red Body FXSYG1WR-WP FXSYG1WR-WP FXSYG1WR-WP
Symphoni LX Wall Weatherproof Base Red Body FXSYR-B-WP FXSYR-B-WP FXSYR-B-WP
Deep base for Solista LX Ceiling FX000WWP FX000WWP FX000WWP
Low Profile LED indicator MLB124SB MLB124SB MLB124SB
Weatherproof LED Beacon MLB124DB MLB124DB MLB124DB
Conventional xenon sounder indicator FL-RL-R-S FL-RL-R-S FL-RL-R-S
Weatherproof IP65 xenon sounder indicator FL-RL-R-D FL-RL-R-D FL-RL-R-D
Mains Powered Heavy Duty Door Retainer MDR240 MDR240 MDR240
24V dc Heavy Duty Door Retainer MDR24L MDR24L MDR24L
Floor Mounting Bracket for Heavy Duty Door Retainers ZMDRFBB ZMDRFBB ZMDRFBB
24V dc Compact Door Retainer FX02124VLC FX02124VLC FX02124VLC
Mains Powered Compact Door Retainer FX021240LC FX021240LC FX021240LC
Floor Mounting Bracket for Compact Door Retainers FX021LCFB FX021LCFB FX021LCFB
Spare Striker Plate For Either Magnet ZMDRSWIV ZMDRSWIV ZMDRSWIV
Heavy Duty Relay Unit MAR724 MAR724 MAR724
24V 1.5A PSU P CASE FX1-5ABP FX1-5ABP FX1-5ABP
EVCS & EAA
VoCALL 10 Line Networkable Master System, Desk Mount, Graph- EFVCMX10 EFVCMX10 EFVCMX10
ite
VoCALL 10 Line Networkable Master System, Wall Surface Mount, EFVCWSMX10 EFVCWSMX10 EFVCWSMX10
Graphite
VoCALL 10 Line Networkable Master System, Wall Flush Mount, EFVCWFMX10 EFVCWFMX10 EFVCWFMX10
Graphite
VoCALL 10 Line Networkable Master System, Surface Mount, EFVCWSMX10SS EFVCWSMX10SS EFVCWSMX10SS
Stainless Steel
VoCALL 10 Line Networkable Master System, Flush Mount, Stain- EFVCWFMX10SS EFVCWFMX10SS EFVCWFMX10SS
less Steel
VoCALL 10 Line Network Ready Exchange Unit, Graphite EVCNX10 EVCNX10 EVCNX10
VoCall Compact 5 Line Master Exchange Unit, Non-Network, Sur- ESVCC5 ESVCC5 ESVCC5
face Mount, Graphite
VoCall Compact 5 Line Master Exchange Unit, Non-Network, Flush EFVCC5 EFVCC5 EFVCC5
Mount, Graphite
VoCall Compact 5 Line Master Exchange Unit, Non-Network, Sur- ESVCC5SS ESVCC5SS ESVCC5SS
face Mount, Stainless Steel
VoCall Compact 5 Line Master Exchange Unit, Non-Network, Flush EFVCC5SS EFVCC5SS EFVCC5SS
Mount, Stainless Steel
VoCall 10 Line Non-Network, Master Exchange Unit , Wall Surface EFVCWSM10 EFVCWSM10 EFVCWSM10
Mount, Graphite
VoCall 10 Line Non-Network, Master Exchange Unit, Wall Flush EFVCWFM10 EFVCWFM10 EFVCWFM10
Mount, Graphite
VoCall 10 Line Non-Network, Master Exchange Unit, Wall Surface EFVCWSM10SS EFVCWSM10SS EFVCWSM10SS
VoCall 10 Line Non-Network, Master Exchange Unit, Wall Flush EFVCWFM10SS EFVCWFM10SS EFVCWFM10SS
VoCall Type A Outstation, Surface Mount, Red CFVCSHP CFVCSHP CFVCSHP
VoCall Type A Outstation, Surface Mount, Stainless Steel CFVCSHPSS CFVCSHPSS CFVCSHPSS
VoCall Type A Outstation, Flush Mount, Red CFVCFHP CFVCFHP CFVCFHP
VoCall Type A Outstation, Flush Mount, Stainless Steel CFVCFHPSS CFVCFHPSS CFVCFHPSS
VoCall Type A uncased red handset CFVCHFS CFVCHFS CFVCHFS
VoCallType A Outstation, IP65 Lockable, Surface Mount, Red CFVCIPA CFVCIPA CFVCIPA
VoCall Type B Outstation, Surface Mount, Red CFVCSHF CFVCSHF CFVCSHF
VoCall Type B Outstation, Surface Mount, Green CFVCSHFG CFVCSHFG CFVCSHFG
VoCall Type B Outstation, Surface Mount, Stainless Steel CFVCSHFSS CFVCSHFSS CFVCSHFSS
VoCall Flush Mounting Bezel for use with any Type B Outstation, CFVCFHB CFVCFHB CFVCFHB
Stainless Steel
VoCall Combined Type A and Type B flush mount outstation CFVCDUO CFVCDUO CFVCDUO
VoCall Jack Plate CFVCRJP CFVCRJP CFVCRJP
VoCall Roaming Handset CFVCRHS CFVCRHS CFVCRHS
Emergency assist alarm - vocall kit CFVCEA CFVCEA CFVCEA
Emergency assist alarm - stand alone kit CFEAPULLKIT CFEAPULLKIT CFEAPULLKIT
4 way splitter CFEASL4 CFEASL4 CFEASL4
High Current power supply unit CFEAPSU CFEAPSU CFEAPSU
Low current power supply unit CFEAPSUKIT CFEAPSUKIT CFEAPSUKIT
Over door indicator CFEAODI CFEAODI CFEAODI
Cancel button CFEARSP CFEARSP CFEARSP
Pull cord unit CFEAPULL CFEAPULL CFEAPULL
Pull Cord accessory pack CFEACORD CFEACORD CFEACORD
Disabled sticker (pack of 5) CFEADS CFEADS CFEADS
Voice
50W Single Channel Addressable DAU CFVADAU50 CFVADAU50 CFVADAU50
2 x 50W Dual Addressable DAU CFVADAU100 CFVADAU100 CFVADAU100
Emergency Microphone All Call CFVAEMA CFVAEMA CFVAEMA
Vandal Resistant Speaker SAFEV6-EN SAFEV6-EN SAFEV6-EN
Sound Projector Speaker Slide Bracket RAC15-EN RAC15-EN RAC15-EN
Sound Projector Speaker U Bracket PAC15-EN PAC15-EN PAC15-EN
Column Speaker CM20-EN CM20-EN CM20-EN
Ceiling Loudspeaker 4 Watt MC4-EN MC4-EN MC4-EN

Complete Spec Guide (Low Res) PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Complete Spec Guide (Low Res) PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Fire systems

Increase Reliable systems

End to end solutions for: Eatons capabilities include:

Ankara Esenboa International Airport

Doncaster Cultural and Civic Quarter

Excellence and innovation in

Our core values and aims are:

Our products and services are recognised by a wide range of accreditation

Manufacturing fire solutions is just

An introduction to fire systems

The basics of fire detection

In the event of a detector or call point being triggered, the

With this type of functionality a conventional system is best

Typical conventional system architecture

Example conventional system layout

By using each devices' unique address, the control panel

Under normal conditions the control panel continuously

With the functionality of being able to pinpoint exactly which

Typical addressable system architecture

Example addressable system layout

Emergency voice communication systems (EVCS)

UL listed fire systems

Public address/voice alarm systems

CF3000 and compatible devices 2.0 Intelligent addressable 2.0

interrogates each device in sequence using a low

In this manner, the panel can ascertain whether each 14 3

A typical practical benefit of this technology is the

The Eaton CF2000GCPD is an entry level intelligent Features and benefits

Technical specification Installation

COOPER CONVENTIONAL SOUNDERS

Dimensions (H x W x D) 400mm x 320mm x 170mm15kg

AUX FAULT 24V FIRE FIRE

W * required to be fitted to terminal if circuits not used

H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)

The CF1000VDS range is available as a high specification Features and benefits

An extensive range of compatible intelligent addressable

Eatons CF3000 is a high specification intelligent Features and benefits

Dimensions Catalogue numbers

CF3000PRG - Intelligent addressable

The CF3000PRG is a cost effective passive repeater Features and benefits

Technical specification Dimensions

Operating voltage 24V dc

System functionality Device overview

CTPR3000 - Intelligent addressable

The CTPR3000 touch-screen repeater panel provides Features and benefits

Technical specification Dimensions

CAP320, CAPT340, CAH330 -

Optical smoke sensor (CAP320) Photo thermal sensor (CAPT340)

Dimensions Catalogue numbers

MRIAD - Intelligent addressable loop

The intelligent addressable loop connected remote Features and benefits

Technical specification Dimensions

Alarm current 6mA

Humidity (non condensing) 0 to 95% RH

CAB300 - Intelligent addressable

The intelligent addressable sensor standard base Features and benefits

Technical specification Dimensions

1. Heavy duty terminals are provided for each connection, each - VE IN

CAS380 - Intelligent addressable

Technical specification Dimensions

3. Cables enter through aperture in base (rear entry only) NOTE:

CASBB394 - Intelligent addressable

Technical specification Dimensions